home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search
/ Ultimate Companion for Windows / WOW.bin / wow / other / ozw / ozw101d / wozgis.doc
Text File  |  1993-09-11  |  798KB  |  10,611 lines

  1.                                                                                 
  2.                                                                                 
  3.                                                                                 
  4.                                                                                 
  5.                                                                                 
  6.                                                                                 
  7.                                                                                 
  8.                                                                                 
  9.                                                                                 
  10.                                                                                 
  11.                                                                                 
  12.                                                                                 
  13.                                                                                 
  14.                                                                                 
  15.                                                                                 
  16.                                                                                 
  17.                                                                                 
  18.                                                                                 
  19.                                                                                 
  20.                                                                                 
  21.                                                                                 
  22.                                                                                 
  23.                                                                                 
  24.                                                                                 
  25.                                 OzGIS                                           
  26.                                                                                 
  27.                                 V10.1                                           
  28.                                                                                 
  29.                                                                                 
  30.                             For WINDOWS3.1                                      
  31.                                                                                 
  32.                             (August 1993)                                       
  33.                                                                                 
  34.                                                                                 
  35.                                                                                 
  36.                                                                                 
  37.                                                                                 
  38.                                                                                 
  39.                                                                                 
  40.                                                                                 
  41.                                                                                 
  42.                                                                                 
  43.                                                                                 
  44.                                                                                 
  45.                                                                                 
  46.                                                                                 
  47.                                                                                 
  48.                                                                                 
  49.                                                                                 
  50.                                                                                 
  51.                          The Clever Company.                                    
  52.                                                                                 
  53.                          QMDD Box 6108,                                         
  54.                          Queanbeyan,                                            
  55.                          Australia 2620.                                        
  56.                                                                                 
  57.  
  58.                                                                        2
  59.                PREFACE                                                          
  60.                                                                                 
  61. OzGIS is a software system for displaying geographically referenced data as     
  62. coloured maps on graphics display devices. The maps portray the data            
  63. values associated with geographic zones by uniform colours, site data by        
  64. different sized symbols, and line data by different line types.                 
  65. The system can be used to analyze socio-economic and demographic                
  66. data produced by censuses and surveys and to support management decisions       
  67. associated with for example marketing, sales, site and personnel location,      
  68. and advertising. Other spatial data such as environmental data can be displayed.
  69.                                                                                 
  70. The software was originally developed as part of a research project at the      
  71. Division of computing Research of the Commonwealth Scientific and Research      
  72. Organisation (CSIRO) in Canberra for a mapping product called COLOURMAP.        
  73.                                                                                 
  74. Software development started in 1979 with the purchase of hardware that had     
  75. been developed for the DIDS mapping system in the White House in Washington DC. 
  76. This hardware consisted of a PDP11 mini-computer and a DeAnza display system.   
  77. The display featured a 12bit frame buffer, 4096 value primary look-up table and 
  78. cascaded 256 value colour table. This enabled maps of up to 4000 zones (e.g.    
  79. USA Counties) to be displayed and manipulated very rapidly, and is the best     
  80. hardware so far produced.                                                       
  81.                                                                                 
  82. The environment changed over several years, with moves to larger PDP11 systems  
  83. and to VAX and CDC machines. Several display systems were used, Tektronix,      
  84. Jupiter and RAMTEK, and maps were generated on plotters and film recorders. The 
  85. system was also available on CSIRONET, an Australia-wide computer network with  
  86. Control Data and FACOM host computers. The 1981 ABS Census data could be        
  87. accessed via the SIR/CENSYS system on the Cyber 845. A system was developed to  
  88. handle the Census district boundaries digitised by the Division of National     
  89. Mapping, to enable windowing, line simplification and aggregation for production
  90. of geographic map data files. The SAS system was available on the FACOM 180 for 
  91. statistical analysis and display of map data.                                   
  92.                                                                                 
  93. The first year of development was supported by Techway, and APASCO supported    
  94. the development of techniques for retail applications. APASCO used the system   
  95. and hardware for several years as part of their consulting activities to churn  
  96. out thousands of maps.                                                          
  97.                                                                                 
  98.  The Division of computing research was split into the CSIRONET computing bureau
  99. and the new Division of Information Technology in 1985. Later, CSIRONET was     
  100. given to private industry. The mapping project was abandoned.                   
  101.                                                                                 
  102. The software was resurrected in late 1990 and ported to the IBM PC to produce   
  103. the current system.                                                             
  104.                                                                                 
  105.  The purpose of the Guide is to introduce the facilities of OzGIS. The Guide is 
  106. intended to complement the messages and assistance given during the operation of
  107. OzGIS.                                                                          
  108.                                                                                 
  109.  The user should understand the techniques of statistical data analysis and     
  110. computer mapping, and also have an elementary understanding of colour           
  111. representations.                                                                
  112.                                                                                 
  113.  
  114.                                                                        3
  115.                                                                                 
  116.                                                                                 
  117. The Clever Company is a Canberra based software company offering consulting and 
  118. contract programming services in the areas of:                                  
  119.                                                                                 
  120. . C and FORTRAN programming                                                     
  121. . Spatial databases                                                             
  122. . Scientific applications                                                       
  123. . Graphics                                                                      
  124. . UNIX workstation, minicomputer and PC environments                            
  125.                                                                                 
  126. The Clever Company was formerly Geismar Holdings Pty Ltd.                       
  127.                                                                                 
  128.  
  129.                                                                        4
  130.                     1. OzGIS INTRODUCTION                                
  131.                        ==================
  132.  
  133.                                                                                 
  134.                                                                                 
  135. This chapter gives an overview of the programs in the OzGIS system, the concepts
  136. behind the design of the system, and something about the software.              
  137.                                                                                 
  138.                                                                                 
  139.                                                                                 
  140.  
  141.   1. 1 Programs                                          
  142.        --------
  143.  
  144.                                                                                 
  145. The OzGIS system is available for DOS and WINDOWS3.1                            
  146.                                                                                 
  147. The DOS system consists of several modules:                                     
  148.                                                                                 
  149. OzEnter  - for entry of data files into the system.                             
  150. OzData   - preparation of data for mapping                                      
  151. OzZone   - formation of polygons / lines structure from line segments           
  152. OzGIS    - interactive display and analysis                                     
  153. OzCensus - Display and analysis of Census type data (subset of OzGIS)           
  154. OzGISco  - maths coprocessor version of OzGIS                                   
  155. OzMap    - output of saved displays on plotters and printers and to files       
  156. OzTerr   - definition of territories from zones                                 
  157. OzCatch  - site catchment analysis                                              
  158. OzProj   - map projections                                                      
  159. OzSpat   - spatial operations                                                   
  160.                                                                                 
  161. The WINDOWS version allows more RAM to be used, so most of the programs can be  
  162. combined (as was the original version).                                         
  163.                                                                                 
  164. WOzGIS    - most of the system. A variation allows for simple Census mapping    
  165. WOzMap    - output of saved displays on plotters and printers and to files      
  166.                                                                                 
  167. Note that you can only run one program at a time under WINDOWS.                 
  168.                                                                                 
  169. Start mapping with the Simple Census Mapping program, which is a subset         
  170. of the OzGIS program.                                                           
  171.  
  172.   1. 2 Concepts                                          
  173.        --------
  174.  
  175.  OzGIS aims to accept basic data files and to provide most of the facilities    
  176. required for the analysis and display of attribute data as maps. The            
  177. analyst has to be able to rapidly use the facilities, so OzGIS provides an      
  178. interactive user interface. The user interacts via menus and is aided by on-line
  179. assistance.                                                                     
  180.                                                                                 
  181.  Visual inspection of choropleth maps is the intuitive way to interpret the     
  182. spatial features of data. An analyst needs to be able to rapidly display and    
  183. manipulate maps to aid his understanding. OzGIS was designed to enable maps to  
  184. be changed within seconds so the analyst does not lose his train of thought.    
  185.                                                                                 
  186.  OzGIS enables the analyst not just to display a map, but to generate the map   
  187.  
  188.                                                                        5
  189. that best shows the features of the attribute data. A hardcopy map can be       
  190. generated as the final operation as a record or for dissemination.              
  191.                                                                                 
  192. Easy to use systems are either trivial systems, or have a small number of       
  193. options. The enormous number of options within OzGIS means that it takes        
  194. some time to understand everything. However, maps can be produced quite simply  
  195. by using only a small number of options and by using the system defaults.       
  196.                                                                                 
  197.                                                                                 
  198.  OzGIS can be considered as one system of a facility for analysis and display   
  199. of Census type data. The various components are:                                
  200.                                                                                 
  201.  - Database systems for manipulation and retrieval of attribute data            
  202.  - Systems for generation of map boundary data                                  
  203.  - Statistical analysis systems with graphic display and reporting facilities   
  204.  - Mapping systems with analysis and hardcopy facilities.                       
  205.                                                                                 
  206. Hence you may use:                                                              
  207. a CAD package for digitising geographic data                                    
  208. a database system for storing attribute data                                    
  209. a spreadsheet for manipulating numeric data                                     
  210. a statistics program for analysis                                               
  211. etc                                                                             
  212.                                                                                 
  213.  It is expected that an analyst would have access to a PC close to his          
  214. office. The PC/workstation may be connected via a computer network to           
  215. provide access to large host machines. The host machines would contain the      
  216. database systems from which map data could be extracted, and other systems for  
  217. analysis and hard-copy generation.                                              
  218.                                                                                 
  219.  
  220.   1. 3 Environment                                       
  221.        -----------
  222.  
  223.  OzGIS requires advanced raster display systems for rapid display of maps.      
  224. Unfortunately PC display systems are extremely limited in capability. In        
  225. particular only a maximum of 256 colours are available (on 512K super VGA       
  226. boards). OzGIS is able to generate maps on most graphic devices by using polygon
  227. fill to colour map zones. This faciity also allows for hardcopy generation of   
  228. maps previewed on raster displays.  PC display systems do not have hardware     
  229. polygon fill, so map display is slow.                                           
  230.                                                                                 
  231.  OzGIS is based on the GKS graphics standard. The standard provides device      
  232. independence, and the basic graphic capabilities of lines, text and fill. OzGIS 
  233. does contain its own set of GKS-type routines which can be used to interface to 
  234. display devices with hardware fill capabilities or to other device independent  
  235. packages. The INTERACTOR graphics package is used for the DOS version,          
  236. and the SCIPLOT package for hardcopy map production. The WINDOWS API is used    
  237. for the WINDOWS3.1 version.                                                     
  238.                                                                                 
  239.  OzGIS is a large FORTRAN program. It will run on computer systems with a       
  240. FORTRAN 77 compiler and about a mega-byte of memory. The system is well         
  241. structured, so by using overlays and reducing capabilities (array sizes) the    
  242. software can be implemented in smaller memory machines. Hence OzGIS is          
  243. reasonably portable.  The PC version is heavily overlayed to fit it into the    
  244. artificial 640K limit imposed by the DOS operating system. Later additions to   
  245. OzGIS are also being coded in 'C' and C++.                                      
  246.                                                                                 
  247.  
  248.                                                                        6
  249.                                                                                 
  250. The WINDOWS3.1 version enables extended memory to be used, although system      
  251. limits still prevent the hardcopy (SCIPLOT) part being incorporated into the    
  252. main program. A 386 with at least 4Meg of RAM and a mouse is required.          
  253.                                                                                 
  254. Generally the speed of the system is dependent on hardware:                     
  255.                                                                                 
  256. Processor 286 -> 386 -> 486                                                     
  257. Disk speed                                                                      
  258. Floating point processor                                                        
  259. Extra memory for RAM disk                                                       
  260.                                                                                 
  261. INTERACTOR is a graphics package produced by:                                   
  262.                                                                                 
  263. Interactive Software Services,                                                  
  264. 25 St Michael's Close,                                                          
  265. Penkridge,                                                                      
  266. Stafford. ST19 5AD.                                                             
  267. U.K.                                                                            
  268.                                                                                 
  269. We have found INTERACTOR very good, and the support is excellent.               
  270.                                                                                 
  271. SCIPLOT is a plotting package produced by:                                      
  272.                                                                                 
  273. MicroGlyph Systems,                                                             
  274. PO Box 474,                                                                     
  275. Lexington, MA 02173,                                                            
  276. U S A                                                                           
  277.  
  278.                                                                        7
  279.                     2. INSTALLATION                                      
  280.                        ============
  281.  
  282.                                                                                 
  283.                                                                                 
  284. This chapter describes how to set up the OzGIS system and how to make the       
  285. best use of your hardware.                                                      
  286.                                                                                 
  287. The READ.ME file supplied on the first floppy disk is a shorter version of this 
  288. chapter and may be an easier way to get started.                                
  289.                                                                                 
  290.                                                                                 
  291.                                                                                 
  292.                                                                                 
  293.  
  294.   2. 1 Installation                                      
  295.        ------------
  296.  
  297.                                                                                 
  298. The software is supplied on floppy disks with most files compressed by          
  299. the PKZIP program.                                                              
  300.                                                                                 
  301. The files must all be first copied to the hard disk drive that you are going to 
  302. use into a directory that must be \OZGIS.                                       
  303.                                                                                 
  304.                                                                                 
  305. The installation procedure is as follows:                                       
  306.                                                                                 
  307. 1. set up the \OZGIS directory                                                  
  308.                                                                                 
  309. CD \                                                                            
  310. MKDIR OZGIS                                                                     
  311.                                                                                 
  312. 2. copy all files from floppy disk to the \OZGIS directory                      
  313.                                                                                 
  314. CD \OZGIS                                                                       
  315. COPY a:*.* (for each disk)                                                      
  316.                                                                                 
  317. 3. Run the installation procedure                                               
  318.                                                                                 
  319. INSTALL                                                                         
  320.                                                                                 
  321.  
  322.   2. 2 Documentation                                     
  323.        -------------
  324.  
  325. The manual is usually supplied on disk as OZWIN.DOC                             
  326.                                                                                 
  327. The WOTSNEW.DOC file contains details of changes to the system.                 
  328.  
  329.   2. 3 Directories                                       
  330.        -----------
  331.  
  332. The installation process sets up two directories:                               
  333.                                                                                 
  334. \ozgis contains OzGIS system files                                              
  335. \ozdemo contains example map files                                              
  336.  
  337.                                                                        8
  338.                                                                                 
  339. You should also set up at least one directory for your own use e.g. \mapping    
  340. Your own directories must be on the same disk drive as \ozgis                   
  341.                                                                                 
  342.  
  343.   2. 4 Environment                                       
  344.        -----------
  345.  
  346. OzGIS should run on any WINDOWS3.1 system with at least 4Meg of RAM, a 386 or   
  347. 486 processor, and a mouse.                                                     
  348.                                                                                 
  349. Refer to the "Trouble Shooting" chapter if you have memory problems.            
  350.  
  351.   2. 5 Display Drivers                                   
  352.        ---------------
  353.  
  354. Standard VGA screens are adequate for simple maps, but it is recommended that   
  355. you purchase a super VGA video card and monitor to obtain the highest screen    
  356. resolution and the highest number of colours possible. 1MByte super VGA boards  
  357. that provide 1024X768 pixels and 256 colours are recommended.                   
  358.                                                                                 
  359. You have to run SETUP in the c:\windows directory to install the driver for a   
  360. super VGA board. See the WINDOWS manual.                                        
  361.                                                                                 
  362. OzGIS is very demanding and it is suspected that some manufacturer's drivers    
  363. may be inadequate. If you have problems try a more standard VGA driver.         
  364.  
  365.   2. 6 Installion in WINDOWS                             
  366.        ---------------------
  367.  
  368. Installation requires setting up (optionally) a program group and then defining 
  369. program items in it. This is described fully in the WINDOWS documentation.      
  370.                                                                                 
  371. For example:                                                                    
  372.                                                                                 
  373. Suppose the directories are on disk drive D: as D:\OZGIS, D:\OZDEMO and         
  374. D:\MAPPING                                                                      
  375.                                                                                 
  376. Then you might first set up a program group:                                    
  377.                                                                                 
  378. Select "New" from the "Files" menu in the Program Manager and                   
  379. give the new program group the name "OzGIS"                                     
  380.                                                                                 
  381. Then define all the programs and their directories as follows:                  
  382.                                                                                 
  383. Description:     Demonstration                                                  
  384. Command line:    d:\ozgis\ozdemo.exe                                            
  385. Work Directory:  d:\ozdemo                                                      
  386.                                                                                 
  387. Description:     Demo OzGIS                                                     
  388. Command line:    d:\ozgis\wozgis.exe  12   (dont leave off the 12!!)            
  389. Work Directory:  d:\ozdemo                                                      
  390.                                                                                 
  391. Description:     Demo Simple Census Mapping                                     
  392. Command line:    d:\ozgis\wozgis.exe  15                                        
  393. Work Directory:  d:\ozdemo                                                      
  394.                                                                                 
  395. Description:     Demo OzMap                                                     
  396.  
  397.                                                                        9
  398. Command line:    d:\ozgis\wozmap.exe                                            
  399. Work Directory:  d:\ozdemo                                                      
  400.                                                                                 
  401. Description:     Demo Vector                                                    
  402. Command line:    d:\ozgis\vector.exe                                            
  403. Work Directory:  d:\ozdemo                                                      
  404.                                                                                 
  405. And a similar set for your own directory:                                       
  406.                                                                                 
  407. Description:     Mapping                                                        
  408. Command line:    d:\ozgis\wozgis.exe 12                                         
  409. Work Directory:  d:\mapping                                                     
  410.                                                                                 
  411. Description:     Census-type mapping                                            
  412. Command line:    d:\ozgis\wozgis.exe 15                                         
  413. Work Directory:  d:\mapping                                                     
  414.                                                                                 
  415. Description:     Hardcopy maps                                                  
  416. Command line:    d:\ozgis\wozmap.exe                                            
  417. Work Directory:  d:\mapping                                                     
  418.                                                                                 
  419. Description:     Metafile output                                                
  420. Command line:    d:\ozgis\vector.exe                                            
  421. Work Directory:  d:\mapping                                                     
  422.                                                                                 
  423.                                                                                 
  424. Whenever you start a new project you will probably set up a new directory and   
  425. then define some program items to reference that directory.                     
  426.                                                                                 
  427. Some of the versions of WINDOWS do not allow you to give a working directory. In
  428. this case the working directory will be where the program is executed from i.e. 
  429. /OZGIS. You will then find it easiest to do all your mapping in \OZGIS. First of
  430. all move the \OZDEMO demonstration files to \OZGIS i.e.                         
  431.       cd \ozgis                                                                 
  432.       copy  \ozdemo\*.*                                                         
  433.       del   \ozdemo\*.*                                                         
  434.       rmdir \ozdemo                                                             
  435.                                                                                 
  436.  
  437.   2. 7 OzGIS initialisation file                         
  438.        -------------------------
  439.  
  440.                                                                                 
  441. The file \OZGIS\OZGIS.INI is the initialisation file for the system.            
  442.                                                                                 
  443. The file should NOT have to be modified initially.                              
  444.                                                                                 
  445. The file should be well commented, and modifications should be fairly obvious.  
  446. Ensure that you dont alter the columns used i.e. the file is not free format!   
  447.                                                                                 
  448. The first three lines should define you video board (although the system        
  449. currently gets the information from the WINDOWS screen driver).                 
  450.                                                                                 
  451.                                                                                 
  452. e.g. for the VGA board                                                          
  453.                                                                                 
  454.        640         Number of pixels across VGA screen                           
  455.        480         Number of lines on screen                                    
  456.  
  457.                                                                       10
  458.         16         Number of colours                                            
  459.                                                                                 
  460. The initial user interface settings for trace and help levels are here. You can 
  461. modify them later if you like.                                                  
  462.                                                                                 
  463. An important part of the file is the entries that define the fonts that are     
  464. used. There is more information about these in the section on the formats of    
  465. device files.                                                                   
  466.                                                                                 
  467. The first font in the list is usually used (set to Arial initially).            
  468.                                                                                 
  469. You can view the fonts on your system by choosing the Fonts icon in the Control 
  470. Panel window.                                                                   
  471.                                                                                 
  472. If you find that no text is displayed on maps you probably do not have the      
  473. usual fonts installed so will have to change to one that you have.              
  474.                                                                                 
  475. Fonts have to be variable size so TrueType fonts should be used.                
  476.                                                                                 
  477. There has been some problems setting correct sizes so dont change fonts unless  
  478. there is good reason to do so.                                                  
  479.                                                                                 
  480.  
  481.   2. 8 Demonstration                                     
  482.        -------------
  483.  
  484.                                                                                 
  485. You should start by looking at the OzGIS demonstration which consists of a      
  486. series of saved maps.                                                           
  487.                                                                                 
  488. You can run the demonstration from the item in the program group you just set   
  489. up.                                                                             
  490.                                                                                 
  491.  
  492.   2. 9 First Example Map                                 
  493.        -----------------
  494.  
  495.                                                                                 
  496. The first example is a choropleth map of Australia, which is an example of a    
  497. very common type of map to display attributedata like Census data, sales data,  
  498. or government statistics.                                                       
  499.                                                                                 
  500. Within WINDOWS run the "Demo OzGIS" program item that you just set up.          
  501.                                                                                 
  502. Choose Map from the toolbar, and then DISPLAY ZONES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE       
  503. from the pulldown menu.                                                         
  504.                                                                                 
  505. give the attribute file name as OZ                                              
  506.                                                                                 
  507. give the geographic file name as OZ                                             
  508.                                                                                 
  509. You will have a default map with legend and distribution diagram. The legend    
  510. has the numbers of zones in each class on the left and the class value ranges   
  511. to the right of the coloured boxes.                                             
  512.                                                                                 
  513.                                                                                 
  514. You will find that the map does not change when you choose an option. This      
  515. enables several parameters to be set before going through the slow map drawing  
  516.  
  517.                                                                       11
  518. process. You have to specifically ask for the changes to be applied.            
  519.                                                                                 
  520. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  521.                                                                                 
  522.  
  523.   2.10 Second Example Map                                
  524.        ------------------
  525.  
  526.                                                                                 
  527. The next example is the display of digitised map data for Hawaii. These types   
  528. of maps show polygon (here islands), line (roads, rivers etc) or points data    
  529. (e.g. towns).                                                                   
  530.                                                                                 
  531. Click the second icon on the toolbar to return to the top menu.                 
  532.                                                                                 
  533. Choose the Map pulldown menu again, and then DISPLAY GEOGRAPHIC FILES.          
  534.                                                                                 
  535. Choose the menu option DISPLAY POLYGONS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                  
  536.                                                                                 
  537. Give the file name as "HAWDLGWB".                                               
  538.                                                                                 
  539. Accept the default polygon number and give the legend text as "Hawaii".         
  540.                                                                                 
  541. Accept the default (No) for drawing polygon boundaries.                         
  542.                                                                                 
  543. The islands of Hawaii will be drawn.                                            
  544.                                                                                 
  545. Choose the option OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                  
  546.                                                                                 
  547. Give the file name "HAWDLGST"                                                   
  548.                                                                                 
  549. Accept the default line number and give the legend text as "Rivers".            
  550.                                                                                 
  551. This example uses two files originally in DLG-3 optional format, off the USGS   
  552. CD-ROM.  This is a simplified example; usually feature codes in these files are 
  553. used to subset the data e.g. to draw rivers and streams in different colours.   
  554.                                                                                 
  555.                                                                                 
  556. Finally -                                                                       
  557.                                                                                 
  558. Choose "Quit" from the Files menu.                                              
  559.  
  560.   2.11 Hardcopy configuration                            
  561.        ----------------------
  562.  
  563. Configuration for production of hard-copy maps via OzMap is described in the    
  564. appendix.                                                                       
  565.  
  566.   2.12 Digitiser (not implemented)                       
  567.        ---------------------------
  568.  
  569. Configuration for digitising is described in the relevant chapter               
  570.  
  571.                                                                       12
  572.                     3. DATA ENTRY                                        
  573.                        ==========
  574.  
  575.                                                                                 
  576.                                                                                 
  577. This chapter shows how to import your data into the OzGIS system.               
  578.                                                                                 
  579.                                                                                 
  580.                                                                                 
  581.                                                                                 
  582.                                                                                 
  583.                                                                                 
  584.  
  585.   3. 1 Introduction                                      
  586.        ------------
  587.  
  588.                                                                                 
  589. Most data are entered into OzGIS as external data files. Examples are Census    
  590. data and Census digitised boundaries. These files come from Census Bureaux,     
  591. Mapping agencies, data supply companies or your own data-base systems.          
  592. Some data can be prepared or modified with word processors or spreadsheets.     
  593.                                                                                 
  594. Several data fornmats are supported. If your format is not supported            
  595. you have to convert it into one of the supported formats or the OzGIS standard  
  596. format for the type of file.                                                    
  597.                                                                                 
  598. The data entry options are initiated by choosing IMPORT DATA FILES from the     
  599. File menu.                                                                      
  600.                                                                                 
  601. The main menu enables selection of the type of file:                            
  602.                                                                                 
  603. IMPORT GEOGRAPHIC FILES                                                         
  604. IMPORT ATTRIBUTE FILES                                                          
  605. IMPORT A NAMES FILE                                                             
  606. IMPORT A COMBINE FILE                                                           
  607. IMPORT A DEVICE FILE                                                            
  608. IMPORT A MARKER FILE                                                            
  609.                                                                                 
  610. Choosing a menu item may generate another menu e.g. for GEOGRAPHIC FILES        
  611.                                                                                 
  612. IMPORT A STANDARD FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                        
  613. IMPORT NEW FORMAT SAS GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                           
  614. IMPORT OLD FORMAT SAS GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                           
  615. IMPORT A DLG-3 OPTIONAL FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                  
  616. IMPORT A GINA FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                            
  617. IMPORT A TIGER FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                           
  618. IMPORT A DIME FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                            
  619. IMPORT A DXF FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                             
  620.     .                                                                           
  621.     .                                                                           
  622.     .                                                                           
  623.     .                                                                           
  624.                                                                                 
  625. where DLG-3, TIGER, DXF etc are different data formats.                         
  626.                                                                                 
  627.                                                                                 
  628. In all cases, data entry requires giving the name of your data file and         
  629.  
  630.                                                                       13
  631. supplying the name to be used for the internal file.                            
  632.                                                                                 
  633.                                                                                 
  634. Data files usually have names that finish with the extension DAT.               
  635. e.g. LONDON.DAT, A:SALES.DAT.                                                   
  636.                                                                                 
  637. The one time a full file name can be given within OzGIS is when reading a data  
  638. file, as it is sometimes inconvenient to rename files (but typing L for a list  
  639. of files will only list those with extension .DAT). For example you may have    
  640. TIGER files from the US Census bureau on CD-ROM. Then you could read the files  
  641. directly by giving the complete file name e.g. E:/18/003/TGR18003.F42           
  642.                                                                                 
  643. Often data files will need further processing before used for mapping e.g.      
  644. attribute data may need manipulating by arithmetic expressions or geographic    
  645. line segments may need thinning and forming into polygons.                      
  646.                                                                                 
  647. Future versions of the OzGIS system may have incompatible internal file formats 
  648. so always keep important data files.                                            
  649.                                                                                 
  650. The system comes with many of the system files already entered e.g. device      
  651. files. The data files are also provided.                                        
  652.  
  653.   3. 2 Example of data entry                             
  654.        ---------------------
  655.  
  656. You will often have a file of attribute data (such as population Census         
  657. data) and a file of digitised boundary data for mapping (e.g. TIGER):           
  658.                                                                                 
  659. We will look at data for Australia. There are two data files:                   
  660.                                                                                 
  661. OZ-G.DAT are the digitised boundary data, (Australian Statistical Divisions)    
  662. OZ-A.DAT are the attribute data                                                 
  663.                                                                                 
  664. Execute the OzGIS program for the demo directory.                               
  665.                                                                                 
  666. Choose IMPORT DATA FILES from the File pulldown menu.                           
  667.                                                                                 
  668. A menu will appear like:                                                        
  669.                                                                                 
  670. 1 TUTORIALS & SYSTEM INFORMATION                                                
  671. 2 IMPORT GEOGRAPHIC FILES                                                       
  672. 3 IMPORT ATTRIBUTE FILES                                                        
  673. 4 IMPORT A NAMES FILE                                                           
  674. 5 IMPORT A COMBINE FILE                                                         
  675. 6 IMPORT A DEVICE FILE                                                          
  676. 7 IMPORT A MARKER FILE                                                          
  677.                                                                                 
  678. You select the options by moving up and down with the arrows and pressing Enter 
  679. or by typing the number.                                                        
  680.                                                                                 
  681. The system trace is usually turned on so messages will appear on the screen     
  682. during processing.                                                              
  683.                                                                                 
  684.                                                                                 
  685.                                                                                 
  686. First enter the digitised boundary data:                                        
  687. ---------------------------------------                                         
  688.                                                                                 
  689.  
  690.                                                                       14
  691.                                                                                 
  692. Select the option to IMPORT GEOGRAPHIC FILES                                    
  693.                                                                                 
  694. The next menu appears:                                                          
  695.                                                                                 
  696. 1 IMPORT A STANDARD FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                      
  697. 2 IMPORT NEW FORMAT SAS GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                         
  698. 3 IMPORT OLD FORMAT SAS GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                         
  699. 4 IMPORT A DLG-3 OPTIONAL FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                
  700. 5 IMPORT A GINA FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                          
  701. 6 IMPORT A TIGER FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                         
  702. 7 IMPORT A DIME FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                          
  703. 8 IMPORT A DXF FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                           
  704. 9 IMPORT AUSLIG SEGMENTS FORMAT CENSUS BOUNDARY FILE                            
  705.                                                                                 
  706. This enables geographic data to be read in in a variety of "standard" formats.  
  707.                                                                                 
  708. The test data is in the OzGIS standard format so choose                         
  709. IMPORT A STANDARD FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                        
  710.                                                                                 
  711. A  data input window now appears for you to specify a file name. You type in    
  712. what you want and then type enter:                                              
  713.                                                                                 
  714. give the input data file as OZ-G                                                
  715. give the output geographic file as OZ                                           
  716.                                                                                 
  717. The data file will be processed, and a standard geographic file created.        
  718.                                                                                 
  719. The trace message at the bottom of the screen describes what is going on.       
  720.                                                                                 
  721.                                                                                 
  722.                                                                                 
  723. Now enter the attribute data:                                                   
  724. -----------------------------                                                   
  725.                                                                                 
  726. select the option to IMPORT ATTRIBUTE FILES                                     
  727.                                                                                 
  728. A new menu appears:                                                             
  729.                                                                                 
  730. 1 IMPORT A STANDARD FORMAT ATTRIBUTE FILE                                       
  731. 2 IMPORT A SPREADSHEET WK1 FORMAT FILE                                          
  732. 3 IMPORT A DATABASE (SIMPLE) FORMAT ATTRIBUTE FILE                              
  733. 4 IMPORT A LAMM FORMAT ATTRIBUTE FILE                                           
  734. 5 IMPORT USA CENSUS STF 1A FILES FOR TRACT/BNA                                  
  735. 6 IMPORT USA CENSUS STF 1A FILES FOR BLOCK GROUPS                               
  736. 7 IMPORT ATLAS DATA FILES                                                       
  737.                                                                                 
  738. The data are in standard form so:                                               
  739.                                                                                 
  740. Select IMPORT A STANDARD FORMAT ATTRIBUTE FILE                                  
  741.                                                                                 
  742. give the input data file as OZ-A                                                
  743. give the output attribute file as OZ                                            
  744.                                                                                 
  745. 3. The data files are now entered so -                                          
  746.                                                                                 
  747. If you use the Files Manager to look in the directory \ozdemo you will find     
  748. that there are two new files there:                                             
  749.  
  750.                                                                       15
  751.                                                                                 
  752.                                                                                 
  753. OZ.ATT is the attribute file and                                                
  754. OZ.GEO is the geographic file.                                                  
  755.                                                                                 
  756. You (almost) never give a full file name within OzGIS - the system appends      
  757. a file extension to the name according to the file type.                        
  758.                                                                                 
  759.  
  760.   3. 3 Demonstration Files                               
  761.        -------------------
  762.  
  763. The OzGIS system is supplied with a complete set of sample external             
  764. data files so that the user can become familiar with the system.  These         
  765. files can be inspected to clarify the file formats.                             
  766.                                                                                 
  767. The files are usually in the directory \OZDEMO and have names DEM*.*            
  768.  
  769.   3. 4 Example geographic and attribute data             
  770.        -------------------------------------
  771.  
  772. Generally there will be two data files for each map; a file that describes the  
  773. map boundaries and another for attribute data. The example files are:           
  774.                                                                                 
  775. 1. Far East Asia                                                                
  776.                                                                                 
  777. Attribute file - FEA-A                                                          
  778. Geographic file- FEA-G                                                          
  779.                                                                                 
  780.                                                                                 
  781. 2. Lowe electorate (Sydney)                                                     
  782.                                                                                 
  783. Attribute files- LOWE-A1 and LOWE-A2                                            
  784. Geographic files- LOWE-G (zones), LOWE-S1, LOWE-S2 (sites)                      
  785.                                                                                 
  786. These files are already entered (supplied with the system).                     
  787.                                                                                 
  788. 3. Australia                                                                    
  789.                                                                                 
  790. Attribute file - OZ-A                                                           
  791. Geographic file- OZ-G                                                           
  792.                                                                                 
  793. These files have already been input in the demonstration chapter.               
  794.                                                                                 
  795. 4. Washington DC Census Tract/BNA and TIGER lines                               
  796.                                                                                 
  797. These have been entered off CD-ROM files and preprocessed ready for display.    
  798.                                                                                 
  799. attribute file WASHTRACT                                                        
  800. Geographic zones file WASHTRACT                                                 
  801. Geographic lines file WASHROADS                                                 
  802. Geographic lines file WASHRAIL                                                  
  803.                                                                                 
  804. 5. Africa in Atlas format                                                       
  805.                                                                                 
  806. Geographic data files AFRICA.DAT                                                
  807.                                                                                 
  808. 6. Hawaii in DLG-3 optional format                                              
  809.  
  810.                                                                       16
  811.                                                                                 
  812. These came off a USGS CD-ROM                                                    
  813.                                                                                 
  814. HAWDLGWB.DAT Water boundaries (islands)                                         
  815. HAWDLGAB.DAT administration boundaries                                          
  816. HAWDLGST.DAT streams                                                            
  817. HAWDLGRD.DAT roads                                                              
  818.                                                                                 
  819. 7. DXF example files from VIC Roads. These have extensions *.DXF                
  820.                                                                                 
  821. 8. London Cholera                                                               
  822.                                                                                 
  823. Files are supplied for the classic mapping example where the mapping of the     
  824. houses where people died during the 1854 outbreak of Cholera onto a street map  
  825. of inner London, and then mapping the water supply, showed clustering about one 
  826. pump. The data files are in IDRISI format.                                      
  827. STREET.* London streets (lines)                                                 
  828. DEATH.*  Where fatalities occurred (points)                                     
  829. PUMP.*   Locations of water outlets                                             
  830.  
  831.   3. 5 Example device files                              
  832.        --------------------
  833.  
  834. The characteristics of devices and the appearance of maps are given by display  
  835. files. Data files are provided for all the device files supplied with the       
  836. system. There are two sets for 16 and 256 colour video boards, and also sets    
  837. for hatching and colour simulation on plotters etc.                             
  838.                                                                                 
  839. Files are already entered on the system and are described in a later chapter.   
  840.  
  841.   3. 6 Marker data files                                 
  842.        -----------------
  843.  
  844. These have already been entered, and are supplied with the system. They are     
  845. circle, diamond, hbar, nabla, plus, square, triangle, vbar. (You can of course  
  846. have your own markers).                                                         
  847.                                                                                 
  848.  
  849.   3. 7 Colour names data (no longer used)                
  850.        ----------------------------------
  851.  
  852. This option has been removed as DOS limits were being exceeded.                 
  853.                                                                                 
  854. A colour names file X11-BGR.DAT is supplied and is useful for colour definition.
  855.                                                                                 
  856.  
  857.                                                                       17
  858.                     4. BASIC CHOROPLETH MAPPING EXAMPLE                  
  859.                        ================================
  860.  
  861.                                                                                 
  862.                                                                                 
  863. This chapter gives an introduction to the map display options.                  
  864.                                                                                 
  865.                                                                                 
  866.                                                                                 
  867.                                                                                 
  868.  
  869.   4. 1 Simple Census-type Mapping                        
  870.        --------------------------
  871.  
  872. The Simple Census Mapping Icon can be clicked for simple choropleth mapping.    
  873.                                                                                 
  874. This provides two or three menus and about twenty menu options while the full   
  875. mapping menu tree has about a hundred menus and a thousand menu options.        
  876.                                                                                 
  877. This option is suitable for simple mapping of Census type data and is           
  878. recommended for use while learning to use the system.                           
  879.                                                                                 
  880. When you want to use more advanced mapping use the full OzGIS version.          
  881.                                                                                 
  882.  
  883.   4. 2 Example Choropleth Map                            
  884.        ----------------------
  885.  
  886. The most common application is the display of data such as Census data as       
  887. coloured polygons. Here the processes necessary to display such data are        
  888. described.                                                                      
  889.                                                                                 
  890. Census data enables you to display maps that show where people live who         
  891. are of different nationalities, ages, income groups etc. These maps are         
  892. used for applications such as retail marketing to find where potential          
  893. customers are located or for government planning to decide where to build       
  894. facilities like schools.                                                        
  895.                                                                                 
  896. You will probably have a file of attribute data (such as population Census      
  897. data) and a file of digitised boundary data for mapping (e.g. TIGER):           
  898.                                                                                 
  899. We will look at the data data for Australia. There are two data files:          
  900.                                                                                 
  901. OZ-G.DAT are the digitised boundary data, (Australian Statistical Divisions)    
  902. OZ-A.DAT are the attribute data                                                 
  903.                                                                                 
  904. An example of entering these data files was given in the last chapter.          
  905.                                                                                 
  906. Both the attribute file and geographic file are called OZ. Different types of   
  907. files can have the same name.                                                   
  908.                                                                                 
  909.                                                                                 
  910. Execute the Simple Census Mapping icon for the OzDemo directory.                
  911.                                                                                 
  912. Choose the option to "DISPLAY A NEW MAP" from the Mapping pulldown menu         
  913.                                                                                 
  914. give the attribute file name as OZ.                                             
  915.  
  916.                                                                       18
  917.                                                                                 
  918. When asked for the geographic file name input "L". A list of the available files
  919. will appear. Either double click on OZ.GEO or click QUIT and then give the file 
  920. name as OZ (not OZ.GEO!).                                                       
  921.                                                                                 
  922. The data are now processed, the map is displayed, and the next menu appears.    
  923.                                                                                 
  924. You now have a default map with legend and distribution diagram. The legend     
  925. has the numbers of zones in each class on the left and the class value ranges   
  926. to the right of the coloured boxes.                                             
  927.                                                                                 
  928. The new menu is:                                                                
  929.                                                                                 
  930. TUTORIALS & SYSTEM INFORMATION                                                  
  931. ADD TEXT TO MAP                                                                 
  932. DISPLAY THE NEXT SEQUENTIAL ATTRIBUTE                                           
  933. SELECT AN ATTRIBUTE FOR DISPLAY BY NUMBER                                       
  934. CHANGE THE NUMBER OF CLASSES                                                    
  935. CHANGE THE QUANTISATION METHOD                                                  
  936. DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE STATISTICS                                                    
  937. LIST ZONES SELECTED WITH BOX-CURSOR                                             
  938. SAVE DISPLAY FOR HARDCOPY MAP GENERATION WITH OzMap                             
  939. DISPLAY A NEW MAP                                                               
  940.                                                                                 
  941.                                                                                 
  942. Now investigate some of the options:                                            
  943.                                                                                 
  944. Choose the option to DISPLAY THE NEXT SEQUENTIAL ATTRIBUTE                      
  945.                                                                                 
  946.                                                                                 
  947. Select the option to SELECT AN ATTRIBUTE FOR DISPLAY BY NUMBER.                 
  948. Type 0 to get a list.                                                           
  949.                                                                                 
  950. A list of the attributes available will appear in a window.                     
  951.                                                                                 
  952. Click Quit to return to the question. Type in a number to select an attribute.  
  953.                                                                                 
  954. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  955.                                                                                 
  956.                                                                                 
  957. Now investigate the toolbar icons:                                              
  958.                                                                                 
  959. The top icon regenerates the map when required. The system usually              
  960. does not redraw the map automatically as it is a slow process.                  
  961.                                                                                 
  962. The othe icon causes a jump back to a first main menu. This enables             
  963. skipping back several levels. You will find that at main menus this is the only 
  964. way to exit.                                                                    
  965.                                                                                 
  966. Now investigate some of the File pulldown menu options:                         
  967.                                                                                 
  968. Select INTERROGATE FILES. Select GEOGRAPHIC FILES and use the file name OZ      
  969. (the one displayed).                                                            
  970.                                                                                 
  971. Other options enable the user interaction to be controlled; try turning on      
  972. partial trace (level 1) which causes a series of messages to appear at the      
  973. bottom of the screen telling you what the system is doing, but not as many as   
  974. level 2. The initial trace levels for all programs are set in the               
  975.  
  976.                                                                       19
  977. \ozgis\ozgis.ini file.                                                          
  978.                                                                                 
  979. "Quit" is used to exit from the program. Dont use it yet!                       
  980.                                                                                 
  981. Back at the Mapping menu, select CHANGE THE NUMBER OF CLASSES.                  
  982.                                                                                 
  983. change the number of classes to 10.                                             
  984.                                                                                 
  985. Select the option to CHANGE THE QUANTISATION METHOD.                            
  986.                                                                                 
  987. Another menu will appear.                                                       
  988.                                                                                 
  989. QUANTISATION TUTORIAL                                                           
  990. USE EQUAL VALUE INTERVALS                                                       
  991. USE QUANTILES                                                                   
  992. USE SELECTED CLASS INTERVALS                                                    
  993. USE SELECTED NUMBER OF ZONES PER CLASS                                          
  994. USE REFINED EQUAL VALUE INTERVALS                                               
  995. USE PSEUDO CONTINUOUS-COLOUR                                                    
  996. USE THE MEAN AND STD DEVIATION METHOD                                           
  997. USE THE NESTED MEANS METHOD                                                     
  998. USE THE NATURAL BREAKS METHOD                                                   
  999. USE SELECTED PERCENTILES                                                        
  1000. USE SELECTED CLASS RANGE PERCENTILES                                            
  1001. USE INTERACTIVE SELECTION OF CLASS INTERVAL,                                    
  1002. USE EQUIVALENCE CLASSES                                                         
  1003. USE CURRENT CLASS RANGES                                                        
  1004. USE CURRENT NO PER CLASS                                                        
  1005.                                                                                 
  1006. These options are very important as they enable the map to show the data in a   
  1007. way relevant to the purpose of the analysis.                                    
  1008.                                                                                 
  1009. For example, to select deciles:                                                 
  1010.                                                                                 
  1011. Choose USE QUANTILES and set the number of classes to 10. The legend            
  1012. will now describe the 10 colours in the map.                                    
  1013.                                                                                 
  1014.                                                                                 
  1015. Choose the option to DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE STATISTICS.                              
  1016.                                                                                 
  1017. Basic statistics will be displayed in a window for the displayed map.           
  1018.                                                                                 
  1019. Click "Quit" to remove the window.                                              
  1020.                                                                                 
  1021. Choose the option to LIST ZONES SELECTED WITH BOX-CURSOR.                       
  1022. This will enable the current values for the displayed zones to be listed.       
  1023.                                                                                 
  1024. A cursor will appear on the screen which indicates the bottom left position.    
  1025. Place it using either the arrows (type Enter to select the position) or the     
  1026. mouse (left button to select). A box cursor then appears to select the other    
  1027. corner. All zones are listed that have a minimum bounding rectangle (MBR)       
  1028. that intersects the selected window.                                            
  1029.                                                                                 
  1030.  
  1031.                                                                       20
  1032.  
  1033.   4. 3 Summary                                           
  1034.        -------
  1035.  
  1036. You now have seen simple examples of the processes to produce maps.             
  1037.                                                                                 
  1038. 1. you obtain your data as files in a standard format.                          
  1039.                                                                                 
  1040. 2. you usually set up a directory on the same disk as \OZGIS and put the data   
  1041. files there.                                                                    
  1042.                                                                                 
  1043. 3. Use IMPORT DATA FILES from the top menu to read in the data files.           
  1044.                                                                                 
  1045. 4. Use Simple Census-type Mapping or the Full OzGIS system (INTERACTIVE         
  1046. ANALYSIS menu item) to display.                                                 
  1047.                                                                                 
  1048. But ......... this is very simple                                               
  1049.                                                                                 
  1050. You may want to do some data preparation before mapping.                        
  1051.                                                                                 
  1052. You may have geographic data as line segments and need to form the polygons.    
  1053.                                                                                 
  1054. You may want to display other types of maps or diagrams.                        
  1055.                                                                                 
  1056. You may want to output prepared maps to a printer, plotter or file.             
  1057.                                                                                 
  1058. and so on.                                                                      
  1059.                                                                                 
  1060.  
  1061.                                                                       21
  1062.                     5. INTERACTIVE USER INTERFACE TO OzGIS               
  1063.                        ===================================
  1064.  
  1065.                                                                                 
  1066.                                                                                 
  1067. The user controls OzGIS by responding to menus, questions and                   
  1068. commands presented on the PC screen.                                            
  1069.                                                                                 
  1070. This chapter describes these forms of user communication.                       
  1071.                                                                                 
  1072.                                                                                 
  1073.                                                                                 
  1074.  
  1075.   5. 1 OzGIS Menus                                       
  1076.        -----------
  1077.  
  1078. You choose processing and display options from pulldown menus or from           
  1079. a pop-up menu that appears in the OzGIS window.                                 
  1080.                                                                                 
  1081. The menu changes depending on what you are doing.                               
  1082.                                                                                 
  1083.       Menus are presented in the format below.  The MENU HEADER                 
  1084. contains the previous menu item selected, or in the case of a main menu         
  1085. the system title.                                                               
  1086.                                                                                 
  1087.                [MENU HEADER]                                                    
  1088.                [Previous Menu                                                   
  1089.                [menu item 1]                                                    
  1090.                [menu item 2]                                                    
  1091.                          :                                                      
  1092.                          :                                                      
  1093.                          :                                                      
  1094.                [menu item n]                                                    
  1095.                                                                                 
  1096. For example, a menu could be:                                                   
  1097.                                                                                 
  1098. Previous Menu                                                                   
  1099. TUTORIALS & SYSTEM INFORMATION                                                  
  1100. IMPORT DATA FILES                                                               
  1101. PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY                                                        
  1102. INTERACTIVE DISPLAY AND ANALYSIS OF MAP DATA                                    
  1103. BUILD TOPOLOGY FROM LINE SEGMENTS                                               
  1104. INTERACTIVELY DEFINE TERRITORIES                                                
  1105. MAP PROJECTIONS                                                                 
  1106. SPATIAL OPERATIONS ON GEOGRAPHIC DATA                                           
  1107.                                                                                 
  1108. Menu items are selected either by click on an item or holding the left mouse    
  1109. button down and moving the cursor to the required selection.                    
  1110.                                                                                 
  1111. You will find that some there are lots of menus, and it is  difficult at first  
  1112. to know where you are in the menu "tree". To make it more  confusing the menus  
  1113. are dynamic e.g. adding something to a map can cause a new  menu item to appear 
  1114. that allows you to delete that item.                                            
  1115.                                                                                 
  1116. The general approach is: if the current menu does not have the option you want  
  1117. select from the pulldown menu. You will find that you cannot return to a        
  1118. previous menu at some "main" menus. This prevents loss of map data at various   
  1119.  
  1120.                                                                       22
  1121. stages; Click the second icon on the toolbar to return to the top menu.         
  1122.                                                                                 
  1123.                                                                                 
  1124. Main menus appear as pulldown menus.                                            
  1125.                                                                                 
  1126.                                                                                 
  1127.  
  1128.   5. 2 Question Dialog Boxes                             
  1129.        ---------------------
  1130.  
  1131.       Questions are asked by OzGIS when data are required for an                
  1132. operation.  The user must supply the data by entering appropriate responses     
  1133. in a dialog box.                                                                
  1134.                                                                                 
  1135.       The format of questions consists of the question, a possible range of     
  1136. values in brackets (if appropriate), a default value in parentheses (if         
  1137. appropriate) and terminated by a question mark.  The range of values and        
  1138. default values indicate the form of the expected answer.  An example is:        
  1139.                                                                                 
  1140.       -  request to replace an existing file:                                   
  1141.          DO YOU WANT TO REPLACE THE FILE [Y,N]?                                 
  1142.                                                                                 
  1143.                                                                                 
  1144.          The user must respond by clicking on YES or NO.                        
  1145.                                                                                 
  1146.       The following single character responses provide assistance when          
  1147. answering some questions:                                                       
  1148.                                                                                 
  1149.       "H":  presents a "help" or informative message about the required         
  1150.             response.                                                           
  1151.                                                                                 
  1152.       "E":  returns to the previous menu without further action.                
  1153.                                                                                 
  1154.                                                                                 
  1155.       Errors in responses are trapped and result in help messages being         
  1156. printed.  The user is asked the question again.                                 
  1157.  
  1158.   5. 3 Command Dialog Boxes                              
  1159.        --------------------
  1160.  
  1161.       Commands are issued by OzGIS when an operation has to be                  
  1162. performed by the user.  When the operation is completed, control returns to     
  1163. the appropriate menu.                                                           
  1164.                                                                                 
  1165.       The format for commands consists of a directive, a possible range of      
  1166. values in brackets (if appropriate), a default value in the input field (if     
  1167. appropriate), terminated by a colon.  Examples are:                             
  1168.                                                                                 
  1169.       -  to provide the number of classes:                                      
  1170.          TYPE NUMBER OF CLASSES [1-6] (4):                                      
  1171.                                                                                 
  1172.          The number of classes must be in the range 1 to 6, and if              
  1173.          the user simply presses the "Enter" key a default value of 4 will      
  1174.          be selected.                                                           
  1175.                                                                                 
  1176.       -  request for the name of a file:                                        
  1177.          FILENAME (TEST):                                                       
  1178.                                                                                 
  1179.  
  1180.                                                                       23
  1181.          The filename must be entered as a character string, or the             
  1182.          "Enter" key pressed to accept the default filename "TEST".             
  1183.                                                                                 
  1184.       The following single character responses provide assistance when          
  1185. responding to commands:                                                         
  1186.                                                                                 
  1187.       "L":  provides a list of data items that can be selected.                 
  1188.                                                                                 
  1189.             e.g. for FILENAME, a list of available files will be printed.       
  1190.             e.g. for ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION, the names of attributes on the file 
  1191.             will be listed.                                                     
  1192.                                                                                 
  1193.       "H":  presents a help or informative message about the desired            
  1194.             operation.                                                          
  1195.                                                                                 
  1196.                                                                                 
  1197.       "E":  returns to the previous menu without further action.                
  1198.                                                                                 
  1199. Errors in responses are trapped and cause a help message to be printed and      
  1200. the command to be repeated.                                                     
  1201.  
  1202.   5. 4 Graphic interaction                               
  1203.        -------------------
  1204.  
  1205.       Graphic interaction in OzGIS involves the use of the mouse to control     
  1206. the cursors on the monitor. Use the left mouse button to select.                
  1207.                                                                                 
  1208.       The user is directed to operate the mouse etc by the appearance of the    
  1209. cursor on the monitor and by an appropriate command on the screen.  The         
  1210. extent of the command depends on the current level of user communication        
  1211. (see "User Interface" option).                                                  
  1212.                                                                                 
  1213. There are several types of cursors:                                             
  1214.                                                                                 
  1215. . a pointer to select a position of object                                      
  1216. . a box to select a region. The bottom left corner is selected and then the     
  1217.    other.                                                                       
  1218. . a fixed size box to select text positions                                     
  1219. . a cursor for selecting a circle (centre first followed by circle)             
  1220.  
  1221.   5. 5  Print file                                       
  1222.        -----------
  1223.  
  1224. Every program generates printout on a file OZGIS.OUT.                           
  1225.                                                                                 
  1226. This includes:                                                                  
  1227.                                                                                 
  1228. Reports                                                                         
  1229. Error messages                                                                  
  1230. Debug output                                                                    
  1231.                                                                                 
  1232. Every time a map is interactively queried the list of map items retrieved is    
  1233. output to a file QUERY.OUT                                                      
  1234.                                                                                 
  1235. The windows version also outputs error messages to a file WINDOWS.OUT           
  1236.  
  1237.                                                                       24
  1238.                     6. OzGIS FILES                                       
  1239.                        ===========
  1240.  
  1241.                                                                                 
  1242.                                                                                 
  1243. This Chapter describes the various files which are processed by                 
  1244. OzGIS.  Some of the files can be entered into OzGIS as data, and                
  1245. the external formats for these files are given later.  All of the               
  1246. files have internal formats, which are generated as part of the user            
  1247. interaction.                                                                    
  1248.                                                                                 
  1249.                                                                                 
  1250.                                                                                 
  1251.  
  1252.   6. 1 File Origins                                      
  1253.        ------------
  1254.  
  1255.                                                                                 
  1256. The following kinds of files must be entered into OzGIS:                        
  1257.                                                                                 
  1258.       -  data files                                                             
  1259.       -  marker files                                                           
  1260.       -  device files                                                           
  1261.       -  presentation files                                                     
  1262. Data files usually come from Census bureaux, map data suppliers or your         
  1263. corporate database.                                                             
  1264.                                                                                 
  1265. External data files must be entered into OzGIS explicitly.  This                
  1266. operation permits OzGIS to generate internal representations of the             
  1267. data for efficient processing and to check the data.                            
  1268.                                                                                 
  1269.                                                                                 
  1270. Certain files must be prepared explicitly within OzGIS under user               
  1271. direction.  These files are:                                                    
  1272.                                                                                 
  1273.       -  saved display files                                                    
  1274.       -  catchment files (OzCatch)                                              
  1275.       -  time lapse files  (no longer available)                                
  1276.       -  palette files (no longer available)                                    
  1277.       -  hardcopy files  (OzMAP)                                                
  1278.                                                                                 
  1279. Some files can be prepared externally or internally.  These are:                
  1280.                                                                                 
  1281.       -  geographic files                                                       
  1282.       -  name files                                                             
  1283.       -  combine files                                                          
  1284.       -  colour names file  (no longer available)                               
  1285.                                                                                 
  1286. Some files are usually prepared with a word-processor.  These are:              
  1287.                                                                                 
  1288.       -  presentation files                                                     
  1289.       -  parameter files                                                        
  1290.                                                                                 
  1291.  
  1292.                                                                       25
  1293.  
  1294.   6. 2 File types                                        
  1295.        ----------
  1296.  
  1297.                                                                                 
  1298. The file types will become obvious with use of the system.                      
  1299.                                                                                 
  1300. There are many different types of files used:                                   
  1301.                                                                                 
  1302. (a)  Geographic Map files describe geographic (map) data in terms of            
  1303.      graphic elements - zones, polygons, line networks, line segments and       
  1304.      points.  The data can be drawn in geographic regions, or overlayed on      
  1305.      displayed maps.                                                            
  1306.                                                                                 
  1307.      The files are generated by digitising base maps.  This is a                
  1308.      time-consuming soul-destroying task.  Fortunately digitised map data       
  1309.      are available for many commonly used maps e.g. states, postcodes,Census    
  1310.      districts.  Where special zones are required, they can often be            
  1311.      defined in terms of Census districts and the map boundaries obtained       
  1312.      by amalgamating the digitised Census boundary data (dropping internal      
  1313.      lines).  This has the additional advantage that Census data can also       
  1314.      be extracted for the amalgamated zones and used for comparisons with       
  1315.      the user's own attribute data.                                             
  1316.                                                                                 
  1317. (b)  Attribute files contain the values of attributes (variates,                
  1318.      statistics, variables) referenced to zone, line or site names.  Each       
  1319.      file may contain a number of attributes for a fixed set of names.          
  1320.                                                                                 
  1321.      Attribute files are processed to assign a class number to zones            
  1322.      (colour) or lines (line type) or sites (symbol sizes) in a displayed       
  1323.      map.                                                                       
  1324.                                                                                 
  1325.      Attribute data files are usually generated via a standard database or      
  1326.      modelling system or by a user's own programs.                              
  1327.                                                                                 
  1328. (c)  Names files contain a list of zones, lines or sites that defines a         
  1329.      geographic region of interest.  The files may be used to subset            
  1330.      geographic data.  It may also be used to restrict the set of               
  1331.      attributes to be quantised for a map, or alternatively the set of          
  1332.      zones lines or sites to be displayed on a map.                             
  1333.                                                                                 
  1334. (d)  Combine files - define new items in terms of zones.  A file may define     
  1335.      new zones in terms of amalgamated base map zones or the influence of       
  1336.      surrounding zones on a site.                                               
  1337.                                                                                 
  1338.      The file contains a list of names of the new zones or sites defined.       
  1339.      If just one new name is given it is a renaming, if more than one an        
  1340.      amalgamation.                                                              
  1341.                                                                                 
  1342.      For each new item there is a list of the base map zones it is defined      
  1343.      by and a list of weights.                                                  
  1344.      New zones are defined by complete base map zones so the weights have       
  1345.      value 1.0 e.g. Sales Territories. Site Catchments are used to retrieve     
  1346.      data from underlying map zones so the weights give the proportions of      
  1347.      the zones (range 0-1).                                                     
  1348.                                                                                 
  1349. (e)  Marker files - define simple shapes as single polygons for display as      
  1350.  
  1351.                                                                       26
  1352.      markers.                                                                   
  1353.                                                                                 
  1354.      The data are simply the (X,Y) points that are used to draw the             
  1355.      polygons.  The points are in the range -0.5 to +0.5 so the polygon can     
  1356.      be easily scaled and displayed centred at a location.                      
  1357.                                                                                 
  1358. (f)  Saved Display files contain the data to regenerate a complete display.     
  1359.      These files should be stored by the user upon completion of a display      
  1360.      for later recall.  Subsequent manipulation of the display is possible      
  1361.      after recall.                                                              
  1362.                                                                                 
  1363.      Saved display files are the common level of storage and retrieval of       
  1364.      maps.  A user may build up a set of commonly displayed maps with all       
  1365.      the desired features that can be displayed and modified rapidly.           
  1366.      Saved display files are also used for presentations.                       
  1367.                                                                                 
  1368. (g)  Presentation files contain references to a number of Saved Display         
  1369.      files.  The files are used to present a set of displays quickly,           
  1370.      usually for demonstration purposes.                                        
  1371.                                                                                 
  1372. (h)  Time Lapse files contain a set of attributes for display as a time         
  1373.      lapse sequence.  All attributes are quantized in the same way by           
  1374.      OzGIS and must exist on the same file. e.g. data that has been             
  1375.      collected regularly, say weekly, can be displayed as a 'movie' to see      
  1376.      if there are any time-based spatial features.                              
  1377.      The format of the files is internal to OzGIS.  These facilities            
  1378.      are only available for colour display systems with large numbers of        
  1379.      colours.                                                                   
  1380.      (no longer available as PC hardware is inadequate)                         
  1381.                                                                                 
  1382. (i)  Device files - define the graphic devices and their capabilities.          
  1383.      Each device is a GKS workstation.  Several files may exist for each        
  1384.      device giving different values for the graphic primitive attributes        
  1385.      (line type, text, colours, patterns etc.).  In particular, each file       
  1386.      contains sets of fill colours or patterns for single and bivariate         
  1387.      maps.                                                                      
  1388.                                                                                 
  1389.                                                                                 
  1390. (j)  Palette files contain a set of colours which can be selected for           
  1391.      display.  The set of colours is displayed as a palette during the          
  1392.      colour selection process.  Colour palette files can be modified and        
  1393.      generated by user interaction, but their format is internal to             
  1394.      OzGIS.                                                                     
  1395.      (no longer available)                                                      
  1396.                                                                                 
  1397. (k)  Colour Names files contain a set of colour names and associated blue,      
  1398.      green and red (B,G,R) values for the display system.  The files enable     
  1399.      users to specify colours by typing a name (e.g. LIGHT RED) on the          
  1400.      keyboard.  Colour names files can be entered as external data files or     
  1401.      can be prepared by entering names and indicating the corresponding         
  1402.      colours.                                                                   
  1403.      (no longer available)                                                      
  1404.                                                                                 
  1405. (l)  Hardcopy files - contain information to enable maps to be reproduced       
  1406.      off-line on other devices (with the vector program)                        
  1407.                                                                                 
  1408. (m)  Parameter files - contain data for special operations e.g. entry of        
  1409.      US Census STF1A files, address matching. These files often come from       
  1410.  
  1411.                                                                       27
  1412.      other systems.                                                             
  1413.                                                                                 
  1414. (n)  Text Attribute files contain lines of any text and are used to provide     
  1415.      additional information about map items e.g. a geographic file defining     
  1416.      the locations of shopping centres may have a text attribute file that      
  1417.      gives the names, addresses, total floor area and number of customers per   
  1418.      month.                                                                     
  1419.                                                                                 
  1420. (o)  Catchment files - contain definitions of sites, boundaries of              
  1421.      catchments around sites, and catchment weights.  Catchment files are       
  1422.      interactively generated with reference to a base map.                      
  1423.                                                                                 
  1424. (p)  Digitising files - contain data generated while digitising a map           
  1425.                                                                                 
  1426.  
  1427.   6. 3 File Names                                        
  1428.        ----------
  1429.  
  1430. OzGIS distinguishes the various types of files, so you can give the same name   
  1431. to files of different types e.g. you may have a geographic file called AFRICA   
  1432. and also a (probably related) attribute file called AFRICA and you may save the 
  1433. map using these files in a saved display file also called AFRICA.               
  1434.                                                                                 
  1435. The system differentiates between files by adding an extension to the given     
  1436. file name e.g. the AFRICA attribute file would actually be AFRICA.ATT           
  1437.                                                                                 
  1438. You generally dont have to worry too much about extensions, but they are:       
  1439.                                                                                 
  1440. .ATT  attribute files                                                           
  1441. .CMB  combine files                                                             
  1442. .DAT  data files                                                                
  1443. .DEV  device files                                                              
  1444. .GEO  geographic files                                                          
  1445. .HRD  hardcopy files                                                            
  1446. .MRK  marker files                                                              
  1447. .PRM  parameter files                                                           
  1448. .PRS  presentation files                                                        
  1449. .SAV  saved display files                                                       
  1450. .SCR  screen dump for saved display files                                       
  1451. .TMP  temporary scratch files                                                   
  1452. .DIG  digitiser files                                                           
  1453.                                                                                 
  1454. The system just adds the extension on the end of the file name you give, so you 
  1455. can put any path on the front e.g. an input attribute file could be given as    
  1456. D:\TEST\AFRICA which the system translates to D:\TEST\AFRICA.ATT                
  1457.                                                                                 
  1458. There is actually two exceptions - because data files are often obtained from   
  1459. elsewhere and you may want to input them directly off floppy disk or CD-ROM     
  1460. (where files cannot be renamed) you can give a full file name when entering     
  1461. external data files. Similarly, parameter files often come from other           
  1462. systems with naming conventions, so a full file name can be given.              
  1463. When you ask for a file listing the standard dialog box function includes the   
  1464. file extensions.                                                                
  1465.  
  1466.                                                                       28
  1467.  
  1468.   6. 4 Directories                                       
  1469.        -----------
  1470.  
  1471. There are two types of files, system and user.                                  
  1472.                                                                                 
  1473. System files are held in the \OZGIS directory and can be specified as input     
  1474. files by putting '*' on the front of the file name.                             
  1475.                                                                                 
  1476. For example, giving a device file as *C16SV3 is the same as giving it           
  1477. as \OZGIS\C16SV3                                                                
  1478.                                                                                 
  1479.                                                                                 
  1480. User files can be in any directory but it                                       
  1481.                                                                                 
  1482. MUST BE ON THE SAME DISK AS \OZGIS !!!                                          
  1483.                                                                                 
  1484. Hence the \OZDEMO directory is set up on the same drive as \OZGIS               
  1485.                                                                                 
  1486. The usual procedure when starting a mapping project is to set up a new          
  1487. directory, copy all data files to that directory and then use all the           
  1488. OzGIS programs in that directory.                                               
  1489. Setting the directory is done when you define the program to WINDOWS.           
  1490.                                                                                 
  1491.                                                                                 
  1492.  
  1493.                                                                       29
  1494.                     7. DEVICE FILES                                      
  1495.                        ============
  1496.  
  1497.                                                                                 
  1498.                                                                                 
  1499. Device files control the appearance of maps:                                    
  1500.                                                                                 
  1501.      . polygon colours and type of fill                                         
  1502.      . text colours, sizes and fonts                                            
  1503.      . line colours and styles                                                  
  1504.      . sequences of class colours or hatch patterns                             
  1505.      . menu and message colours                                                 
  1506.                                                                                 
  1507. Experience showed that it is better to have fixed sets of definitions rather    
  1508. than allow the user to specify the display parameters.                          
  1509.                                                                                 
  1510. Remember that the basic display definition (number of pixels, lines and colours)
  1511. was specified when configuring the system.                                      
  1512.                                                                                 
  1513. There are sets of device files available:                                       
  1514.                                                                                 
  1515.      . 16 or 256 colour sets                                                    
  1516.      . sets for standard maps and for bivariate maps                            
  1517.      . coloured polygon fill or hatching or colour simulation                   
  1518.                                                                                 
  1519. The supplied files have a naming system e.g.                                    
  1520.                                                                                 
  1521.       *C16SV5  is a 16 colour single variate device file                        
  1522.       *B256BV2 is a 256 colour bivariate device file                            
  1523.                                                                                 
  1524.                                                                                 
  1525.                                                                                 
  1526. The best way to understand device files is to look at the contents, for         
  1527. example:                                                                        
  1528.                                                                                 
  1529. Select INTERACTIVE DISPLAY AND ANALYSIS from the top menu.                      
  1530.                                                                                 
  1531. Select the option to CHANGE DEVICE FILE                                         
  1532.                                                                                 
  1533. Type "L" to get a list of the device files that are available.                  
  1534.                                                                                 
  1535. First look at a 16 colour device file                                           
  1536. --------------------------------------                                          
  1537.                                                                                 
  1538. Give the file as *WINSV                                                         
  1539.                                                                                 
  1540. Select the option to DISPLAY DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS                             
  1541.                                                                                 
  1542. You will now get a display that shows the text types (sizes and colours),       
  1543. lines (types and colours) and the various polygon fills as rectangles.          
  1544.                                                                                 
  1545. Of particular interest are the class colours. The bottom set is a sequence of   
  1546. 121 colours which is designed to give the appearance of increasing attribute    
  1547. values. In this device file for a 16 colour board the colours are in blocks,    
  1548. but for 256 colour boards all the colours will be different (and can be used    
  1549. for "continuous colour" maps). The set of colours above are a 7 x 7 set for     
  1550. bivariate maps. They actually map onto the same set as for single variate maps, 
  1551.  
  1552.                                                                       30
  1553. so if bivariate maps are to be produced different device files should be used.  
  1554.                                                                                 
  1555. Next a 16 colour bivariate file                                                 
  1556. -------------------------------                                                 
  1557.                                                                                 
  1558. Now choose a bivariate device file *WINBV and display that.                     
  1559.                                                                                 
  1560. The bivariate sequence will show a progression of colour in each dimension      
  1561. (with some missing).                                                            
  1562.                                                                                 
  1563. There is a set of files for 16 colour displays, for the DOS version of OzGIS    
  1564. but under WINDOWS where colours are simulated it makes more sense to use        
  1565. the set of 256 colour device files. The exceptions are the WINSV and WINBV      
  1566. files which use the hardware colours used by the WINDOWS system.                
  1567.                                                                                 
  1568. Next 256 colour files                                                           
  1569. ---------------------                                                           
  1570.                                                                                 
  1571. There is a set of files *C256SV1 to *C256SV9 and *C256BV1 to *C256BV3 for 256   
  1572. colour boards. Now display one of these. The colour sequence will now be the    
  1573. complete 121 colours. If you have a standard 16 colour VGA board the colours    
  1574. will be approximated (dithered) by the WINDOWS graphics software.               
  1575.                                                                                 
  1576. Super VGA boards can display the full colour set, but as it does not appear to  
  1577. be possible to replace the default set of colours in the hardware colour table, 
  1578. 16 colour device files can not display the given set of colours.                
  1579.                                                                                 
  1580. Next hardcopy device files                                                      
  1581. -------------------                                                             
  1582.                                                                                 
  1583. Other device files are also available, primarily for display on printers and    
  1584. plotters, but these can also be used on the display; try them!                  
  1585.                                                                                 
  1586. *HATCHSV1 is for display of hatched single variate maps and *HATCHBV1 for       
  1587. bivariate maps.                                                                 
  1588.                                                                                 
  1589. There is also a series of files CSIMSV1 ......, CSIMBV1... that were designed   
  1590. to simulate colours sequences on plotters.                                      
  1591.                                                                                 
  1592.                                                                                 
  1593. DEFAULT.DEV default device file                                                 
  1594. -------------------------------                                                 
  1595.                                                                                 
  1596. You should now display a few of the single variate device files (*C16sv? or     
  1597. *C256SV?) and decide on one that you will use as the default device file.       
  1598.                                                                                 
  1599. When you have decided on the default file type exit from OzGIS and:             
  1600.                                                                                 
  1601. cd \ozgis                                                                       
  1602. copy C256SV6.DEV DEFAULT.DEV  (using the file you have chosen)                  
  1603.                                                                                 
  1604. This will overwrite the device file that was supplied as the default with the   
  1605. system. Obviously you can select a different device file for display at         
  1606. any time, and you should do so for bivariate maps.                              
  1607.                                                                                 
  1608. Colour sequences                                                                
  1609. ----------------                                                                
  1610.                                                                                 
  1611.  
  1612.                                                                       31
  1613. The colour sequences are designed to provide a colour progression that can      
  1614. help interpret the pregression in values in the attribute data.                 
  1615.                                                                                 
  1616. The sequences were generated by sampling at equal intervals along curves        
  1617. through uniform colour space, and then transforming the values using a          
  1618. model for the colour response of colour / TV monitors.                          
  1619.  
  1620.                                                                       32
  1621.                     8. OzGIS MAP TYPES                                   
  1622.                        ===============
  1623.  
  1624.                                                                                 
  1625.                                                                                 
  1626. This chapter introduces  the various types of maps and diagrams that can be     
  1627. displayed by the OzGIS program.                                                 
  1628.                                                                                 
  1629.                                                                                 
  1630.                                                                                 
  1631.  
  1632.   8. 1 Map Types                                         
  1633.        ---------
  1634.  
  1635. Several types of maps and diagrams can be displayed with OzGIS.                 
  1636.                                                                                 
  1637. Select INTERACTIVE DISPLAY AND ANALYSIS from the top menu                       
  1638.                                                                                 
  1639. DISPLAY ZONES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE                                             
  1640. DISPLAY LINES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE                                             
  1641. DISPLAY SITES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE                                             
  1642. DISPLAY BIVARIATE ZONES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                                 
  1643. DISPLAY BIVARIATE LINES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                                 
  1644. DISPLAY BIVARIATE SITES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                                 
  1645. DISPLAY ZONES & LINES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                                   
  1646. DISPLAY ZONES AND SITES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                                 
  1647. DISPLAY GEOGRAPHIC FILES (NO ATTRIBUTES)                                        
  1648. DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE FILES (DIAGRAMS)                                              
  1649. DISPLAY A SAVED-DISPLAY FILE                                                    
  1650. DISPLAY A PRESENTATION FILE                                                     
  1651.                                                                                 
  1652.                                                                                 
  1653.  
  1654.   8. 2 Attribute maps                                    
  1655.        --------------
  1656.  
  1657.      There are one or two streams of attribute processing for the types of      
  1658. maps available for zone, line and site attribute data:                          
  1659.                                                                                 
  1660.      -  zones map                                                               
  1661.      -  lines map                                                               
  1662.      -  sites map                                                               
  1663.      -  two zone streams i.e. bivariate maps                                    
  1664.      -  two line streams                                                        
  1665.      -  two site streams                                                        
  1666.      -  zones and lines                                                         
  1667.      -  zones and sites                                                         
  1668.                                                                                 
  1669. The type of map is selected before display and cannot be changed except         
  1670. by returning to this main menu.                                                 
  1671.                                                                                 
  1672. Site data can be displayed in several ways:                                     
  1673.       . as sized symbols, where additional files of points can be display       
  1674.         in one of 4 symbols and colours                                         
  1675.       . as first symbol using class colours                                     
  1676.       . as contour map (WINDOWS)                                                
  1677.       . as contour map and class coloured symbols (WINDOWS)                     
  1678.  
  1679.                                                                       33
  1680.       . as first symbol using the 4 symbol colours                              
  1681.                                                                                 
  1682. Line data can be displayed in several ways:                                     
  1683.       . as line patterns, where additional files of line can be display         
  1684.         in one of 4 line types and colours                                      
  1685.       . using class colours                                                     
  1686.       . using the 4 line colours                                                
  1687.                                                                                 
  1688. Basic choropleth maps have already been demonstrated. These are selected        
  1689. within OzGIS by DISPLAY ZONES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE. You can display maps       
  1690. with sized symbols in a similar way via DISPLAY SITES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE, and
  1691. maps using different line types using DISPLAY LINES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE.      
  1692.                                                                                 
  1693. Here are some more examples... Remember you can type "L" to get a list of       
  1694. files when asked for a file name.                                               
  1695.  
  1696.   8. 2. 1 Bivariate zones map Example                       
  1697.           ---------------------------
  1698.  
  1699. Bivariate maps enable you to compare two variables. For example you may         
  1700. want to compare your sales figures with Census data for the type of people      
  1701. you think are your customers.                                                   
  1702.                                                                                 
  1703. Select DISPLAY BIVARIATE ZONES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES from the main menu.      
  1704.                                                                                 
  1705. Use attribute files LOWE1 and LOWE2 and geographic file LOWE (both              
  1706. attribute files can be the same i.e. you only need one file).                   
  1707.                                                                                 
  1708. Remember that you have to select "Display Map" from the WINDOWS option menu     
  1709. before a map will appear.                                                       
  1710.                                                                                 
  1711.  Note the form of the legend; the primary attribute (first file, top            
  1712. description) is the vertical part of the legend.                                
  1713.                                                                                 
  1714. The main mapping menu will now appear on the toolbar:                           
  1715.                                                                                 
  1716. Attributes                                                                      
  1717. Class                                                                           
  1718. Features                                                                        
  1719. Overlays                                                                        
  1720. Regions                                                                         
  1721. Analyse                                                                         
  1722. Save                                                                            
  1723.                                                                                 
  1724. These are the major groups of options and will be descibed in later             
  1725. chapters.                                                                       
  1726.                                                                                 
  1727. Use "Prev Main Menu" to return to the top menu.                                 
  1728.  
  1729.   8. 2. 2 Zones & sites Example                             
  1730.           ---------------------
  1731.  
  1732. This type of map is for applications such as deciding where to put shopping     
  1733. centres, where different symbols can be used for e.g. existing centres,         
  1734. centres owned by different retail chains and proposed new centres.              
  1735.                                                                                 
  1736. This example shows that type of map and also how the geographic data displayed  
  1737. on a map can be extended and modified.                                          
  1738.  
  1739.                                                                       34
  1740.                                                                                 
  1741. Select DISPLAY ZONES AND SITES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES from the top menu.       
  1742.                                                                                 
  1743. Select DISPLAY SITES AS SIZED SINGLE COLOUR SYMBOLS                             
  1744.                                                                                 
  1745. Use the LOWE1 and LOWE2 attribute files again, and the LOWE zones geographic    
  1746. file.                                                                           
  1747.                                                                                 
  1748. Give the sites geographic file as LOWE-S1.                                      
  1749.                                                                                 
  1750. This displays a file with polygons coloured for one attribute and symbols       
  1751. sized for the other. Now we can add more sites.                                 
  1752.                                                                                 
  1753. Choose MAP REGIONS from the map menu, which shows a menu:                       
  1754.                                                                                 
  1755. CHANGE THE DISPLAYED ITEMS IN THE MAP                                           
  1756. CHANGE MAP REGION WINDOW (GEOGRAPHIC AREA)                                      
  1757. ZOOM MAP REGION WINDOW ABOUT X-HAIR POINT                                       
  1758. CHANGE MAP REGION VIEWPORT (SCREEN AREA)                                        
  1759. DEFINE NEW REGION FOR QUANTISED ZONES                                           
  1760. DEFINE NEW REGION FOR QUANTISED SITES                                           
  1761. DISPLAY MORE QUANTISED ZONES ON A REGION                                        
  1762. DISPLAY MORE QUANTISED SITES ON A REGION                                        
  1763.                                                                                 
  1764. and then DISPLAY MORE QUANTISED SITES ON A REGION. Give the next sites          
  1765. geographic file as LOWE-S2. Use symbol number 2 (number one is already used).   
  1766.                                                                                 
  1767. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  1768.                                                                                 
  1769. You will have a coloured zones map with different sized symbols according to    
  1770. the attribute values and different symbols for the two files.                   
  1771.                                                                                 
  1772. Click the second icon on the toolbar to return to the top menu.                 
  1773.  
  1774.   8. 2. 3 Geographic (GIS) maps Example                     
  1775.           -----------------------------
  1776.  
  1777. Maps can be displayed that show geographic data without attribute data i.e.     
  1778. polygons, lines, names at points and symbols at points.                         
  1779.                                                                                 
  1780. Hence you can display roads, town locations, soil polygons etc.                 
  1781.                                                                                 
  1782. Where the data are preclassified, feature codes can be used to subset the files 
  1783. for display.                                                                    
  1784.                                                                                 
  1785. For example, display some of the Hawaii DLG files. These files came from the    
  1786. USGS, and after some cleaning up, were entered as DLG-3 data and the polygons   
  1787. formed using BUILD TOPOLOGY FROM LINE SEGMENTS.                                 
  1788.                                                                                 
  1789. This example will display several of the files and show how feature codes       
  1790. can be used to subset the data displayed.                                       
  1791.                                                                                 
  1792. Select DISPLAY GEOGRAPHIC FILES (NO ATTRIBUTES) from the top menu.              
  1793.                                                                                 
  1794. The next menu allows you to define a map according to the main file of          
  1795. geographic data that you have. You can add other data to the map as overlays    
  1796. later:                                                                          
  1797.                                                                                 
  1798.  
  1799.                                                                       35
  1800. DISPLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  1801. DISPLAY MARKERS AT POINTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                
  1802. DISPLAY NAMES AT POINTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                  
  1803. DISPLAY POLYGONS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                         
  1804. DISPLAY LINE SEGMENTS FOR FEATURE CODES                                         
  1805. DISPLAY MARKERS AT POINTS FOR FEATURE CODES                                     
  1806. DISPLAY NAMES AT POINTS FOR FEATURE CODES                                       
  1807. DISPLAY POLYGONS FOR FEATURE CODES                                              
  1808.                                                                                 
  1809.                                                                                 
  1810. Select DISPLAY POLYGONS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE and use file HAWDLGWB, which is  
  1811. the outlines of the islands. Use any polygon number, give some text for the     
  1812. legend (e.g. "Islands") and use the no boundaries default.                      
  1813.                                                                                 
  1814. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  1815.                                                                                 
  1816. The main menu now appears for this type of map:                                 
  1817.                                                                                 
  1818. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                      
  1819. OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  1820. OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                      
  1821. UNDERLAY POLYGONS FROM GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                          
  1822. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FOR FEATURE CODES                                         
  1823. OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES FOR FEATURE CODES                                     
  1824. OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES FOR FEATURE CODES                                       
  1825. UNDERLAY POLYGONS FOR FEATURE CODES                                             
  1826. DEFINE MAP REGIONS#                                                             
  1827. CHANGE LEGEND                                                                   
  1828. DISPLAY TEXT                                                                    
  1829. SAVE DISPLAY AS A FILE                                                          
  1830.                                                                                 
  1831.                                                                                 
  1832. Select UNDERLAY POLYGONS FOR FEATURE CODES.                                     
  1833. Use file HAWDLGAB  which is administrative boundaries. The file has feature     
  1834. codes in the range 900103 to 900108. Give the range as 900103 to 900103 and use 
  1835. polygon number say 4.  Repeat for another feature code range and polygon        
  1836. number.                                                                         
  1837.                                                                                 
  1838. You will notice that a new menu item REMOVE POLYGONS UNDERLAY appears. A        
  1839. feature of the OzGIS system is that menus are dynamic and reflect the current   
  1840. status.                                                                         
  1841.                                                                                 
  1842. The administrative boundaries go outside the island coastlines so you may want  
  1843. to redraw the island outlines by overlaying line segments for file HAWDLGWB:    
  1844.                                                                                 
  1845. Select OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FOR FEATURE CODES.                                 
  1846. Use file HAWDLGRD which is roads.  The file has feature codes in the range      
  1847. 2905001 to 2905041.  Select a subset e.g. 2905000 to 2905020.                   
  1848. Give the legend text as "roads".                                                
  1849.                                                                                 
  1850. Select OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM GEOGRAPHIC FILE.                              
  1851. Use file HAWDLGST which is streams. Give the legend text as streams.            
  1852.                                                                                 
  1853. Select OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE. Give the file HAWDLGWB.  The 
  1854. polygon names will be displayed (the area numbers from the DLG file). Usually a 
  1855. points file would be used that has the actual names.                            
  1856.                                                                                 
  1857. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  1858.  
  1859.                                                                       36
  1860.                                                                                 
  1861. Select DISPLAY TEXT, type in a title e.g. "HAWAII", and position it at          
  1862. the top of the map.                                                             
  1863.                                                                                 
  1864. Note that if you regenerate the map the polygons are drawn first, and then line 
  1865. segments, symbols and finally names.  Within each type they are displayed in    
  1866. the order specified.  If a mistake is made overlays can be removed.             
  1867.                                                                                 
  1868. If polygons overlap, "polygon overlay" operations can be simulated by           
  1869. displaying using hatching. e.g. select the hatch device file *HATCHSV1 from     
  1870. the main menu and then display polygons from the two files HAWDLGWB (the        
  1871. islands) and HAWDLGAB (administrative boundaries).                              
  1872.                                                                                 
  1873. Use "Prev Main Menu" (twice) to return to the top level geographic map menu.    
  1874.                                                                                 
  1875. A similar set of options are available for overlaying data on other types of    
  1876. maps. For example you may want to overlay roads or town names on a Census       
  1877. data map.                                                                       
  1878.  
  1879.   8. 2. 4 Diagrams Example                                  
  1880.           ----------------
  1881.  
  1882. Distributions, sorted values and quantisation results can be displayed as full  
  1883. screen diagrams for one or two attribute files. Scatter diagrams can be         
  1884. displayed for two files.                                                        
  1885.                                                                                 
  1886. For example, to display two histograms for two attributes:                      
  1887.                                                                                 
  1888. Choose DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE FILES (DIAGRAMS) from the top menu.                    
  1889.                                                                                 
  1890. A menu appears that enables you to choose the type of diagram:                  
  1891.                                                                                 
  1892. DISPLAY VALUES HISTOGRAM FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE                                  
  1893. DISPLAY QUANTISATION HISTOGRAM FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE                            
  1894. DISPLAY DISTRIBUTION HISTOGRAM FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE                            
  1895. DISPLAY VALUES HISTOGRAM FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                                
  1896. DISPLAY QUANTISATION HISTOGRAM FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                          
  1897. DISPLAY DISTRIBUTION HISTOGRAM FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                          
  1898. DISPLAY SCATTER DIAGRAM FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                                 
  1899.                                                                                 
  1900.                                                                                 
  1901. Choose DISPLAY DISTRIBUTION HISTOGRAM FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                   
  1902.                                                                                 
  1903. Use LOWE1 and LOWE2 files.                                                      
  1904.                                                                                 
  1905. Next choose CHANGE DISPLAY FEATURES from the main menu.                         
  1906.                                                                                 
  1907. Now add some statistics lines:                                                  
  1908.                                                                                 
  1909. Choose ADD STATISTICS TO DIAGRAM. A new menu appears:                           
  1910.                                                                                 
  1911. DISPLAY MEAN & STD DEVIATION                                                    
  1912. DISPLAY MEDIAN                                                                  
  1913. DISPLAY REGRESSION POLYNOMIAL (for scatter diagrams)                            
  1914. REMOVE STATISTICS DISPLAY                                                       
  1915.                                                                                 
  1916. Try the DISPLAY MEAN & STD DEVIATION option (and others if you like).           
  1917.                                                                                 
  1918.  
  1919.                                                                       37
  1920. Now use the Esc key to return to the main diagram menu.                         
  1921.                                                                                 
  1922. You can change attributes and quantisation in the usual ways.                   
  1923. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  1924.                                                                                 
  1925. By now you will have realised that there are many options available down        
  1926. a multitude of menu paths. This can initially be confusing.                     
  1927.                                                                                 
  1928. Always remember that if the current menu does not show an option for what       
  1929. you want to do, simply keep going up a level until you find a menu option       
  1930. that seems to offer what you want.                                              
  1931.  
  1932.   8. 3 Presentations                                     
  1933.        -------------
  1934.  
  1935. This option enables a set of saved display files to be defined for              
  1936. demonstrations.                                                                 
  1937.                                                                                 
  1938. An Ascii file is set up that gives the names of the saved display files and     
  1939. menu lines that are associated with them.                                       
  1940.                                                                                 
  1941. The format of these files is explained in a later chapter.                      
  1942.  
  1943.   8. 4 Saved-display files                               
  1944.        -------------------
  1945.  
  1946. When you have prepared a map and have it displayed you can use the              
  1947. SAVE DISPLAY FEATURES option in the map display menu to store all information   
  1948. about the map in a file. There are two forms. One saves just the map definition 
  1949. while the other saves a screen image as well.                                   
  1950.                                                                                 
  1951. Both forms enable a map to be restored for further mapping. This is the usual   
  1952. procedure if a map has taken a long time to design.                             
  1953.                                                                                 
  1954. Saved maps are also used for hard-copy generation.                              
  1955.  
  1956.   8. 5 Time Lapse Display (not available)                
  1957.        ----------------------------------
  1958.  
  1959.                                                                                 
  1960. This option was not ported from the PDP11 / DeANZA version.                     
  1961.                                                                                 
  1962. Special options are available for the display of time lapse files.  The         
  1963. following parameters can be altered:                                            
  1964.                                                                                 
  1965.       -  The time interval between successive attributes (given in units of     
  1966.          approximately seconds)                                                 
  1967.                                                                                 
  1968.       -  The time interval between the end and beginning attributes of a        
  1969.          sequence (given in units of seconds); i.e. the pause between a         
  1970.          repeated sequence.                                                     
  1971.                                                                                 
  1972.       -  The beginning and end attribute of the sequence being displayed.       
  1973.                                                                                 
  1974. The zone legend format is not updated during a time lapse sequence, and by      
  1975. default the class description of the legend is set to the "HIGH" and "LOW"      
  1976. format.  Histograms and scatter plots cannot be displayed during a time lapse   
  1977. presentation.                                                                   
  1978.  
  1979.                                                                       38
  1980.                     9. ATTRIBUTE SELECTION                               
  1981.                        ===================
  1982.  
  1983.                                                                                 
  1984.                                                                                 
  1985. Attribute data is held in attribute files. Each file can have many variables    
  1986. e.g. USA Census data STF1A files can have over 900 variables.                   
  1987.                                                                                 
  1988. This chapter explains the options used to select which attribute is to be       
  1989. displayed on a map.                                                             
  1990.                                                                                 
  1991.                                                                                 
  1992.                                                                                 
  1993.  
  1994.   9. 1 Introduction                                      
  1995.        ------------
  1996.  
  1997. Various attribute files can be nominated to generate a map display.             
  1998.                                                                                 
  1999. Attribute may be selected for quantisation and display from attribute           
  2000. files in various ways:                                                          
  2001.                                                                                 
  2002. To try these options, display a zones map using attribute file LOWE1 and        
  2003. geographic file LOWE as before and then select CHANGE ATTRIBUTES.               
  2004.                                                                                 
  2005. The menu gives the following options:                                           
  2006.                                                                                 
  2007. SELECT FROM A LIST                                                              
  2008. DISPLAY THE NEXT SEQUENTIAL ATTRIBUTE                                           
  2009. SELECT AN ATTRIBUTE FOR DISPLAY BY NUMBER                                       
  2010. SELECT AN ATTRIBUTE FOR DISPLAY BY DESCRIPTION                                  
  2011.                                                                                 
  2012.  
  2013.   9. 2 From a list                                       
  2014.        -----------
  2015.  
  2016. A list of available attributes is displayed and one is selected by double       
  2017. clicking with the mouse.                                                        
  2018.                                                                                 
  2019.  
  2020.   9. 3 Sequentially                                      
  2021.        ------------
  2022.  
  2023. This option will simply select the next attribute off the file.                 
  2024. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  2025.  
  2026.   9. 4 By number (position in file)                      
  2027.        ----------------------------
  2028.  
  2029. A particular attribute may be selected by the position within the file. Type    
  2030. zero to generate a list of the attributes on the current file.                  
  2031.  
  2032.   9. 5 By attribute description                          
  2033.        ------------------------
  2034.  
  2035. The attribute can also be selected by typing part of the description e.g.       
  2036. "FORC" to retrieve "ARMED FORCES". Typing L lists the attributes.               
  2037.  
  2038.                                                                       39
  2039.  
  2040.   9. 6 By arithmetic operation                           
  2041.        -----------------------
  2042.  
  2043. This option enables a new attribute to be generated for display                 
  2044.                                                                                 
  2045. e.g. the expression " #2 + #4 " forms a new attribute that is the sum of        
  2046. the second and fourth attributes on the input file.                             
  2047.                                                                                 
  2048. Attributes can also be prepared as a data preparation option and the options    
  2049. are fully described in the relevant chapter.                                    
  2050.  
  2051.   9. 7 Zone/Site/Line names                              
  2052.        --------------------
  2053.  
  2054. It is your responsibility to ensure that the names referenced by the            
  2055. attributes match the names of the displayed zones, lines or sites in the        
  2056. map.  Obviously colours can be assigned only to the zone with names common      
  2057. to the attribute and zone files etc.                                            
  2058.                                                                                 
  2059. Only some of the names have to agree; it is quite common to process attribute   
  2060. data for a larger area than is displayed.                                       
  2061.  
  2062.                                                                       40
  2063.                    10. QUANTISATION                                      
  2064.                        ============
  2065.  
  2066.                                                                                 
  2067.                                                                                 
  2068. Quantisation is the process of assigning map items to classes according to      
  2069. their attribute values.                                                         
  2070.                                                                                 
  2071. The quantisation process is the most important aid for the analyst in           
  2072. understanding the features of the attribute data.  The quantisation method      
  2073. and parameters should be chosen logically according to the purpose of           
  2074. analysing the data.                                                             
  2075.                                                                                 
  2076. The aim is to display the map that best shows the spatial features and          
  2077. distribution of the data.                                                       
  2078.                                                                                 
  2079.                                                                                 
  2080.                                                                                 
  2081.                                                                                 
  2082.                                                                                 
  2083.                                                                                 
  2084.  
  2085.  10. 1 Introduction                                      
  2086.        ------------
  2087.  
  2088. Attributes are usually presented to OzGIS as values which have to               
  2089. be quantized into a number of classes for display.                              
  2090.                                                                                 
  2091. A maximum of 10 classes can appear in single variate zone displays and          
  2092. 9 classes (a maximum of 3 per variate) in a bivariate display.  A maximum       
  2093. of 4 classes is available for lines and 4 classes for sites.                    
  2094.                                                                                 
  2095. The best maps usually have a small number of classes; manipulate the            
  2096. map to show the data according to requirements. This contrasts with the         
  2097. production of atlases, where large numbers of colours are used as the purpose   
  2098. to which the map will be put is not known.                                      
  2099.                                                                                 
  2100. To try these options, display a zones map using attribute file LOWE1 and        
  2101. geographic file LOWE as before, and select DEFINE QUANTISATION.                 
  2102.                                                                                 
  2103. The quantisation menu has the following form:                                   
  2104.                                                                                 
  2105. CHANGE THE QUANTISATION METHOD                                                  
  2106. CHANGE THE NUMBER OF CLASSES                                                    
  2107. SELECT THE ZONES FOR QUANTISATION                                               
  2108. SELECT THE ATTRIBUTE VALUE RANGE FOR QUANTISATION                               
  2109.                                                                                 
  2110. You will find that this menu is dynamic as usual. You will find other           
  2111. entries such as SELECT THE LINES FOR QUANTISATION or                            
  2112. CHANGE THE NUMBER OF SITE CLASSES for different types of maps.                  
  2113.                                                                                 
  2114. Try changing the number of classes first and then work through                  
  2115. the various methods.                                                            
  2116.                                                                                 
  2117. There are other options to change the list of zones to which quantisation is    
  2118. applied and to change the range of values over which the method operates.       
  2119.  
  2120.                                                                       41
  2121.  
  2122.  10. 2 Quantisation Methods                              
  2123.        --------------------
  2124.  
  2125. Selecting the menu option CHANGE THE QUANTISATION METHOD will display a new     
  2126. menu of the form:                                                               
  2127.                                                                                 
  2128. USE EQUAL VALUE INTERVALS                                                       
  2129. USE QUANTILES                                                                   
  2130. USE SELECTED CLASS INTERVALS                                                    
  2131. USE SELECTED NUMBER OF ZONES PER CLASS                                          
  2132. USE REFINED EQUAL VALUE INTERVALS                                               
  2133. USE THE MEAN AND STD DEVIATION METHOD                                           
  2134. USE THE NESTED MEANS METHOD                                                     
  2135. USE THE NATURAL BREAKS METHOD                                                   
  2136. USE SELECTED PERCENTILES                                                        
  2137. USE SELECTED CLASS RANGE PERCENTILES                                            
  2138. USE INTERACTIVE SELECTION OF CLASS INTERVALS                                    
  2139. USE EQUIVALENCE CLASSES                                                         
  2140. USE CURRENT CLASS RANGES                                                        
  2141. USE CURRENT NO PER CLASS                                                        
  2142.                                                                                 
  2143. If you have a 256 colour display the following item also appears:               
  2144. USE PSEUDO CONTINUOUS-COLOUR                                                    
  2145.                                                                                 
  2146. You should try out these various methods e.g. with the attribute and            
  2147. geographic files OZ.                                                            
  2148.                                                                                 
  2149.                                                                                 
  2150.                                                                                 
  2151. The following methods for quantization are available for determining            
  2152. the class intervals:                                                            
  2153.                                                                                 
  2154.    (a)  Equivalence Classes:  numbers are assigned to the attribute values      
  2155.         (possibly with integer round-off).  The attribute values should lie     
  2156.         in the range of the maximum number of classes permitted but they        
  2157.         will be scaled for the selected number of classes.                      
  2158.                                                                                 
  2159.         This method enables the quantisation to be carried out on another       
  2160.         system and the resulting class numbers entered instead of attribute     
  2161.         values.  A common use is for mapping discrete data e.g. political       
  2162.         parties on election maps.                                               
  2163.                                                                                 
  2164.    (b)  Quantiles:  intervals are computed by assigning the same number of      
  2165.         zones to each class.                                                    
  2166.                                                                                 
  2167.         This method has often been used to generate choropleth maps, e.g.       
  2168.         deciles.  The effect of equal numbers of zones is maps that have        
  2169.         approximate equal areas of each class colour.  Such maps are            
  2170.         pretty.  Unfortunately quantiles tend to obscure the distribution       
  2171.         of the attribute data.  (Conversely its a great method if your          
  2172.         data is of doubtful value)                                              
  2173.                                                                                 
  2174.    (c)  Equal Value Intervals:  intervals are computed from equal               
  2175.         increments over the range of attribute values.                          
  2176.                                                                                 
  2177.         The default quantisation method selected when a map is first            
  2178.  
  2179.                                                                       42
  2180.         generated is equal value intervals.  The advantage of this method       
  2181.         is that the number of zones assigned to each class indicate the         
  2182.         distribution of the data.  It is recommended for general purpose        
  2183.         maps and for initial investigations of attribute data.                  
  2184.                                                                                 
  2185.    (d)  Refined Equal Value Intervals:  intervals are computed from equal       
  2186.         increments over the attribute value range, modified by a                
  2187.         "round-off" procedure (e.g. an increment of 10.12 would become          
  2188.         10.00).                                                                 
  2189.                                                                                 
  2190.         Maps for publications usually have 'nice' values in the legend.         
  2191.                                                                                 
  2192.    (e)  Continuous Colour:  121 intervals are computed from equal               
  2193.         increments over the range of attribute values.  Only 8 classes are      
  2194.         displayed in the legend, but the colours are assigned over the 121      
  2195.         quantized values to give a "continuous colour" appearance.              
  2196.         This option is only available with standard zone maps on 256            
  2197.         colour display systems.                                                 
  2198.                                                                                 
  2199.    (f)  Interactive Selection of Class Intervals:  intervals are selected       
  2200.         by the user by placing crosshairs on a displayed histogram.             
  2201.         (256 colours interactive mode only!)                                    
  2202.                                                                                 
  2203.    (g)  Mean and Standard Deviation:  intervals are determined by dividing      
  2204.         the range of attribute values at the mean value and at specified        
  2205.         offsets from the mean that are multiples of the standard deviation      
  2206.         of the data.  The number of classes must be even.                       
  2207.                                                                                 
  2208.         This method has particular application for attribute data from          
  2209.         random populations where the data are expected to have a normal         
  2210.         distribution and hence statistical theorems govern percentages of       
  2211.         population within the classes.                                          
  2212.                                                                                 
  2213.    (h)  Nested Means:  intervals are determined by iterative division of        
  2214.         the range of attribute values at the mean value of the subdivision.     
  2215.         The number of classes must be 2, 4 or 8.                                
  2216.                                                                                 
  2217.    (i)  Natural Breaks:  intervals are determined by iterative division at      
  2218.         the largest difference between attribute values.  The number of         
  2219.         attribute values between differences is user-specified.  Hence          
  2220.         class intervals occur at "jumps" in the data.                           
  2221.                                                                                 
  2222.    (j)  Specification of Class Intervals:  interval values (for a specified     
  2223.         number of classes) are typed in by the user.                            
  2224.                                                                                 
  2225.         Hence data within certain value ranges can be isolated.   Suitable      
  2226.         class intervals for hard-copy maps can be selected.                     
  2227.                                                                                 
  2228.    (k)  Specification of Numbers Per Class:  intervals are determined by        
  2229.         user-specification of the number of zones or sites in each class.       
  2230.         The numbers need only be given for some of the classes; the             
  2231.         remaining zones or sites will be distributed over the remaining         
  2232.         classes during each quantization.                                       
  2233.                                                                                 
  2234.         An analyst can isolate data at the extremes of the attribute            
  2235.         distribution by using this method.                                      
  2236.                                                                                 
  2237.    (l)  Class Number Percentiles:  intervals are determined from                
  2238.  
  2239.                                                                       43
  2240.         user-specified values giving the percentages of the number of zones     
  2241.         within each class.                                                      
  2242.                                                                                 
  2243.    (m)  Class Range Percentiles:  intervals are determined from                 
  2244.         user-specified values giving the percentage of the total range of       
  2245.         attribute values in each class.                                         
  2246.                                                                                 
  2247.    (n)  Current Class Intervals:  the intervals (and number of classes) are     
  2248.         used to quantize subsequent attributes.                                 
  2249.                                                                                 
  2250.         Hence a series of maps can be produced with the same legend which       
  2251.         enables attributes to be compared.                                      
  2252.                                                                                 
  2253.    (o)  Current Numbers:  the number of zones or sites per class (and           
  2254.         number of classes) are used to determine the intervals for              
  2255.         subsequent attributes.                                                  
  2256.  
  2257.  10. 3 Quantisation Ranges                               
  2258.        -------------------
  2259.  
  2260. The range of values over which the quantization is applied can be               
  2261. restricted in all methods.  The following options are available for             
  2262. limiting the range:                                                             
  2263.                                                                                 
  2264.       -  the extremes of all values (default)                                   
  2265.       -  user-specified limits (the user enters the low and high values)        
  2266.       -  refined values (i.e., automatically rounded to "nice" values)          
  2267.       -  limits fixed at current values for subsequent quantisations            
  2268.                                                                                 
  2269. Zones with values outside these limits are assigned the "excluded zone"         
  2270. value and colour, lines and sites are not displayed.                            
  2271.                                                                                 
  2272. The menu is of the form:                                                        
  2273.                                                                                 
  2274. QUANTISE FOR ATTRIBUTE VALUE RANGE                                              
  2275. TYPE IN ATTRIBUTE VALUE LIMITS FOR EVERY QUANTISATION                           
  2276. FIX LIMITS AT CURRENT VALUES                                                    
  2277. QUANTISE FOR AUTOMATICALLY SELECTED VALUE LIMITS                                
  2278.                                                                                 
  2279.                                                                                 
  2280. For example a standard legend for percentage data with value ranges             
  2281. 0,25,50,75 and 100 could be generated by choosing extremes to be 0 and 100      
  2282. and fixing them, and by using 4 equal value classes.                            
  2283.  
  2284.  10. 4 Quantisation Lists                                
  2285.        ------------------
  2286.  
  2287. Each of the attribute processing streams has an associated list                 
  2288. that holds the names of the items being quantised i.e. zones or lines or        
  2289. sites.  There is one list for a single stream, one zones list for bivariate     
  2290. maps, and for two streams there is a list of zones and a list of lines or       
  2291. sites.                                                                          
  2292.                                                                                 
  2293. Each list selects the items that are to be quantised from the                   
  2294. corresponding attribute file.  When a map is generated the lists are set to     
  2295. all the names if the attribute files (common names in the case of bivariate     
  2296. maps).                                                                          
  2297.                                                                                 
  2298.  
  2299.                                                                       44
  2300. Zone lists can be reset to:                                                     
  2301.                                                                                 
  2302.       -  all zones in current attribute file (single variate)                   
  2303.       -  all zones common to two attribute files (bivariate)                    
  2304.       -  the displayed zones                                                    
  2305.       -  zones in a names file                                                  
  2306.                                                                                 
  2307. The menu is of the form:                                                        
  2308.                                                                                 
  2309. QUANTISE FOR DISPLAYED SITES                                                    
  2310. QUANTISE FOR ALL SITES IN THE ATTRIBUTE FIL                                     
  2311. QUANTISE FOR SITES IN A NAME FILE                                               
  2312. EDIT SITES USED FOR QUANTISATION                                                
  2313.                                                                                 
  2314.                                                                                 
  2315. Zone lists can also be modified by adding or deleting zone names by             
  2316. typing in a name or selecting the zone with the cursor (256 colour mode)        
  2317.                                                                                 
  2318. Site lists and line lists can be modified by giving the names.                  
  2319.                                                                                 
  2320. Hence the quantisation can take place for a set of items that is                
  2321. independent of the displayed, zone lines and sites (although it is              
  2322. illogical for none to be the same).  It is common for the quantisation to       
  2323. be carried out over a larger geographic area than that being displayed.         
  2324. Sometimes zones are removed because the attribute data are doubtful e.g.        
  2325. Census districts with a low population.                                         
  2326.                                                                                 
  2327. Changing attribute files does not change the items whose values are             
  2328. quantized.                                                                      
  2329.  
  2330.                                                                       45
  2331.                    11. GEOGRAPHIC OVERLAYS                               
  2332.                        ===================
  2333.  
  2334.                                                                                 
  2335. This chapter describes how geographic data such as roads and town locations     
  2336. can be overlayed on top of displayed maps.                                      
  2337.                                                                                 
  2338.                                                                                 
  2339.                                                                                 
  2340.                                                                                 
  2341.  
  2342.  11. 1 Introduction                                      
  2343.        ------------
  2344.  
  2345. Geographic files can be displayed on zones, sites and lines maps to add extra   
  2346. information, usually for "navigation" purposes.                                 
  2347.                                                                                 
  2348. Overlays are selected by choosing DEFINE GEOGRAPHIC OVERLAYS off the main       
  2349. map display menu.                                                               
  2350.                                                                                 
  2351. A menu appears of the following form:                                           
  2352.                                                                                 
  2353. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  2354. OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  2355. OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                      
  2356. UNDERLAY POLYGONS FROM GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                          
  2357. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FOR FEATURE CODES                                         
  2358. OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES FOR FEATURE CODES                                     
  2359. OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES FOR FEATURE CODES                                       
  2360. UNDERLAY POLYGONS FOR FEATURE CODES                                             
  2361.                                                                                 
  2362. This menu is similar to the one used with geographic (no attributes) maps.      
  2363.                                                                                 
  2364. Polygons can be displayed underneath, such as postal districts under a sites    
  2365. map.                                                                            
  2366.                                                                                 
  2367. Lines are often displayed on top of a map e.g. roads, rivers.                   
  2368.                                                                                 
  2369. Points can be displayed as symbols e.g. locations of shopping centres.          
  2370.                                                                                 
  2371. Point labels can also be displayed e.g. names of towns.                         
  2372.                                                                                 
  2373. Overlays etc are displayed in the order polygon underlays, then the standard    
  2374. map according to attribute values, then line overlays, then point symbols, and  
  2375. finally names.                                                                  
  2376.                                                                                 
  2377. Within each type of overlay display takes place in the order the overlays are   
  2378. defined. In some cases order of definition is important as a later overlay can  
  2379. obscure an earlier one.                                                         
  2380.                                                                                 
  2381. The basic geographic files contain  polygons,lines, points and names. e.g. a    
  2382. file of one level of census boundaries (e.g. blocks) could be displayed as a    
  2383. lines overlay. Files built with BUILD TOPOLOGY also contain approximate         
  2384. centroids of zones with labels being the zone names.                            
  2385.  
  2386.                                                                       46
  2387.  
  2388.  11. 2 USA Census / TIGER Overlays Example               
  2389.        -----------------------------------
  2390.  
  2391. Some sample files are supplied with the system for Washington DC. These were    
  2392. supplied by the US Census Bureau, and would usually be obtained on CD-ROM.      
  2393.                                                                                 
  2394. The attribute file is WASHTRACT and was created by entering the first file off  
  2395. the STF1A CD-ROM (the original file was called STF1A0DC.DBF). This file         
  2396. contains about 40 of the 1990 Census variables extracted for tract/BNAs.        
  2397.                                                                                 
  2398. Three geographic files are supplied. These came from the CD-ROM files for       
  2399. Washington DC. The files for records type 1 (endpoints) and type 2 (shapes) were
  2400. processed. The files were simplified (thinned) to reduce the size.              
  2401.                                                                                 
  2402. WASHTRACT was created by extracting census boundaries for the tract/BNAs with   
  2403. the IMPORT DATA FILES option, thinning with the PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY option,
  2404. and finally using the BUILD TOPOLOGY option.                                    
  2405.                                                                                 
  2406. WASHRAIL is a lines file of railroads created by  extracting for feature codes  
  2407. 200 to 252 in the data entry process.                                           
  2408.                                                                                 
  2409. WASHROAD is a lines file of all roads created by extracting for feature codes   
  2410. 100 to 148 in the data entry process.                                           
  2411.                                                                                 
  2412.                                                                                 
  2413. These files can be used to demonstrate the use of overlays:                     
  2414.                                                                                 
  2415. First select DISPLAY ZONES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE to display a zones map using   
  2416. attribute file WASHTRACT and geographic file WASHTRACT. This gives a standard   
  2417. choropleth map for 1990 Census data for Washington at tract/BNA level.          
  2418.                                                                                 
  2419. Select DEFINE GEOGRAPHIC OVERLAYS from the map menu.                            
  2420.                                                                                 
  2421. A menu appears that offers options for several types of overlays:               
  2422.                                                                                 
  2423. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  2424. OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  2425. OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                      
  2426. UNDERLAY POLYGONS FROM GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                          
  2427. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FOR FEATURE CODES                                         
  2428. OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES FOR FEATURE CODES                                     
  2429. OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES FOR FEATURE CODES                                       
  2430. UNDERLAY POLYGONS FOR FEATURE CODES                                             
  2431.                                                                                 
  2432.                                                                                 
  2433. Now select OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE,                        
  2434. use the same geographic file,                                                   
  2435. select marker 1, give the legend text as TRACTS.                                
  2436.                                                                                 
  2437.                                                                                 
  2438. A series of markers will be displayed. The locations are the points within the  
  2439. standard zones/polygon file built with BUILD ZONES?POLYGONS so are the          
  2440. approximate centroids of the polygons.                                          
  2441.                                                                                 
  2442. Next select OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE, and use the same        
  2443. geographic file in a similar way to display the tract codes. The names here are 
  2444.  
  2445.                                                                       47
  2446. the zone names. You could of course use any file with different locations and   
  2447. names e.g. town names.                                                          
  2448.                                                                                 
  2449. Now add a line segments overlay. Select OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A            
  2450. GEOGRAPHIC FILE. Use the file WASHRAIL to display railroads.                    
  2451.                                                                                 
  2452. You could now do the same for the roads file. Try subsetting for feature codes  
  2453. as follows:                                                                     
  2454.                                                                                 
  2455. Select OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FOR FEATURE CODES. Use a different                 
  2456. line number each time and try a range 110 to 138 first to display primary,      
  2457. secondary and country roads. Then try a range 140 to 148 to display             
  2458. neighbourhood roads. TIGER file feature codes are defined in the appendix.      
  2459.                                                                                 
  2460. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map in the default order.      
  2461.  
  2462.                                                                       48
  2463.                    12.  DISPLAY CONTROL & MAP DESIGN                     
  2464.                        =============================
  2465.  
  2466.                                                                                 
  2467.                                                                                 
  2468. This chapter describes the options available for changing the general appearance
  2469. of a map.                                                                       
  2470.                                                                                 
  2471. These options enable map features that are not geographically referenced to be  
  2472. defined.                                                                        
  2473.                                                                                 
  2474.                                                                                 
  2475.                                                                                 
  2476.                                                                                 
  2477.                                                                                 
  2478.  
  2479.  12. 1 Introduction                                      
  2480.        ------------
  2481.  
  2482. A series of options are available to control the general appearance of maps.    
  2483.                                                                                 
  2484. These are chosen by selecting CHANGE DISPLAY FEATURES from the main map         
  2485. menu.                                                                           
  2486.                                                                                 
  2487. The menu is of the form:                                                        
  2488.                                                                                 
  2489. DISPLAY TEXT                                                                    
  2490. DEFINE ATTRIBUTE DIAGRAMS ON MAP                                                
  2491. ADD STATISTICS TO DIAGRAM                                                       
  2492. CHANGE ZONES LEGEND                                                             
  2493. CHANGE LINES LEGEND                                                             
  2494. CHANGE SITES LEGEND                                                             
  2495. CHANGE GEOGRAPHIC OVERLAYS (GIS) LEGEND                                         
  2496. DISPLAY SYMBOL LEGEND                                                           
  2497. DISPLAY REGION GRIDS                                                            
  2498.                                                                                 
  2499. The actual options that appear depends on the type of map. The options are      
  2500. described in the following sections:                                            
  2501.                                                                                 
  2502.  
  2503.  12. 2  Map Quantisation Legends                         
  2504.        -------------------------
  2505.  
  2506.                                                                                 
  2507. A legend is always displayed on the monitor when an attribute is                
  2508. quantised for map display.  Similar legends are displayed for zones, lines      
  2509. and sites.                                                                      
  2510.                                                                                 
  2511. The menu to change legends has the form:                                        
  2512.                                                                                 
  2513. REMOVE/INCLUDE CLASS RANGES                                                     
  2514. ANNOTATE CLASS BOXES WITH 'HIGH' AND 'LOW'                                      
  2515. TYPE IN CLASS ANNOTATION (2 LINES PER CLASS)                                    
  2516. CHANGE ANNOTATION FOR A CLASS                                                   
  2517. TYPE IN CLASS ANNOTATION HEADER                                                 
  2518. REMOVE/INCLUDE CLASS ANNOTATION HEADER                                          
  2519. REMOVE/INCLUDE NO. ZONES IN CLASSES                                             
  2520.  
  2521.                                                                       49
  2522. REMOVE/INCLUDE MISSING DATA BOX                                                 
  2523. REMOVE/INCLUDE EXCLUDED ZONES BOX                                               
  2524. REMOVE/INCLUDE UNITS DESCRIPTION                                                
  2525. TYPE IN ZONES LEGEND TITLE                                                      
  2526. REMOVE/INCLUDE ZONES LEGEND TITLE                                               
  2527. SPECIFY CLASS RANGE DISPLAY PRECISION                                           
  2528. SELECT ZONES LEGEND VIEWPORT WITH THE BOX-CURSORS                               
  2529.                                                                                 
  2530.                                                                                 
  2531. The elements of a legend are:                                                   
  2532.                                                                                 
  2533.       -  TITLE, a title for the legend (maximum of 3 lines and 16               
  2534.          characters per line).                                                  
  2535.                                                                                 
  2536.       -  UNITS, description of the units of a legend (maximum of 10             
  2537.          characters).                                                           
  2538.                                                                                 
  2539.       -  HEADER, a header for the class annotation (maximum of 8                
  2540.          characters).  The default is "RANGE".                                  
  2541.                                                                                 
  2542.                                                                                 
  2543.       -  CLASS ANNOTATION, either                                               
  2544.                                                                                 
  2545.             -  the class intervals as numbers aligned between boxes             
  2546.                (maximum of 8 characters), or                                    
  2547.                                                                                 
  2548.             -  class description aligned with the centre of boxes (maximum      
  2549.                of 2 lines, 8 characters per line), or                           
  2550.                                                                                 
  2551.             -  "HIGH" and "LOW" at the top and bottom of the boxes              
  2552.                respectively.                                                    
  2553.                                                                                 
  2554.       -  EXCLUDED ZONES, annotation for the "excluded zones" class              
  2555.                                                                                 
  2556.       -  MISSING DATA ZONES, annotation for the "missing data" class            
  2557.                                                                                 
  2558.       -  NUMBERS, the numbers of items in each class.                           
  2559.                                                                                 
  2560. Zone legends have fixed size boxes that give the colours used for the           
  2561. classes.                                                                        
  2562.                                                                                 
  2563. Site legends have variable sized symbols in a special colour that give          
  2564. the markers and their sizes used for the classes.                               
  2565.                                                                                 
  2566. Line legends replace the boxes by sample lines in a special colour              
  2567. that give the line types used for the classes.                                  
  2568.                                                                                 
  2569. All text in a legend is written with small fixed size characters.               
  2570.                                                                                 
  2571. Display of the legend elements can be controlled by the user.  The              
  2572. boxes corresponding to attribute classes are always displayed but the           
  2573. elements (including "excluded zones" and "missing data " boxes) can be          
  2574. removed.                                                                        
  2575.                                                                                 
  2576. Some of the legend text can be replaced by characters entered by the            
  2577. user on the keyboard, viz.,                                                     
  2578.                                                                                 
  2579.          -  title                                                               
  2580.  
  2581.                                                                       50
  2582.          -  units                                                               
  2583.          -  header                                                              
  2584. and      -  class description                                                   
  2585.                                                                                 
  2586. The default map layout sets the map image viewport as the left three            
  2587. quarters (approximately) of the monitor, and the legend viewpoints on the       
  2588. right side of the screen.  The zone legend is on the bottom, line or site       
  2589. legend above.                                                                   
  2590.                                                                                 
  2591. New legend viewpoints can be selected with the box cursor.  A single            
  2592. variate legend may need more than one column to fit.                            
  2593.                                                                                 
  2594.  
  2595.  12. 3 Overlays (GIS) legends                            
  2596.        ----------------------
  2597.  
  2598. When line overlays, markers, text at points or polygon underlays are displayed  
  2599. a legend appears that describes the overlays. The text must be specified by the 
  2600. user.                                                                           
  2601.  
  2602.  12. 4 Other Legends                                     
  2603.        -------------
  2604.  
  2605. When several line files are being displayed using different lines, or           
  2606. several site files are displayed using different markers, a legend can be       
  2607. added.                                                                          
  2608.                                                                                 
  2609.       The line and marker legends have similar format:                          
  2610.                                                                                 
  2611.       -  a header line of text                                                  
  2612.       -  legend entries                                                         
  2613.       -  marker or box in quantisation legend colour                            
  2614.       -  description                                                            
  2615.  
  2616.  12. 5 Text                                              
  2617.        ----
  2618.  
  2619. Lines of text can be typed in and displayed on the screen in one of             
  2620. the four available text types.  The text is positioned with the cursor.  Up     
  2621. to 20 lines of text can be displayed.                                           
  2622.                                                                                 
  2623. Lines of text can be deleted and moved around the screen.                       
  2624.                                                                                 
  2625. Text is usually added to a map to supply extra information e.g. the             
  2626. name of the geographic region and type of zones, organisation names,            
  2627. disclaimers.                                                                    
  2628.  
  2629.  12. 6 Attribute Diagrams                                
  2630.        ------------------
  2631.  
  2632. A menu is available to control diagrams added to an attribute map.              
  2633.                                                                                 
  2634. Select DEFINE ATTRIBUTE DIAGRAMS ON MAP.                                        
  2635.                                                                                 
  2636.                                                                                 
  2637. DISPLAY THE SCATTER DIAGRAM                                                     
  2638. DISPLAY THE ATTRIBUTE DISTRIBUTION                                              
  2639. DISPLAY THE QUANTISATION RESULTS                                                
  2640.  
  2641.                                                                       51
  2642. DISPLAY THE SORTED ATTRIBUTE VALUES                                             
  2643. REMOVE/DISPLAY AXES                                                             
  2644. REMOVE DIAGRAM                                                                  
  2645. CHANGE DISPLAY VIEWPORT                                                         
  2646.                                                                                 
  2647.                                                                                 
  2648.       (a)  Histograms can be displayed in the map area.  The                    
  2649.            histograms show one of the following:                                
  2650.                                                                                 
  2651.             -  the number of items (zones or sites) within equal intervals      
  2652.                of a single attribute                                            
  2653.             -  the number of items within class intervals of a single           
  2654.                attribute                                                        
  2655.             -  the attribute values corresponding to zones sorted in            
  2656.                ascending order of attribute value.                              
  2657.                                                                                 
  2658.                The bars of a histogram are coloured according to the class      
  2659.                colours in the legend.  For two variate displays, two            
  2660.                histograms can be displayed one underneath the other.  The       
  2661.                histograms provide an overview of the statistical                
  2662.                distribution of the attribute values.                            
  2663.                                                                                 
  2664.       (b)      Scatter plots can be displayed in the map area for               
  2665.                bivariate zone displays.  The plots show the distribution of     
  2666.                zones within the ranges of each attribute.  The elements of      
  2667.                the plot are coloured according to the class colours in the      
  2668.                legend.  The scatter plots provide an overview of the            
  2669.                statistical distribution of the attribute values.                
  2670.                                                                                 
  2671.       (c)   Statistics can be added to the diagrams:                            
  2672.                                                                                 
  2673.       -  mean and standard deviation lines                                      
  2674.       -  median                                                                 
  2675.                                                                                 
  2676.       A regression polynomial of order 1,2 or 3 can be added to a scatter       
  2677.       diagram.                                                                  
  2678.                                                                                 
  2679.       The diagram viewport is selected with the cursor.                         
  2680.                                                                                 
  2681. Addition of a distribution histogram or scatter diagram (bivariate)             
  2682. add considerably to the information content of a map. They are displayed by     
  2683. default.                                                                        
  2684.  
  2685.  12. 7 Displayed Colours (removed)                       
  2686.        ---------------------------
  2687.  
  2688.                                                                                 
  2689. Options to change colours are no longer available.                              
  2690.                                                                                 
  2691. They were removed when DOS limits were exceeded.                                
  2692.                                                                                 
  2693. All colours within a map display can be changed by the user when a              
  2694. 256 colour VGA display system is being used.  Individual colours can be         
  2695. selected in three ways:                                                         
  2696.                                                                                 
  2697.       (a)  by reference to a colour palette.  The colour is selected with       
  2698.            the crosshairs (256 colour mode).                                    
  2699.                                                                                 
  2700.  
  2701.                                                                       52
  2702.       (b)  by a blue, green and red (B,G,R) triple.  Values for each of the     
  2703.                                                                                 
  2704.            elements in the triple range from 0 to 1.0;  a red colour would      
  2705.            therefore be 0.0,0.0,1.0.                                            
  2706.                                                                                 
  2707.       (c)  by a name from a colour names file.  The name is a character         
  2708.            string typed on the keyboard.                                        
  2709.                                                                                 
  2710. Any of these ways can be selected by the user.                                  
  2711.                                                                                 
  2712. The set of colours is assigned to map classes and associated map                
  2713. elements by reference to the current device file.                               
  2714.                                                                                 
  2715. This enables colours for all of  the classes to be assigned quickly, although   
  2716. individual colours in the set can be modified subsequently.                     
  2717.                                                                                 
  2718. Displayed elements must be identified in order to change their                  
  2719. colour.                                                                         
  2720.                                                                                 
  2721. Certain elements are explictly referenced in the menus associated               
  2722. with colour change, and can be identified by selecting the appropriate menu     
  2723. option.  These elements are:                                                    
  2724.                                                                                 
  2725.      -  text                                                                    
  2726.      -  markers                                                                 
  2727.      -  lines                                                                   
  2728.      -  zone boundary                                                           
  2729.      -  map background                                                          
  2730.      -  excluded zones                                                          
  2731.      -  zones with missing data                                                 
  2732.      -  zone attribute classes                                                  
  2733.      -  background of attribute diagrams                                        
  2734.      -  site legend markers                                                     
  2735.      -  line legend                                                             
  2736.                                                                                 
  2737. Specific attribute classes, text, markers and lines are identified by           
  2738. number.                                                                         
  2739.  
  2740.                                                                       53
  2741.                    13. MAP REGIONS                                       
  2742.                        ===========
  2743.  
  2744.                                                                                 
  2745.                                                                                 
  2746. This chapter describes the options that enable the geographic layout of a       
  2747. map to be defined.                                                              
  2748.                                                                                 
  2749.                                                                                 
  2750.                                                                                 
  2751.  
  2752.  13. 1 Introduction                                      
  2753.        ------------
  2754.  
  2755. Map regions enable complex map layouts to be generated.  Maps often             
  2756. have only one region, typically zones from one geographic file displayed on     
  2757. the default viewpoint on the monitor.  Multiple regions, each with defined      
  2758. window and viewport provide many possibilities:                                 
  2759.                                                                                 
  2760. For example:                                                                    
  2761.                                                                                 
  2762.   . Display of different parts of a country (from different geographic          
  2763.     files) at the same time.                                                    
  2764.   . Display of a geographic area and a part extracted from it on the            
  2765.     same map.                                                                   
  2766.   . Display of overlays such as roads or retail sites on different parts of     
  2767.     a map.                                                                      
  2768.   . Changing the geographic areas that are currently displayed and moving       
  2769.     them on the screen.                                                         
  2770.   . Displaying adjacent geographic areas joined together.                       
  2771.                                                                                 
  2772. These options are for the geographically referenced features of a map. There    
  2773. is a different set of options for defining other features on a map such as      
  2774. text and legends that are simply positioned on the screen.                      
  2775.                                                                                 
  2776.                                                                                 
  2777. Definition of map regions is requested by selecting MAP REGIONS from            
  2778. the main map menu after a map has been displayed.                               
  2779.                                                                                 
  2780. A menu then appears of the following form:                                      
  2781.                                                                                 
  2782. CHANGE THE DISPLAYED ITEMS IN THE MAP                                           
  2783. CHANGE MAP REGION WINDOW (GEOGRAPHIC AREA)                                      
  2784. ZOOM MAP REGION WINDOW ABOUT X-HAIR POINT                                       
  2785. CHANGE MAP REGION VIEWPORT (SCREEN AREA)                                        
  2786. DEFINE NEW REGION FOR QUANTISED ZONES                                           
  2787. DISPLAY MORE QUANTISED ZONES ON A REGION                                        
  2788. DELETE QUANTISED ZONES FROM REGION                                              
  2789.                                                                                 
  2790. These few options enable comples layouts to be defined (sometimes with a lot    
  2791. of playing around). If a map is complex it is recommended that the map be       
  2792. saved often so you will not have to start from the beginning if a               
  2793. mistake is made.                                                                
  2794.  
  2795.                                                                       54
  2796.  
  2797.  13. 2 Regions                                           
  2798.        -------
  2799.  
  2800. A new map region is established when a geographic file is displayed.  The       
  2801. region is defined by the geographic window (or subset) and its displayed        
  2802. area (or viewport) on the monitor.                                              
  2803.                                                                                 
  2804. A standard map consists of one region. The window is the whole of the           
  2805. geographic file and the viewport is most of the screen.                         
  2806.                                                                                 
  2807. Other regions can be added to a map. A maximum of 10 map regions can be         
  2808. defined in a map. The option DEFINE NEW REGION FOR QUANTISED ZONES enables      
  2809. other geographic files to be added to the map, each on their own part           
  2810. of the screen, and to be coloured according to the attribute file values.       
  2811. For example, you may want to display a map of 5 counties, where you have 5      
  2812. geographic files (one for each county) and one attribute file that has          
  2813. the values you want to display. You start by displaying just one                
  2814. geographic file and then use this option to add and position the other          
  2815. four files. You will find that it takes some time to finalise the layout        
  2816. in this type of map.                                                            
  2817.                                                                                 
  2818. Regions are identified by number, being the order in which the regions are      
  2819. defined. A standard map has only region number one, and you do not have to      
  2820. specify the region number.                                                      
  2821. A geographic window is initially the total area of the geographic file          
  2822. (Files are subset as a data preparation process).  You can change the part      
  2823. of the geographic file that is displayed by selecting a new geographic          
  2824. extent via the options CHANGE MAP REGION WINDOW (GEOGRAPHIC AREA) or            
  2825. ZOOM MAP REGION WINDOW ABOUT X-HAIR POINT                                       
  2826.                                                                                 
  2827. A new viewport is selected by positioning the cursor on the monitor with        
  2828. the mouse or arrows (i.e. it is a rectangular part of the screen) via           
  2829. the option CHANGE MAP REGION VIEWPORT (SCREEN AREA)                             
  2830.                                                                                 
  2831. Polygon underlays, line, point and name overlays can be added to any map        
  2832. region. This process is the same as already described in the chapter on         
  2833. overlays except that the region number has to be given if there are more        
  2834. than one.                                                                       
  2835.                                                                                 
  2836. More than one geographic file can be displayed on a region according to the     
  2837. attribute data with DISPLAY MORE QUANTISED ZONES ON A REGION. For example       
  2838. you may want to display maps of two adjoining states. You start by displaying   
  2839. one of the geographic files for the attribute file in the standard way.         
  2840. You then add the second file to the same region (and adjust the viewport and    
  2841. window). The two states will neatly fit together (if the projection &           
  2842. coordinate system is the same).                                                 
  2843.                                                                                 
  2844. Geographic files are automatically windowed, scaled and clipped for             
  2845. display on map regions.                                                         
  2846.                                                                                 
  2847. When multiple files are displayed on a region, the precedure order is           
  2848. polygons, quantised zones, lines, sites, line overlays, markers and finally     
  2849. text at points.                                                                 
  2850.                                                                                 
  2851. Multiple regions can be defined anywhere on the map display area of             
  2852. the monitor.  However, if regions overlap the display procedure is              
  2853.  
  2854.                                                                       55
  2855. established by the order of definition.  Therefore the user should consider     
  2856. the order of display carefully in multiple region presentations.                
  2857.                                                                                 
  2858. Geographic files can be displayed  in any order, and regions can be defined     
  2859. and changed as desired.                                                         
  2860.                                                                                 
  2861. Many  of these operations destroy the data in the display system memory         
  2862. (the map display is corrupted) so:                                              
  2863. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  2864.                                                                                 
  2865.  
  2866.  13. 3 Map List                                          
  2867.        --------
  2868.  
  2869. A list of displayed items (zones, lines and sites) is maintained by             
  2870. the system.                                                                     
  2871.                                                                                 
  2872. The list can be changed by selecting CHANGE THE DISPLAYED ITEMS IN THE MAP,     
  2873. which displays a menu of the form:                                              
  2874.                                                                                 
  2875. USE THE ITEMS IN A NAMES FILE                                                   
  2876. USE ITEMS IN THE CURRENT ATTRIBUTE FILE                                         
  2877. USE DISPLAYED ITEMS FROM RANGE OF CLASSES                                       
  2878. USE THE ITEMS THAT ARE QUANTISED                                                
  2879. EDIT THE DISPLAYED MAP ITEMS                                                    
  2880.                                                                                 
  2881.                                                                                 
  2882. The list is sorted into alphabetical order, and the items are                   
  2883. displayed using pixels corresponding to the position in the table (256          
  2884. colour mode).  This enables items to be selected with the cursor and            
  2885. identified.                                                                     
  2886.                                                                                 
  2887. A list of flags corresponding to the map list is also held.  The                
  2888. flags enable some of the displayed items to be dropped interactively.           
  2889.                                                                                 
  2890. The flags are usually set to items in the attribute files:                      
  2891.                                                                                 
  2892. The options are:                                                                
  2893.                                                                                 
  2894.       -  names in attribute file (single variate)                               
  2895.       -  common to two attribute files (bivariate)                              
  2896.       -  names in two attribute files (zones and lines or sites)                
  2897.       -  names for ranges of classes                                            
  2898.       -  names in quantisation lists                                            
  2899.                                                                                 
  2900. Items can be added or deleted by selecting them with the cursor or              
  2901. typing the name.                                                                
  2902.                                                                                 
  2903.  
  2904.  13. 4 Quantised Zones                                   
  2905.        ---------------
  2906.  
  2907. Up to 10 sets of zones files can be displayed on defined regions.               
  2908. Adjacent files will automatically join.  GKS clips the polygons to the          
  2909. edges of the region viewports.  Where regions overlap, the zones of the         
  2910. last one to be displayed will overwrite the displayed data underneath.          
  2911.                                                                                 
  2912. Zones that are not in the map list are not displayed.                           
  2913.  
  2914.                                                                       56
  2915.                                                                                 
  2916. When the system operates in fast interactive mode the zones are                 
  2917. displayed once and the colours changed for the quantisation results.  In        
  2918. polygon fill mode the zones are displayed every time attribute data are         
  2919. quantised using fill (colour, pattern or hatch) for the appropriate             
  2920. classes.                                                                        
  2921.                                                                                 
  2922. Note that OzGIS expects overwriting to occur.  Hence display of                 
  2923. polygons on top of others is not successful using hatching on plotters,         
  2924. so OzGIS handles polygons in a special way for this case.                       
  2925.  
  2926.  13. 5 Quantised lines                                   
  2927.        ---------------
  2928.  
  2929. Up to 10 sets of lines can be displayed on regions.  GKS clips lines            
  2930. to region viewports.                                                            
  2931.                                                                                 
  2932. Lines that are not in the map list are not displayed.                           
  2933.                                                                                 
  2934. Each file is assigned to a different line, and is displayed in that             
  2935. line colour.  Four different lines are available.  The results of the           
  2936. quantisation are displayed by using different line types.                       
  2937.                                                                                 
  2938. The attribute data can be quantised into up to four classes, so four            
  2939. line types are used.  The line files are assigned to the four available         
  2940. lines according to overall classification when they are defined (e.g.           
  2941. roads, railway tracks and rivers).                                              
  2942.  
  2943.  13. 6 Quantised sites                                   
  2944.        ---------------
  2945.  
  2946. Up to 10 files can be displayed on regions.                                     
  2947.                                                                                 
  2948. Sites that are not in the map list or are outside the region window             
  2949. are not displayed.                                                              
  2950.                                                                                 
  2951. Each file is assigned to a different marker and is displayed in that            
  2952. marker's colour and background colour.  Four different markers are              
  2953. available.  The results of the quantisation are displayed as different          
  2954. sized markers.  When operating in fast interactive mode, the markers are        
  2955. displayed in bit planes so they can be rapidly cleared.                         
  2956.                                                                                 
  2957. The attribute data can be quantised into up to four classes so four             
  2958. different marker sizes are used.  The files are assigned to the four            
  2959. available markers according to overall classification (e.g. owners of banks     
  2960. at the sites).                                                                  
  2961.  
  2962.  13. 7 Line Overlays                                     
  2963.        -------------
  2964.  
  2965. The segments from up to 10 geographic files can be displayed as                 
  2966. overlays on map regions.  Each file is assigned to a region and one of four     
  2967. available lines and is displayed as a solid line in that line's colour.         
  2968. GKS clips the lines to the region's viewport.                                   
  2969.  
  2970.                                                                       57
  2971.  
  2972.  13. 8 Polygon underlays                                 
  2973.        -----------------
  2974.  
  2975. The polygons from up to 10 geographic files can be displayed as                 
  2976. underlays on map regions.  Each file is assigned to a region and one of eight   
  2977. available polygon colours.                                                      
  2978.  
  2979.  13. 9 Marker Overlays                                   
  2980.        ---------------
  2981.  
  2982. The points from up to 10 geographic files can be used to display                
  2983. markers at points in regions.  Each file is assigned to a region and to one     
  2984. of four available markers.  Markers are not displayed for points outside        
  2985. the region's window.                                                            
  2986.  
  2987.  13.10 Name Overlays                                     
  2988.        -------------
  2989.  
  2990. The  points from up to 10 geographic files can be used to display               
  2991. names at points in regions.  Each site file is assigned to a region and to      
  2992. one of four available types of text.  Names are not displayed for points        
  2993. outside the region's window.                                                    
  2994.  
  2995.  13.11 Map Modification                                  
  2996.        ----------------
  2997.  
  2998. The window and viewport of a map region can be modified by selecting            
  2999. a new one with the cursors.                                                     
  3000.                                                                                 
  3001. Files displayed for quantisation can be deleted from regions, unless            
  3002. the only one of that type.                                                      
  3003.  
  3004.                                                                       58
  3005.                    14.  MAP ANALYSIS                                     
  3006.                        =============
  3007.  
  3008.                                                                                 
  3009.                                                                                 
  3010. This chapter describes how you can find out more about the attribute data       
  3011. displayed on a map.                                                             
  3012.                                                                                 
  3013.                                                                                 
  3014.                                                                                 
  3015.                                                                                 
  3016.  
  3017.  14. 1 Introduction                                      
  3018.        ------------
  3019.  
  3020. Selecting ANALYSE MAP DATA from the main map menu enables further analysis      
  3021. of a displayed map (with attribute data).                                       
  3022.                                                                                 
  3023. The following menu appears:                                                     
  3024.                                                                                 
  3025. INTERROGATE MAP DATA                                                            
  3026. GENERATE MAP REPORT ON FILE OZGIS.OUT                                           
  3027. DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE STATISTICS                                                    
  3028.                                                                                 
  3029.  
  3030.  14. 2 Map Reports                                       
  3031.        -----------
  3032.  
  3033.                                                                                 
  3034. An option is available to write a full map report (giving details of            
  3035. the displayed items, their attribute values and class numbers) on the file      
  3036. OZGIS.OUT                                                                       
  3037.                                                                                 
  3038.  
  3039.  14. 3 Attribute Data Statistics                         
  3040.        -------------------------
  3041.  
  3042.                                                                                 
  3043. The statistics of displayed attributes can be computed and displayed            
  3044. under user control.                                                             
  3045.                                                                                 
  3046. The following statistics are computed for a simple attribute:                   
  3047.                                                                                 
  3048.       -  minimum value                                                          
  3049.       -  maximum value                                                          
  3050.       -  mean value                                                             
  3051.       -  median value                                                           
  3052.       -  standard deviation                                                     
  3053.       -  skewness                                                               
  3054.       -  kurtosis                                                               
  3055.                                                                                 
  3056. For pairs of attributes (bi-variate displays) the above statistics              
  3057. are computed for each attribute, as well as                                     
  3058.                                                                                 
  3059.       -  correlation coefficient                                                
  3060. and   -  regression polynomial coefficients (to order 3).                       
  3061.                                                                                 
  3062.  
  3063.                                                                       59
  3064.  
  3065.  14. 4 Map Interrogation                                 
  3066.        -----------------
  3067.  
  3068.                                                                                 
  3069. When a map has been displayed, it is possible to interrogate the map            
  3070. data interactively.                                                             
  3071.                                                                                 
  3072. The actual menu depends on the type of map, but is of the form:                 
  3073.                                                                                 
  3074. LIST DATA FOR A CLASS RANGE                                                     
  3075. LIST DATA FOR NAMES TYPED AT TERMINAL                                           
  3076. LIST DATA FOR ITEMS IN A NAMES FILE                                             
  3077. LIST DISPLAYED SITES                                                            
  3078. LIST QUANTISATION SITES                                                         
  3079. LIST SITES WITHIN WINDOW SELECTED WITH BOX-CURSOR                               
  3080. LIST SITES WITHIN DIGITISED POLYGON                                             
  3081. LIST SITES WITHIN CIRCLE, TYPED IN RADIUS                                       
  3082. LIST SITES WITHIN CIRCLE, CURSOR SELECTED RADIUS                                
  3083.                                                                                 
  3084.                                                                                 
  3085. The details generated by interrogation are the names of the zones,              
  3086. lines or sites, the values of the displayed attributes (one value for           
  3087. single variate displays, and two for bivariate) and their assigned class        
  3088. number.                                                                         
  3089.                                                                                 
  3090. The map can also be interrogated for the textual information held in text       
  3091. attribute files. This enables non-numeric information to be accessed in the     
  3092. same way as the values in standard attribute files.                             
  3093.                                                                                 
  3094. The options for interrogation are:                                              
  3095.                                                                                 
  3096.    (a)  class number range                                                      
  3097.                                                                                 
  3098.         -  items (zones, lines or sites) within a specified range of class      
  3099.            numbers.                                                             
  3100.                                                                                 
  3101.    (b)  single item identification                                              
  3102.                                                                                 
  3103.         -  zone line or site selected by entering its name at the keyboard.     
  3104.                                                                                 
  3105.    (c)  set identification                                                      
  3106.                                                                                 
  3107.         -  items selected by a names file, items in map, or items in            
  3108.            quantisation lists.                                                  
  3109.    (d)  Lists                                                                   
  3110.                                                                                 
  3111.         -  The names of all the displayed items are held in one list.           
  3112.            Each attribute stream has an associated list of items that are       
  3113.            being quantised.                                                     
  3114.                                                                                 
  3115.    (e)  Interactive selection                                                   
  3116.                                                                                 
  3117.         -  The "box cursor" can be used to describe a rectangular region to     
  3118.            select items.  The selection of zones and lines is either by         
  3119.            all minimum bounding rectangles (MBR) of the items that fall         
  3120.            completely within the cursor window or MBRs that intersect           
  3121.  
  3122.                                                                       60
  3123.            the window.  Sites (and zone centroids) are selected by points       
  3124.            that lie inside the window.                                          
  3125.                                                                                 
  3126.         -  Map items can also be selected within a circle and for a digitised   
  3127.            simple polygon.                                                      
  3128.                                                                                 
  3129.                                                                                 
  3130. The list of items selected interactively is also output to a file QUERY.OUT     
  3131. for use either as a names file or for export to other systems.                  
  3132.  
  3133.                                                                       61
  3134.                    15. DATA PREPARATION                                  
  3135.                        ================
  3136.  
  3137.                                                                                 
  3138.                                                                                 
  3139.                                                                                 
  3140. This chapter describes options to prepare data for display and analysis.        
  3141.                                                                                 
  3142.                                                                                 
  3143.                                                                                 
  3144.                                                                                 
  3145.  
  3146.  15. 1 Introduction                                      
  3147.        ------------
  3148.  
  3149. The raw data are input to the system using IMPORT DATA FILES. However, the      
  3150. data often need further processing. Also, some data needed within the system    
  3151. cannot be specified as data files and need to be prepared.                      
  3152.                                                                                 
  3153. These facilities are provided by the PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY option in the     
  3154. top menu.                                                                       
  3155.                                                                                 
  3156. The main menu is of the form:                                                   
  3157.                                                                                 
  3158. PROCESS ATTRIBUTE FILES                                                         
  3159. PROCESS GEOGRAPHIC FILES                                                        
  3160. PROCESS NAMES FILES                                                             
  3161. OUTPUT EXTERNAL DATA FILES                                                      
  3162.                                                                                 
  3163.  
  3164.  15. 2 Attribute Files                                   
  3165.        ---------------
  3166.  
  3167.                                                                                 
  3168. The PROCESS ATTRIBUTE FILES menu is:                                            
  3169.                                                                                 
  3170. FORM ATTRIBUTES WITH ARITHMETIC EXPRESSIONS                                     
  3171. AMALGAMATE ATTRIBUTE DATA FOR AN COMBINE FILE                                   
  3172.                                                                                 
  3173.                                                                                 
  3174. A new attribute file can be generated from an attribute file and a              
  3175. combine file by selecting AMALGAMATE ATTRIBUTE DATA FOR AN COMBINE FILE.        
  3176.                                                                                 
  3177. The combine file defines new zones (or site catchments)                         
  3178. in terms of the names referenced by the attribute file.                         
  3179.                                                                                 
  3180. For example, you may define sales territories in terms of postal districts      
  3181. and put the definition in a combine file (manually or via OzTerr). You would    
  3182. then amalgamate both the geographic file of postal district boundaries and      
  3183. any attribute files based on postal boundaries to produce files for             
  3184. mapping.                                                                        
  3185.                                                                                 
  3186.                                                                                 
  3187.                                                                                 
  3188. Attributes can also be derived from existing attributes by applying             
  3189. arithmetic operations to the attribute values via FORM ATTRIBUTES WITH ARITHMETI
  3190.                                                                                 
  3191.  
  3192.                                                                       62
  3193. A common application is preprocessing Census data before display to form        
  3194. the desired attributes.                                                         
  3195.                                                                                 
  3196. Attributes are identified by the character # followed by a number,              
  3197. indicating the sequential position of the attribute on the input file           
  3198. e.g. #10 represents the tenth attribute).  An example of an expression          
  3199. to form a composite attribute is:                                               
  3200.                                                                                 
  3201.                  (#1+#2)/2 > 0 < 1000                                           
  3202.                                                                                 
  3203. This creates a new attribute whose values are half the sum of the values        
  3204. from the first and second attributes on the input file.  Any valid              
  3205. arithmetic expression is acceptable.  The output values are limited to          
  3206. the given range.                                                                
  3207.                                                                                 
  3208. Functions available are:-                                                       
  3209.                                                                                 
  3210.       LOG10  :  common logarithm                                                
  3211.       SQRT   :  square root                                                     
  3212.       ABS    :  absolute value                                                  
  3213.       EXP    :  exponential                                                     
  3214.       SIN    :  sine                                                            
  3215.       COS    :  cosine                                                          
  3216.                                                                                 
  3217. Functions removed from the PC version are:                                      
  3218.                                                                                 
  3219.       LOG    :  natural logarithm                                               
  3220.       AINT   :  truncation                                                      
  3221.       TAN    :  tangent                                                         
  3222.       ATAN   :  arc tangent                                                     
  3223.       SINH   :  hyperbolic sine                                                 
  3224.       COSH   :  hyperbolic cosine                                               
  3225.                                                                                 
  3226. Pi is referred to as PI.                                                        
  3227.                                                                                 
  3228. Operators are:                                                                  
  3229.                                                                                 
  3230.    +  addition                                                                  
  3231.    -  subtraction                                                               
  3232.    *  multiplication                                                            
  3233.    /  division                                                                  
  3234.    >  greater than or equal to                                                  
  3235.    <  less than or equal to                                                     
  3236.                                                                                 
  3237. Expressions are evaluated left to right and have a limit of 70                  
  3238. characters.  Parentheses should be used to ensure there are no                  
  3239. ambiguities.                                                                    
  3240.                                                                                 
  3241. The user must give a 30 character attribute description and 10 character        
  3242. units description for each new attribute that is generated.                     
  3243.                                                                                 
  3244.  
  3245.  15. 3 Geographic Files                                  
  3246.        ----------------
  3247.  
  3248. The menu is of the following form:                                              
  3249.                                                                                 
  3250. SUBSET FOR ZONES LIST                                                           
  3251.  
  3252.                                                                       63
  3253. SUBSET FOR LINES LIST                                                           
  3254. SUBSET FOR SITES LIST#                                                          
  3255. AMALGAMATE ZONES FOR A COMBINE FILE                                             
  3256. JOIN LINE SEGMENTS FOR POLYGONS                                                 
  3257. SIMPLIFY (THIN) LINE SEGMENTS                                                   
  3258.                                                                                 
  3259. Often the geographic region covered by a geographic file will be much larger    
  3260. than is required. Geographic files can be subset (windowed) on the basis of     
  3261. a list of required display items (zones, sites, lines).                         
  3262.       - items in a names file                                                   
  3263.       - items in an attribute file                                              
  3264.       - items within a window selected with the cursor from a displayed file    
  3265.                                                                                 
  3266. Line segments can be simplified to reduce the number of points that             
  3267. have to be processed.  This is used to speed up display where the               
  3268. resolution of the digitised data are higher that that needed for display        
  3269. terminals.                                                                      
  3270.                                                                                 
  3271. Line segments that form polygons can be joined together into long segments.     
  3272. Where many short segments are used this process, in conjunction with            
  3273. simplification, can sustantially reduce the disk storage required and speed     
  3274. processing.                                                                     
  3275.                                                                                 
  3276. The zones in a geographic file can be amalgamated according to a combine        
  3277. file to generate a new geographic file.  The new file contains the new          
  3278. zones.  The same combine file can be used to generate attribute data for        
  3279. the same new zones. For example, you may amalgamate basic Census zones into     
  3280. zones at a higher level or into sales territories.                              
  3281.  
  3282.  15. 4  Names Files                                      
  3283.        ------------
  3284.  
  3285. Names files give lists of items (zones, sites,lines) that are to be processed.  
  3286. These lists can be generated from other types of files. These options are       
  3287. particularly useful when the names files are to be modified.                    
  3288.                                                                                 
  3289. The menu is of the form:                                                        
  3290.                                                                                 
  3291. SAVE ATTRIBUTE FILE NAMES AS A NAMES FILE                                       
  3292. SAVE GEOGRAPHIC FILE ZONES AS A NAMES FILE                                      
  3293. SAVE GEOGRAPHIC FILE LINES AS A NAMES FILE                                      
  3294. SAVE GEOGRAPHIC FILE SITES AS A NAMES FILE                                      
  3295. EDIT A NAMES FILE                                                               
  3296.                                                                                 
  3297. For example, you may output the names from a Census attribute file to a         
  3298. names file, edit it with a word processor and the use it to subset a            
  3299. census boundary (geographic) file to produce the desired map region.            
  3300.                                                                                 
  3301.  
  3302.  15. 5  Output to Data Files                             
  3303.        ---------------------
  3304.  
  3305. Options are provided to output internal files as data files so they can be      
  3306. modified with word-processors for further processing.                           
  3307.                                                                                 
  3308. The menu is of the following form:                                              
  3309.                                                                                 
  3310. GENERATE ATTRIBUTE TEMPLATE DATA FILE                                           
  3311.  
  3312.                                                                       64
  3313. OUTPUT NAMES DATA FILE                                                          
  3314. OUTPUT ATTRIBUTE FILE IN SIMPLE (SAS) FORMAT                                    
  3315. OUTPUT COMBINE DATA FILE                                                        
  3316.                                                                                 
  3317. Names files can be editted to change the lists of items used for processing.    
  3318.                                                                                 
  3319. Attribute files can be output in simple database format.                        
  3320.                                                                                 
  3321. Combine files can be modified as part of the definition of territories and      
  3322. sites.                                                                          
  3323.                                                                                 
  3324. Attribute templates can be generated for preparation of attribute data with     
  3325. a word-processor. This is also useful for displaying new boundary data when     
  3326. you have no attribute file. The file can be input as a database                 
  3327. format attribute file.                                                          
  3328.  
  3329.  15. 6 Palette Files (Removed from system)               
  3330.        -----------------------------------
  3331.  
  3332. Palette files have been removed from the system until display systems with more 
  3333. than 256 colours are available.                                                 
  3334.                                                                                 
  3335. Palettes are generated by selecting colours for the elements of a               
  3336. palette shown on the screen.  The colours can be selected in the                
  3337. following ways:                                                                 
  3338.                                                                                 
  3339.       -  by entering blue, green and red values.                                
  3340.                                                                                 
  3341.       -  by reference to another palette                                        
  3342.                                                                                 
  3343.       -  by reference to a colour names file                                    
  3344.                                                                                 
  3345.       -  by reference to a colour cross-section displayed in the map area       
  3346.          of the screen.                                                         
  3347.                                                                                 
  3348. After colour selection, the palette can be saved as a file.                     
  3349.                                                                                 
  3350.    An existing palette file can be modified to produce a new file, by           
  3351.    displaying it and adding or deleting elements.                               
  3352.  
  3353.  15. 7 Colour Names Files  (Removed from system)         
  3354.        -----------------------------------------
  3355.  
  3356.    Colour names files are generated by typing in a name and then selecting      
  3357.    the corresponding colour in the ways described above for selecting           
  3358.    colours for palettes.  An existing colour names file can be modified.        
  3359.  
  3360.                                                                       65
  3361.                    16. BUILDING ZONES FROM SEGMENTS                      
  3362.                        ============================
  3363.  
  3364.                                                                                 
  3365.                                                                                 
  3366.                                                                                 
  3367. Geographic data, such as Census boundaries, are often supplied as lines which   
  3368. have to be connected to form polygons or complex lines.                         
  3369.                                                                                 
  3370. This chapter describes the BUILD TOPOLOGY option which carries out the          
  3371. building process and outlines common preprocessing of this type of data.        
  3372.                                                                                 
  3373.                                                                                 
  3374.                                                                                 
  3375.  
  3376.  16. 1 Use                                               
  3377.        ---
  3378.  
  3379. Zone boundary data can be supplied either as the complete set of points for the 
  3380. outsides of each polygon or as the line segments that make up the boundaries.   
  3381. Most segments will be common to two polygons so only about half the number of   
  3382. points are required. The segment form also allows zones to amalgamated into     
  3383. larger zones (by dropping internal segments) and to be thinned (by dropping     
  3384. excess points).                                                                 
  3385.                                                                                 
  3386. The segments form of data is preferred to polygon formats.                      
  3387.                                                                                 
  3388. The build process takes line segments and joins the ends together to form       
  3389. polygons. The names of the zones on each side of the segments are used to       
  3390. derive the zone names.                                                          
  3391.                                                                                 
  3392. Complex polygons are handled. Zones can be made up of many polygons, both       
  3393. disjoint polygons and polygons within polygons. The display order of the        
  3394. polygons are calculated so e.g islands within lakes within zones all appear.    
  3395.                                                                                 
  3396. Line segments can also be built into complex lines to which attribute data can  
  3397. be assigned.                                                                    
  3398.                                                                                 
  3399. It is usual to line simplify (thin) the segments before building as many        
  3400. digitised boundary files (e.g. census) are at a much higher resolution than     
  3401. require for the display. Joining of line segments and further thinning may      
  3402. follow.                                                                         
  3403.                                                                                 
  3404. If the message"TOO MANY POINTS IN POLYGON" appears you will have to line        
  3405. simplify your data.                                                             
  3406.                                                                                 
  3407. The building process can use a lot of disk space, effectively the product       
  3408. of the max number of polygons in a zone and the number of zones. Options        
  3409. are provided to help control this.                                              
  3410.                                                                                 
  3411. When the line segments were generated from spatial operations, arithmetic       
  3412. roundoff can produce slightly different endpoints. A tolerance factor can       
  3413. be given to help join faulty points. The tolerance is usually zero.             
  3414.  
  3415.                                                                       66
  3416.  
  3417.  16. 2 Faulty Digitised Data                             
  3418.        ---------------------
  3419.  
  3420. The algorithm assumes that the segments have been produced on a proper          
  3421. digitising system and are correct e.g. it is assumed that end-points meet and   
  3422. the segments do not cross. Problems such as repeated segments, missing segments 
  3423. etc may cause problems. Ensure you use the program with trace turned on. If     
  3424. necessary turn on debug and look at the OZGIS.OUT file.                         
  3425.                                                                                 
  3426. Use the file interrogation option to find the statistics on the geographic file 
  3427. e.g. the number of zones.                                                       
  3428.                                                                                 
  3429.                                                                                 
  3430. The top menu option PREPARE DATA                                                
  3431. FOR DISPLAY can be used to generate a prototype attribute file (simple format)  
  3432. from the zones in the geographics file and hence get some test data that can be 
  3433. entered via IMPORT DATA FILES to form an attribute file. Displaying both files  
  3434. via SIMPLE CENSUS-TYPE MAPPING will allow the file to be checked.               
  3435.                                                                                 
  3436.  
  3437.  16. 3 Example                                           
  3438.        -------
  3439.  
  3440. The procedure can be demonstrated with any of the geographic data files:        
  3441.                                                                                 
  3442. First input the geographic data file and give it a temporary name:              
  3443.                                                                                 
  3444. Use IMPORT DATA FILES from the top menu                                         
  3445. Select IMPORT GEOGRAPHIC FILES and then IMPORT A STANDARD FORMAT                
  3446. GEOGRAPHIC FILE. Use the test data file LOWE-G and give the new file name as    
  3447. TEMP1.                                                                          
  3448.                                                                                 
  3449. Next line simplify the line segments to drop points:                            
  3450.                                                                                 
  3451. Use PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY from the top menu                                  
  3452. Select PROCESS GEOGRAPHIC FILES and then SIMPLIFY (THIN) LINE                   
  3453. SEGMENTS. The input file is the one just entered i.e. TEMP1 and output the new  
  3454. one as TEMP2. Simplify according to the size of the final map on the screen     
  3455. e.g. give a value of 100 to throw away a lot of the data points e.g. if you     
  3456. have a super VGA at 1024 X 768 you could use 750.                               
  3457.                                                                                 
  3458. Now build the polygons structure from the lines.                                
  3459. Select BUILD TOPOLOGY FROM LINE SEGMENTS from the top menu                      
  3460.                                                                                 
  3461. The menu is:                                                                    
  3462.                                                                                 
  3463. BUILD ZONES FROM LINE SEGMENTS INTO NEW GEOGRAPHIC FILE                         
  3464. BUILD ZONES FROM LINE SEGMENTS INTO NEW DATA FILE                               
  3465. BUILD LINES FROM LINE SEGMENTS INTO NEW GEOGRAPHIC FILE                         
  3466. BUILD LINES FROM LINE SEGMENTS INTO NEW DATA FILE                               
  3467.                                                                                 
  3468. The usual option is BUILD ZONES FROM LINE SEGMENTS INTO NEW GEOGRAPHIC FILE.    
  3469.                                                                                 
  3470. Give the input geographic file as the simplified file TEMP2 and output it as    
  3471. TEMP3.                                                                          
  3472.                                                                                 
  3473.  
  3474.                                                                       67
  3475. Use the defaults for other questions.                                           
  3476. Finally display the result (attribute file LOWE1 and geographic file TEMP3)     
  3477. by using the INTERACTIVE DISPLAY AND ANALYSIS top menu option.                  
  3478.  
  3479.                                                                       68
  3480.                    17. WK1 INTERFACE TO OTHER SOFTWARE                   
  3481.                        ===============================
  3482.  
  3483.  
  3484.  17. 1 Introduction                                      
  3485.        ------------
  3486.  
  3487. The OzGIS system was designed to provide advanced mapping capablilities that    
  3488. could be interfaced to other systems such as:                                   
  3489.                                                                                 
  3490.  - Database systems for manipulation and retrieval of attribute data            
  3491.  - Systems for generation of map boundary data                                  
  3492.  - Statistical analysis systems with graphic display and reporting facilities   
  3493.  - Mapping systems with analysis and hardcopy facilities.                       
  3494.                                                                                 
  3495. The main software systems that are of value are spreadsheets and database       
  3496. systems for handling attribute and other data. These software systems (e.g.     
  3497. Lotus, Excel, MS access, Paradox) are easy to use and are growing in            
  3498. sophistication.                                                                 
  3499.                                                                                 
  3500. The OzGIS system interfaces to these systems via the Lotus WK1 file format.     
  3501.                                                                                 
  3502. Data must be held in a tabular format where the first column is ALWAYS the      
  3503. primary key and is the same as the map identifiers (and usually alphanumeric)   
  3504.                                                                                 
  3505. Other columns depend on the type of data.                                       
  3506.                                                                                 
  3507. WK1 format data can be imported into OzGIS via menu options in the data entry   
  3508. process and exported via options in the data preparation module.                
  3509.  
  3510.  17. 2 Attribute data                                    
  3511.        --------------
  3512.  
  3513. Data from spreadsheets can be both imported and exported in WK1 format.         
  3514.                                                                                 
  3515. The spreadsheet must be set up in a fixed format:                               
  3516.                                                                                 
  3517. The data values are in a matrix with the values for the zones (or sites or      
  3518. lines) in columns and the different attributes across in the rows.              
  3519. Values can be missing and can be integer or floating point.                     
  3520.                                                                                 
  3521. The first column must contain labels which are the 10 character zone (site etc) 
  3522. names, beginning at row 3. These must be SORTED in ascending order.             
  3523.                                                                                 
  3524. The top row contains labels that are the (up to) 30 character attribute         
  3525. descriptions starting at column 2.                                              
  3526.                                                                                 
  3527. The second row is the 10 character attribute descriptions.                      
  3528. This is recommended but does not have to be present as some systems (e.g. MS    
  3529. ACCESS) do not support the concept.                                             
  3530.                                                                                 
  3531. e.g. the file DEMO123.dat can be read into the spreadsheet. It should look      
  3532. like:                                                                           
  3533.                                                                                 
  3534.                  POPULATION GROWTH   SALES                                      
  3535.                  NUMBER              $                                          
  3536. ABBOTSFORD                 7418      237                                        
  3537.  
  3538.                                                                       69
  3539. BURWOOD E                  9925      955                                        
  3540. CONCORD                    8984      202                                        
  3541. CROYDON N                  9369      298                                        
  3542. CROYDON W                   735                                                 
  3543. FIVE DOCK                  9903      716                                        
  3544. HABERFIELD                           727                                        
  3545. HOMEBUSH                   6631      704                                        
  3546. HUDSONPARK                 4668       71                                        
  3547. MORTLAKE                   1725      198                                        
  3548. STRATHFIELD                6285      663                                        
  3549. YARALLA                    9875      516                                        
  3550.                                                                                 
  3551. For example, with Microsoft Excel for Windows, the test file can be read by     
  3552. choosing the option "Open" from the "File" menu and giving the test file as     
  3553. \OZDEMO\DEMO123.WK1. A spreadsheet in the above format can be output by         
  3554. selecting the "Save As" option from the "Files" menu and using the WK1 format   
  3555. option.                                                                         
  3556.  
  3557.  17. 3 Names Files (lists of names)                      
  3558.        ----------------------------
  3559.  
  3560. The first column of the spreadsheet can be output as a WK1 file and then        
  3561. imported into OzGIS as a names file to control the processing.                  
  3562.                                                                                 
  3563. A names file can be exported as a single column WK1 file and hence used to      
  3564. initialise a spreadsheet.                                                       
  3565.                                                                                 
  3566. Names can also be output from a geographic file, where the list is one of the   
  3567. zone names, line names or site names.                                           
  3568.  
  3569.  17. 4 Points                                            
  3570.        ------
  3571.  
  3572. Site names and their (X,Y) locations can be exported as WK1 files.              
  3573.                                                                                 
  3574. Points output from a spreadsheet can be input as a points geographic file. The  
  3575. columns must have names called exactly "X" and "Y". You can also assign         
  3576. positive numeric feature codes by a column called exactly "Feature Code". If    
  3577. the column is used, a feature code must exist for every point (use zero if not  
  3578. required).                                                                      
  3579.  
  3580.  17. 5 Territories and Catchments                        
  3581.        --------------------------
  3582.  
  3583. A combine file containing the definitions of either territories or site         
  3584. catchments can be exported from OzGISas a WK1 file. The column names are        
  3585. "Territory" and "Weight" (the first column is the zone name).                   
  3586.  
  3587.  17. 6 Addresses                                         
  3588.        ---------
  3589.  
  3590. You can export a column called "Address" as a WK1 file from a spreadsheet and   
  3591. import it into OzGIS for reformatting as a data file that can be used for       
  3592. geocoding.                                                                      
  3593.  
  3594.                                                                       70
  3595.                    18. MAP PROJECTIONS                                   
  3596.                        ===============
  3597.  
  3598.                                                                                 
  3599.                                                                                 
  3600.                                                                                 
  3601.                                                                                 
  3602.                                                                                 
  3603.                                                                                 
  3604.  
  3605.  18. 1 Introduction                                      
  3606.        ------------
  3607.  
  3608. The projection options will process a geographic file to form a new             
  3609. geographic file converting either from (Longitude,Latitude) to a projection     
  3610. or in the reverse direction.                                                    
  3611.                                                                                 
  3612. Often projections will not be of concern, as map data will be used as supplied. 
  3613. However, if data comes from several sources in different projections, the files 
  3614. may have to be converted to a common coordinate system.                         
  3615.                                                                                 
  3616. You will have to have a basic knowledge of the projection you want to use       
  3617. e.g. that AMG is UTM with the Australian Spheroid and a false origin            
  3618. (500000,10000000).                                                              
  3619.                                                                                 
  3620. The options are based on public domain software from USGS.                      
  3621.                                                                                 
  3622. Projections processing is initiated by selecting MAP PROJECTIONS from the top   
  3623. menu                                                                            
  3624. The main menu is:                                                               
  3625.                                                                                 
  3626. CHOOSE FROM PROJECTION SET 1                                                    
  3627. CHOOSE FROM PROJECTION SET 2                                                    
  3628. CHOOSE FROM SPHEROID SET 1                                                      
  3629. CHOOSE FROM SPHEROID SET 2                                                      
  3630. DEFINE NON-STANDARD UNIT                                                        
  3631. WRITE PROJECTION DEFINITION INTO GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                
  3632. TRANSFORM LAT / LONG FILE TO PROJECTION                                         
  3633. TRANSFORM PROJECTION FILE TO LAT / LONG                                         
  3634. DISPLAY PROJECTION PARAMETERS FOR GEOGRAPHIC FILE                               
  3635.                                                                                 
  3636.  
  3637.  18. 2 Precision                                         
  3638.        ---------
  3639.  
  3640. Vertices are stored in single precision in OzGIS (there is not enough memory on 
  3641. the PC to do anything else). This means an accuracy of seven digits, so some    
  3642. values may not be accurate e.g. UTM may be a few metres out.                    
  3643.  
  3644.  18. 3 Latitude / longitude                              
  3645.        --------------------
  3646.  
  3647. Latitude / longitude data must be given with units degrees.                     
  3648.                                                                                 
  3649. Latitudes are negative in the Southern hemisphere.                              
  3650.                                                                                 
  3651. Usual value ranges are:                                                         
  3652.  
  3653.                                                                       71
  3654. Longitude -180 to +180                                                          
  3655. Latitude  -90  to +90                                                           
  3656.                                                                                 
  3657. Note that the X value in data files is the longitude.                           
  3658.                                                                                 
  3659. examples: (-100.0,50.0) i.e. longitude -100, latitude 50                        
  3660.           (145.0, -42.0) a point in Tasmania                                    
  3661.  
  3662.  18. 4 Projections                                       
  3663.        -----------
  3664.  
  3665. Several projections are supported:                                              
  3666.                                                                                 
  3667. Albers Conical Egual Area                                                       
  3668. Azimuthal equidistant                                                           
  3669. Equidistant Conic                                                               
  3670. Equirectangular                                                                 
  3671. Gnomic                                                                          
  3672. Lambert Conformal Conic                                                         
  3673. Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area                                                    
  3674. Mercator                                                                        
  3675. Miller Cylindrical                                                              
  3676. Orthographic                                                                    
  3677. Polyconic                                                                       
  3678. Stereographic                                                                   
  3679. Transverse Mercator                                                             
  3680. Sinusoidal                                                                      
  3681. State Plane (USA) (NOT SUPPORTED YET)                                           
  3682. Universal Transverse Mercator                                                   
  3683. Van der Grinten                                                                 
  3684.  
  3685.  18. 5 Ellipsoids                                        
  3686.        ----------
  3687.  
  3688. Several spheroids are available. The default is either Clarke 1866 or the       
  3689. 6370997 metre sphere where a radius is asked for.                               
  3690.                                                                                 
  3691. MERIT 1983                                                                      
  3692. GRS 1980(IUGG, 1980)                                                            
  3693. IAU 1976                                                                        
  3694. Airy 1830                                                                       
  3695. Australian Natl, S. Amer., IAU 64                                               
  3696. GRS 67(IUGG 1967)                                                               
  3697. Bessel 1841                                                                     
  3698. Clarke 1866                                                                     
  3699. Clarke 1880 mod.                                                                
  3700. Everest 1830                                                                    
  3701. Hough                                                                           
  3702. International 1909 (Hayford)                                                    
  3703. Krassovsky, 1942                                                                
  3704. Mercury 1960                                                                    
  3705. Modified Airy                                                                   
  3706. Modified Everest                                                                
  3707. Modified Merc 1968                                                              
  3708. New International 1967                                                          
  3709. Southeast Asia                                                                  
  3710. Walbeck                                                                         
  3711. WGS 66                                                                          
  3712.  
  3713.                                                                       72
  3714. WGS 72                                                                          
  3715. Sphere of 6370997 m                                                             
  3716.  
  3717.  18. 6 Use                                               
  3718.        ---
  3719.  
  3720. The parameters of the projection are stored in the geographic file. When the    
  3721. data are first entered the projection is usually set to 'undefined', unless it  
  3722. is known e.g. Census boundary data are usually set to geographic (lat/long      
  3723. units degrees) by the data entry process.                                       
  3724.                                                                                 
  3725. The first operation is often to define the projection of a new geographic file  
  3726. and store the parameters in the file header. Hence you have to                  
  3727. choose the projection, spheroid if non-standard, and then the option            
  3728. WRITE PROJECTION DEFINITION INTO GEOGRAPHIC FILE.                               
  3729.                                                                                 
  3730. Transformation is to and from lat/long. Hence conversion from one projection to 
  3731. another has to take place in two steps.                                         
  3732.                                                                                 
  3733.  
  3734.  18. 7 Example                                           
  3735.        -------
  3736.  
  3737. Suppose you have entered a file that you know is UTM for zone                   
  3738. number 20 and you want to convert it to Lambert Conformal.                      
  3739.                                                                                 
  3740. Select CHOOSE FROM PROJECTION SET 1 from the main menu, and then                
  3741. select U.T.M. and give the zone number.                                         
  3742.                                                                                 
  3743. Then select WRITE PROJECTION DEFINITION INTO GEOGRAPHIC FILE and give           
  3744. the name of your file.                                                          
  3745.                                                                                 
  3746. Your file will now be defined as UTM by having the file header updated.         
  3747.                                                                                 
  3748. Now choose TRANSFORM PROJECTION FILE TO LAT / LONG and give the file names      
  3749. to generate a temporary file in latitude / longitude from your original file.   
  3750.                                                                                 
  3751. Then use CHOOSE FROM PROJECTION SET 1 again and choose LAMBERT CONFORMAL CONIC. 
  3752.                                                                                 
  3753. Then using TRANSFORM LAT / LONG FILE TO PROJECTION will give you the            
  3754. desired file in Lambert Conformal from the lat/long file to a new file.         
  3755.                                                                                 
  3756.  
  3757.                                                                       73
  3758.                    19. HARDCOPY MAP PRODUCTION                           
  3759.                        =======================
  3760.  
  3761.                                                                                 
  3762.                                                                                 
  3763. This chapter describes the OzMap program which allows maps to be output to      
  3764. printers, plotters and files.                                                   
  3765.                                                                                 
  3766.                                                                                 
  3767.                                                                                 
  3768.                                                                                 
  3769.  
  3770.  19. 1 Overview                                          
  3771.        --------
  3772.  
  3773. Maps are designed with the interactive OzGIS program and saved as Saved display 
  3774. files. These files are then read into the OzMap program and output on the       
  3775. desired device or file. Attributes and quantisation can be changed in the usual 
  3776. way to produce a series of maps.                                                
  3777.                                                                                 
  3778. Maps can also be printed directly via the File menu.                            
  3779.                                                                                 
  3780. Hardcopy map production is limited by the capabilities of the SCIPLOT package.  
  3781.                                                                                 
  3782. SciPlot produces many graphic file types:                                       
  3783.                                                                                 
  3784. The Postscript file is an ASCII file that may be edited or sent directly to any 
  3785. Postscript printer.                                                             
  3786.                                                                                 
  3787. The Encapsulated Postscript file (EPS) and the Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM),
  3788. an ANSI standard format file, are files that should not be edited for they      
  3789. contain binary information.  EPS and CGM files can be imported directly into    
  3790. wordprocessors or other graphical products.                                     
  3791.                                                                                 
  3792. The HP pen plotter file (HPGL) is an ASCII file that can be edited or imported  
  3793. into wordprocessors or other graphical products.                                
  3794.                                                                                 
  3795. The WordPerfect file (WPG) is a binary file in WordPerfect's internal graphics  
  3796. format.  WPG files are directly importable into the WordPerfect wordprocessor.  
  3797.                                                                                 
  3798. The SciPlot Graphics file is a file in SciPlot's own internal format and is     
  3799. used solely as input to the VECTOR program.  This file is a binary file in very 
  3800. compact format.  It contains the stream of vectors which represent the figures, 
  3801. characters, etc. generated during the execution of the application program.     
  3802. VECTOR processes this graphic file and arranges raw vectors in a direction of   
  3803. paper motion order before display on dot matrix printers and laserjet printers. 
  3804.                                                                                 
  3805. For Apple LaserWriters, HP pen plotters, and other graphics devices that        
  3806. support a vector drawing commands directly, ordering is not required and VECTOR 
  3807. immediately displays the vectors.                                               
  3808.                                                                                 
  3809. VECTOR's function is to provide a utility to register SciPlot's output on       
  3810. plotting devices (dot matrix and laserjet printers) which cannot be supported   
  3811. directly without requiring significant system resources.  VECTOR also provides  
  3812. interactive preview of graphics files on the screen or bath processing at some  
  3813. other time.                                                                     
  3814.  
  3815.                                                                       74
  3816.  
  3817.  19. 2 Procedure                                         
  3818.        ---------
  3819.  
  3820. The main menu is:                                                               
  3821.                                                                                 
  3822. CHANGE ATTRIBUTES                                                               
  3823. DEFINE QUANTISATION (CLASSES)                                                   
  3824. DISPLAY DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS                                                  
  3825. CHANGE DEVICE FILE                                                              
  3826. SELECT ANOTHER SAVED DISPLAY FILE                                               
  3827. CHANGE DISPLAY DEVICE                                                           
  3828.                                                                                 
  3829. You must provide the saved-display file name for a map that was prepared        
  3830. using OzGIS.                                                                    
  3831.                                                                                 
  3832. USE "Display Map" to display the map on the current device. Initially this      
  3833. is the printer, but you can use CHANGE DISPLAY DEVICE to send it e.g. to        
  3834. a file. The available devices are selected from the menu:                       
  3835.                                                                                 
  3836. SCREEN                                                                          
  3837. PLOTTER METAFILE (for VECTOR program)                                           
  3838. PRINTER METAFILE (for VECTOR program)                                           
  3839. POSTSCRIPT ASCII FILE                                                           
  3840. ENCAPSULATED POSTSCRIPT FILE                                                    
  3841. HPGL FILE                                                                       
  3842. CGM METAFILE                                                                    
  3843. WORDPERFECT FILE                                                                
  3844. ONLINE APPLE LASER WRITE,                                                       
  3845. ONLINE PLOTTER                                                                  
  3846.                                                                                 
  3847. You can change attributes with CHANGE ATTRIBUTES option and can change the      
  3848. quantisation with DEFINE QUANTISATION (CLASSES). Thus you can work through      
  3849. a set of attributes in the usual way.                                           
  3850.                                                                                 
  3851. The option SELECT ANOTHER SAVED DISPLAY FILE enables other maps to be displayed.
  3852.  
  3853.  19. 3 Photographs                                       
  3854.        -----------
  3855.  
  3856. Colour slides can be successfully produced by photographing the screen.         
  3857.                                                                                 
  3858. The room has to be dark and any lights on the PC covered. Watch for reflections 
  3859. around the edge of the screen (blacken around the screen).                      
  3860.                                                                                 
  3861. You will have to experiment. Initially bracket exposures.                       
  3862.                                                                                 
  3863. Lenses with long focal lengths reduce the curvature of the screen.              
  3864.                                                                                 
  3865. An initial setting is:                                                          
  3866.                                                                                 
  3867. 250mm lens                                                                      
  3868. 200 ISO film                                                                    
  3869. f/8 at 1 second                                                                 
  3870.  
  3871.                                                                       75
  3872.  
  3873.  19. 4 OzMap Device files                                
  3874.        ------------------
  3875.  
  3876. Several device files are provided to control the appearence of maps on output   
  3877. devices. These device files can also be used with OzGIS (they will need minor   
  3878. modification for use with EGAs).                                                
  3879.                                                                                 
  3880. You have to use device files that use hatching for polygon fill. The            
  3881. configuration section explains the files available. Generally you need to use   
  3882. hatching device files that have the same resolution as that used in OzGIS or    
  3883. aspects and character sizes may not be suitable.                                
  3884.                                                                                 
  3885. HATCHSV1   - provides polygon display using hatching.                           
  3886. HATCHBV1   - hatching for bivariate maps.                                       
  3887. CSIMSV* and CSIMBV* - a series of device files that use the red, green and blue 
  3888. plotter pens (or screen colours) to simulate the colour sequences; look at then 
  3889. on the screen first to decide which ones to try.                                
  3890.                                                                                 
  3891. The hatching device files can of course be modified to define other hatching    
  3892. patterns.                                                                       
  3893.                                                                                 
  3894. The options DISPLAY DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS and CHANGE DEVICE FILE can be        
  3895. used to investigate the various device files.                                   
  3896.                                                                                 
  3897.  
  3898.  19. 5 VECTOR Program                                    
  3899.        --------------
  3900.  
  3901.                                                                                 
  3902. This program enables metafiles produced in the OzMap program to be output to a  
  3903. variety of devices and files with such options as rotation and scaling.         
  3904.                                                                                 
  3905. Its easier to use than read about!!                                             
  3906.                                                                                 
  3907.                                                                                 
  3908. VECTOR has two modes of operation, an interactive mode and a batch mode.        
  3909. The batch mode processes command strings from a disk file.  The user can        
  3910. include the command filename with the VECTOR command (eg. VECTOR                
  3911. command.fil).  Alternatively, the user can wait until VECTOR issues a           
  3912. prompt for the type of interaction desired.  The format of the command          
  3913. file and a description of the VECTOR.CFG file follows:                          
  3914.                                                                                 
  3915. VECTOR[d:][path][filename[.ext]] [/U]                                           
  3916.                                                                                 
  3917. [d:][path][filename[.ext]] [/U] - Process file which contains                   
  3918. filenames of graphics files to be processed in batch mode.  These               
  3919. files will be processed one at a time and plotted on the designated             
  3920. printer, plotter, or graphics crt device.  As a default, the                    
  3921. VECTOR.CFG file will be searched for a process filename.  When a                
  3922. filename is specified on the VECTOR command line, the process                   
  3923. filename given in VECTOR.CFG file is totally ignored and replaced by            
  3924. this new filename.                                                              
  3925.                                                                                 
  3926. /U - This update option is used to override all parameters specified            
  3927. in the VECTOR.CFG file. The option initiates an interactive dialog              
  3928. with the user to obtain a new set of parameters for VECTOR. The user            
  3929.  
  3930.                                                                       76
  3931. is given the opportunity at the end of the dialog to update the                 
  3932. current VECTOR.CFG file with these new parameters.                              
  3933.                                                                                 
  3934. VECTOR.CFG Configuration File.                                                  
  3935.                                                                                 
  3936. The VECTOR.CFG configuration file contains a list of commands that              
  3937. define VECTOR processing parameters. Each time VECTOR executes, it              
  3938. reads and interprets this file. If the VECTOR.CFG file cannot be                
  3939. located, VECTOR will interact with the user from the terminal to set            
  3940. up these parameters.                                                            
  3941.                                                                                 
  3942. Format of Configuration File Commands:                                          
  3943.                                                                                 
  3944. Cmd    Option        Description                                                
  3945.                                                                                 
  3946. FILE   =CONS         -Get graphics filenames from console.                      
  3947.        =[d:][path][filename[.ext]]- Use this file as a process file             
  3948. containing graphics filenames.                                                  
  3949.                                                                                 
  3950. DEVICE =DOT          -Dot Matrix Printer                                        
  3951.        =PEN          -HP Pen Plotter                                            
  3952.        =JET          -HP LaserJet Printer                                       
  3953.        =WRITER       -Apple LaserWriter Printer                                 
  3954.        =CGA          -CGA Color Screen                                          
  3955.        =EGA          -EGA Color Screen                                          
  3956.        =VGA          -VGA Color Screen                                          
  3957.        =HGA          -Hercules Monochrome Screen                                
  3958.                                                                                 
  3959. PORT   =COM1         -Printer/Plotter on Primary Serial Port                    
  3960.        =COM2         -Printer/Plotter on Secondary Serial Port                  
  3961.        =LPT1         -Printer/Plotter on Primary Parallel Port                  
  3962.        =LPT2         -Printer/Plotter on Secondary Parallel Port                
  3963.                                                                                 
  3964. ANGL   =XXX.XX       -Rotation Angle (degrees)                                  
  3965. XSCL   =XXX.XX       -X-Axis Scale Factor                                       
  3966. YSCL   =XXX.XX       -Y-Axis Scale Factor                                       
  3967. XOFS   =XXX.XX       -X-Axis Offset (inches)                                    
  3968. YOFS   =XXX.XX       -Y-Axis Offset (inches) <<<<<< e.g. 5.0 for printer        
  3969.                                                                                 
  3970. WAIT   =ON           -Wait between Plot Frames                                  
  3971.        =OFF          -Do not wait between Plot Frames                           
  3972.                                                                                 
  3973. [When serial port is used for printer/plotter device, following                 
  3974. commands are valid]:                                                            
  3975.                                                                                 
  3976. HAND   =SOFT         -Software Handshake (XON/XOFF)                             
  3977.        =HARD         -Hardware flow control on DSR line                         
  3978.                                                                                 
  3979. MODE   =195          -Serial Port Mode Set Code, specified in                   
  3980. decimal format. 195 = (9600 baud, no parity,                                    
  3981. 1 stop bit, 8 bit characters)                                                   
  3982.                                                                                 
  3983. - Mode Set Code Description -    [bits]                                         
  3984.                                                                                 
  3985. 7     6    5  4     3       2          1       0                                
  3986. --Baud Rate-- -Parity-   -Stop Bits-  -Char Length-                             
  3987. 000 -  110   00 - None 0  -    1      10  - 7 Bits                              
  3988. 001 -  300   01 - Odd  1  -    2      11  - 8 Bits                              
  3989.  
  3990.                                                                       77
  3991. 010 -  600   11 - Even                                                          
  3992. 011 - 1200                                                                      
  3993. 100 - 2400                                                                      
  3994. 101 - 4800                                                                      
  3995. 110 - 9600                                                                      
  3996. 111 -19200                                                                      
  3997.                                                                                 
  3998. [When dot matrix printer is used, following commands are valid]:                
  3999.                                                                                 
  4000. PINS   =9           -EPSON (MX-80,FX-80,FX-85,FX-850...)                        
  4001.        =24          -RPDON (LQ-800)                                             
  4002.                                                                                 
  4003. HRES   =HIGH        -High Horizontal Resolution                                 
  4004.        =LOW         -Low Horizontal                                             
  4005.                                                                                 
  4006. VRES   =HIGH         -High Vertical Resolution                                  
  4007.        =LOW          -Low Vertical Resolution                                   
  4008.                                                                                 
  4009. - Printer Resolution Table -                                                    
  4010.                                                                                 
  4011. Printer  Resolution   Vertical  Horizontal                                      
  4012. 9-Pin     LOW           72         120                                          
  4013. 9-Pin     HIGH          216         240*                                        
  4014. 24-Pin     LOW          180         180                                         
  4015. 24-Pin    HIGH          180         360                                         
  4016. * 240 dot per inch resolution is not available on MX-80.                        
  4017.                                                                                 
  4018. [When HP Pen plotter is used, following plotter initialization                  
  4019. command is valid]:                                                              
  4020.                                                                                 
  4021. INIT   =ON           -Send handshake init sequence before plotting              
  4022.        =OFF          -No handshake init sequence required                       
  4023.                                                                                 
  4024. When a process file is specified, VECTOR will process multiple graphics         
  4025. files in a batch mode. For the individual graphics file, VECTOR processes       
  4026. one plot frame at a time, for each file may contain more than one plot          
  4027. frame.  For dot matrix and HP LaserJet printers, VECTOR first sorts all         
  4028. the vector records in a minimum Y order for one plot frame.  This sorting       
  4029. is accomplished by creating an in-memory linked list directory of the           
  4030. disk records for the frame.  VECTOR accesses the graphics file randomly,        
  4031. bringing in only those records that contain vectors in the current              
  4032. process window. These print devices restrict the processing to a paper          
  4033. movement order. For HP Pen Plotters, Apple LaserWriters, and crt                
  4034. displays, VECTOR can process the vectors directly without any sorting for       
  4035. these devices support vector drawing commands.                                  
  4036.                                                                                 
  4037. An inherent difficulty in this sort of processing approach is the limit         
  4038. imposed by the processor's memory size. There is an upper bound on the          
  4039. size of the graphics plot that can be handled because the linked list           
  4040. directory as well as a limited set of the vectors must be memory                
  4041. resident.  The exact size limit is difficult to predict because it is a         
  4042. function of the number of records in the file, the density of vectors per       
  4043. processing window, and the amount of lengthy vectors that must be               
  4044. remembered over many processing windows.  The VECTOR.OBJ file on the            
  4045. distribution diskette supports 64KB of directory sort space.  If this is        
  4046. not enough, a VECTOR.LRG file is included which supports 256KB of               
  4047. directory sort space.  Please note that the use of the VECTOR.LRG object        
  4048. file will significantly increase the size of the VECTOR.EXE file.               
  4049.  
  4050.                                                                       78
  4051.                                                                                 
  4052. Features                                                                        
  4053.                                                                                 
  4054. The features incorporated in VECTOR are numerous.  Multiple plot frame          
  4055. processing is automatic.  A graphics vector file may be accessed from any       
  4056. disk.  Normal FORTRAN I/O is used to read the 128 byte binary records by        
  4057. the direct access method.  The VECTOR program will respond to a                 
  4058. control-C/Break at any time during execution.  This will terminate the          
  4059. current processing task, reset the printer to the top of form, and              
  4060. request another task.  Statistics for each plot frame, as well as total         
  4061. run statistics are displayed during the execution of VECTOR. For the dot        
  4062. matrix type graphics printer, four basic resolutions are provided by            
  4063. VECTOR depending on the type of printer attached.  A low resolution mode        
  4064. is supported to quickly review the plot with very limited definition.           
  4065. This mode is useful for quick turn-around. The high resolution mode takes       
  4066. much more time because of hardware constraints, but gives very                  
  4067. satisfactory results.  VECTOR also has an on-screen preview capability          
  4068. which allows quick identification of graphics files.                            
  4069.                                                                                 
  4070. Error Conditions:                                                               
  4071.                                                                                 
  4072. During the execution of VECTOR, several error messages might be displayed       
  4073. on the terminal.  The only message that is not serious has to do with a         
  4074. premature termination of the programs that produced the graphics output         
  4075. file. The message reads "Premature End-of-File at Record XXXX". It just         
  4076. means that the graphics file was not terminated properly, but all the           
  4077. graphics data is valid.                                                         
  4078.                                                                                 
  4079. The second class of messages is serious and should not be ignored. The          
  4080. messages are listed along with reasons.                                         
  4081.                                                                                 
  4082. "Error reading graphics file" - means that FORTRAN I/O was unable to read       
  4083. the graphics file. The file should be recreated on another disk to              
  4084. correct the error condition.                                                    
  4085.                                                                                 
  4086. "File not in graphics format" - means that the speacified file is not in        
  4087. SciPlot graphics format. Check to see if the filename is correct or was         
  4088. produced by a current version of SciPlot.                                       
  4089.                                                                                 
  4090. "Graphics file too large for memory" - means that the graphics file             
  4091. specified cannot be processed by VEACTOR due to inadequate memory sort          
  4092. space.                                                                          
  4093.                                                                                 
  4094. "Too many vectors for memory" - means that number of vectors per                
  4095. processing window is too dense. Try using the VECTOR.LRG object deck to         
  4096. generate the VECTOR.EXE command file.                                           
  4097.                                                                                 
  4098.                                                                                 
  4099. The VECTOR program supports IBM Graphics, IBM ProPrinters, EPSON MX-80,         
  4100. FX-80 with GRAFTRAXPLUS, FX-85, FX-850, LQ-800 dot matrix printers              
  4101. connected on an 8-bit parallel I/O interface.  All 8 bits are necessary         
  4102. to register the full resolution of the graphics printers.  The resolution       
  4103. obtained is a plot frame of (960,1920,2880) pixels over 8 inches in the         
  4104. horizontal direction by (1800,2160) pixels over 10 inches in the vertical       
  4105. direction. The feature of positioning (1/216th, 1/180th) of an inch is          
  4106. used, giving a basic resolution of (120,240,360) by (180,216) pixels per        
  4107. inch over a unit square of one inch on a side.  The IBM                         
  4108. Graphics/ProPrinter, and the EPSON FX-80,85,850 printers have twice the         
  4109.  
  4110.                                                                       79
  4111. resolution as that of the EPSON MX-80.  The hardware requires double            
  4112. passes to absolutely register two dots in adjacent columns for this high        
  4113. resolution mode.  This is the reason for the lengthy processing time in         
  4114. this mode.                                                                      
  4115.                                                                                 
  4116. There is no paper positioning done by VECTOR. Therefore, the user must          
  4117. position the paper before executing the VECTOR program.  This is done           
  4118. purposefully to allow plots to be manually positioned.  It is possible to       
  4119. imbed plots in full text with a careful alignment of the paper.                 
  4120.                                                                                 
  4121. The HP Pen Plotter, the HP LaserJet, and the Apple LaserWriter are all          
  4122. supported by VEACTOR to register the graphics files produced by SciPlot.        
  4123.                                                                                 
  4124.  
  4125.  19. 6 OzMap Example                                     
  4126.        -------------
  4127.  
  4128. You can prepare and print a series of maps as follows:                          
  4129.                                                                                 
  4130. You start by displaying a map with OzGIS and adding any text etc. When it is    
  4131. ready you save the map. There are two options for saved displays; either can be 
  4132. used but when saved for hardcopy output the screen is not saved so takes less   
  4133. disk space.                                                                     
  4134.                                                                                 
  4135. The OzMap program is then started.                                              
  4136.                                                                                 
  4137. The name of the saved map file is given and a HARDCOPY! device file chosen.     
  4138. Use the default one initially.                                                  
  4139.                                                                                 
  4140. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  4141.                                                                                 
  4142. Now select CHANGE DISPLAY DEVICE                                                
  4143.                                                                                 
  4144. choose the printer metafile via PRINTER METAFILE (for VECTOR program)           
  4145.                                                                                 
  4146. Use "Display Map" to output the map to the file; give the file name e.g. phred. 
  4147.                                                                                 
  4148. Quit.                                                                           
  4149.                                                                                 
  4150. Type VECTOR to execute the program.                                             
  4151.                                                                                 
  4152. Accept all default values (dot matrix printers) and give the Graphics file as   
  4153. phred.hrd (note the file extension).                                            
  4154.                                                                                 
  4155. The map will be printed.                                                        
  4156.  
  4157.  19. 7 Fitting Maps on the Page                          
  4158.        ------------------------
  4159.  
  4160. If you find that maps printed on-line are not appearing neatly on the           
  4161. page you should output maps as meta-files and use the VECTOR program            
  4162. to print / plot them.                                                           
  4163.                                                                                 
  4164. The developers, MicroGlyph Systems, have supplied the following:                
  4165.                                                                                 
  4166.      The Apple LaserWriter and the HP Pen Plotters (7440, 7470,7475,7550) all   
  4167. require special attention. In order to  register a plot frame correctly, it is  
  4168. necessary to use proper offsets and axes dimensions. The Apple LaserWriter must 
  4169.  
  4170.                                                                       80
  4171. have at least a .25 inch left margin and a .5 inch bottom margin reserved. The H
  4172. Pen Plotters all have different basic plot  frame parameters.                   
  4173.                                                                                 
  4174.      Two tables have been prepared which will allow the user to have a portrait 
  4175. layout or a landscape layout for plot frames. The ANGLE and XTRANS/YTRANS       
  4176. arguments will be used from these two tables to obtain the  desired layout for  
  4177. plotting. The x-axis and y-axis lengths from  the tables serve as limits to the 
  4178. plot area. The DEMO.FOR program  reflects the use of the PORTRAIT layout        
  4179. parameters from the tables. If VECTOR is used to register a graphics file (which
  4180. has been  produced by using VECDEV=10) for any device other than an EPSON  dot  
  4181. matrix printer, then the correct layout parameters for that  destination device 
  4182. must be used to guarantee correct registration.  The following tables contain   
  4183. the correct parameters for Portrait  or Landscape layouts:                      
  4184.                                                                                 
  4185.                                                                                 
  4186.                                                                                 
  4187.                     Portrait Layout Parameters                                  
  4188.                                                                                 
  4189.                                                                                 
  4190.  -------------------------------------------------------------------            
  4191. | Device   Device      Paper  ANGLE X-Axis   Y-Axis XTRANS  YTRANS  |           
  4192. | Code     Type        Size   Degs  Length   Length Offset  Offset  |           
  4193.  -------------------------------------------------------------------            
  4194.     10     Epson,HPLJ 8.5x11   0.0   8.0     10.0     0.0     0.0               
  4195.     11,20  Apple LW   8.5x11   0.0   8.0     10.0     0.25    0.50              
  4196.     12     EPS File   8.5x11   0.0   8.0     10.0     0.0     0.0               
  4197.     13,21  HP-7470A    US/A   90.0   7.497   10.094  10.094   0.0               
  4198.     13,21  HP-7470A   MET/A4  90.0   7.497   10.682  10.682   0.0               
  4199.     13,21  HP-7475A    US/A   90.0   7.803   10.158  10.158   0.0               
  4200.     13,21  HP-7475A    US/B   90.0  10.158   16.306  16.306   0.0               
  4201.     13,21  HP-7475A   MET/A4  90.0   7.566   10.818  10.818   0.0               
  4202.     13,21  HP-7475A   MET/A3  90.0  10.818   15.834  15.834   0.0               
  4203.     13,21  HP-7550A    US/A   90.0   7.683    9.966   9.966   0.0               
  4204.     13,21  HP-7550A    US/B   90.0   9.966   16.121  16.121   0.0               
  4205.     13,21  HP-7550A   MET/A4  90.0   7.447   10.652  10.652   0.0               
  4206.     13,21  HP-7550A   MET/A3  90.0  10.652   15.649  15.649   0.0               
  4207.     14     CGM File   8.5x11   0.0   8.0     10.0     0.0     0.0               
  4208.     15     WPG File   8.5x11   0.0   8.0     10.0     0.0     0.0               
  4209.                                                                                 
  4210.                                                                                 
  4211.                     Landscape Layout Parameters                                 
  4212.                                                                                 
  4213.                                                                                 
  4214.  -------------------------------------------------------------------            
  4215. | Device   Device      Paper  ANGLE X-Axis   Y-Axis XTRANS  YTRANS  |           
  4216. | Code     Type        Size   Degs  Length   Length Offset  Offset  |           
  4217.  -------------------------------------------------------------------            
  4218.     10     Epson,HPLJ 8.5x11  90.0   10.0     8.0     8.0     0.0               
  4219.     11,20  Apple LW   8.5x11  90.0   10.0     8.0     8.25    0.50              
  4220.     12     EPS File   8.5x11  90.0   10.0     8.0     8.0     0.0               
  4221.     13,21  HP-7470A    US/A    0.0  10.094    7.497   0.0     0.0               
  4222.     13,21  HP-7470A   MET/A4   0.0  10.682    7.497   0.0     0.0               
  4223.     13,21  HP-7475A    US/A    0.0  10.158    7.803   0.0     0.0               
  4224.     13,21  HP-7475A    US/B    0.0  16.306   10.158   0.0     0.0               
  4225.     13,21  HP-7475A   MET/A4   0.0  10.818    7.566   0.0     0.0               
  4226.     13,21  HP-7475A   MET/A3   0.0  15.834   10.818   0.0     0.0               
  4227.     13,21  HP-7550A    US/A    0.0   9.966    7.683   0.0     0.0               
  4228.     13,21  HP-7550A    US/B    0.0  16.121    9.966   0.0     0.0               
  4229.  
  4230.                                                                       81
  4231.     13,21  HP-7550A   MET/A4   0.0  10.652    7.447   0.0     0.0               
  4232.     13,21  HP-7550A   MET/A3   0.0  15.649   10.652   0.0     0.0               
  4233.     14     CGM File   8.5x11  90.0   10.0     8.0     8.0     0.0               
  4234.     15     WPG File   8.5x11  90.0   10.0     8.0     8.0     0.0               
  4235.                                                                                 
  4236.                                                                                 
  4237.  
  4238.                                                                       82
  4239.                    20. TERRITORY DEFINITION                              
  4240.                        ====================
  4241.  
  4242.                                                                                 
  4243.                                                                                 
  4244. This chapter describes the facilities that can be used to define                
  4245. territories in terms of zones (polygons) in some displayed base map.            
  4246.                                                                                 
  4247.                                                                                 
  4248.                                                                                 
  4249.                                                                                 
  4250.                                                                                 
  4251. Usually territories are to be developed from base zones according to some       
  4252. criterion;  e.g. Sales territories should all have similar sales potential;     
  4253. e.g. School districts should have similar numbers of children.                  
  4254.                                                                                 
  4255. The operations are as follows.                                                  
  4256.                                                                                 
  4257.      A base map is displayed:  Usually this will be a standard geographic       
  4258.      file (e.g. Melbourne postcodes).  Basic OzGIS facilities are used          
  4259.      to subset files if non-standard regions are required.                      
  4260.                                                                                 
  4261.      Specification of territories:  Each territory has a unique 10              
  4262.      character name.  Zones are assigned off the screen with the cursor.        
  4263.      Zones can be moved between territories and deleted.  Territories can       
  4264.      be defined or deleted at any time.                                         
  4265.                                                                                 
  4266.      Specification of a base-map attribute file:  Territory attributes are      
  4267.      continually calculated by adding the values for the base zones in each     
  4268.      territory.  The derived values are quantised (usually sequential           
  4269.      colour 121 class method), the territories coloured, and a legend and       
  4270.      histogram of sorted values displayed. There can be no missing data.        
  4271.                                                                                 
  4272.      Zones can be shuffled according to the displayed territories attribute     
  4273.      values to meet the assignment criteria  while watching the legend          
  4274.      and histogram.                                                             
  4275.                                                                                 
  4276.      When territory assignment is complete, the definition is output as a       
  4277.      combine file.                                                              
  4278.                                                                                 
  4279. First choose the New pulldown menu:                                             
  4280.                                                                                 
  4281. START NEW SET OF TERRITORIES INTERACTIVELY                                      
  4282. START NEW SET OF TERRITORIES FROM COMBINE FILE                                  
  4283.                                                                                 
  4284. This gives the choice of starting a new set of territories by selecting         
  4285. regions with the box-cursor, or reading in a pre-defined set of territories off 
  4286. a combine file that is probably the result of a previous run of OzTerr.         
  4287.                                                                                 
  4288. The Define menu is used to specify the zones in each territory                  
  4289.                                                                                 
  4290. DISPLAY TERRITORY NAMES                                                         
  4291. DEFINE NEW TERRITORY                                                            
  4292. DELETE A TERRITORY                                                              
  4293. ADD ZONES SELECTED WITH BOX-CURSOR TO A TERRITORY                               
  4294. ADD A ZONE SELECTED WITH CURSOR TO A TERRITORY                                  
  4295. DELETE ZONES SELECTED WITH BOX-CURSOR FROM A TERRITORY                          
  4296.  
  4297.                                                                       83
  4298. DELETE A ZONE SELECTED WITH CURSOR FROM A TERRITORY                             
  4299. CHANGE BASE ZONE ATTRIBUTES                                                     
  4300. CHANGE THE QUANTISATION METHOD                                                  
  4301. OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  4302. OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                      
  4303. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  4304. OUTPUT TERRITORY NAMES AS GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                       
  4305. OUTPUT TERRITORIES AS COMBINE FILE                                              
  4306.                                                                                 
  4307. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  4308.                                                                                 
  4309. You define territories using the options:                                       
  4310.                                                                                 
  4311. DISPLAY TERRITORY NAMES                                                         
  4312. DEFINE NEW TERRITORY                                                            
  4313. DELETE A TERRITORY                                                              
  4314.                                                                                 
  4315.                                                                                 
  4316. Usually you are trying to balance territories e.g. you may display an           
  4317. attribute that is number of customers and the try to give each salesman         
  4318. a territory with about the same number of customers. To  do this you            
  4319. define the correct number of territories making a guess at their size           
  4320. and then shuffle the zones between the territories while monitoring             
  4321. the results by using "Display Map" to display the map. The options relevant to  
  4322. modifying territories are:                                                      
  4323.                                                                                 
  4324. ADD ZONES SELECTED WITH BOX-CURSOR TO A TERRITORY                               
  4325. ADD A ZONE SELECTED WITH CURSOR TO A TERRITORY                                  
  4326. DELETE ZONES SELECTED WITH BOX-CURSOR FROM A TERRITORY                          
  4327. DELETE A ZONE SELECTED WITH CURSOR FROM A TERRITORY                             
  4328.                                                                                 
  4329. You can add overlays to the displayed map to provide "navigation" with:         
  4330.                                                                                 
  4331. OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  4332. OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                      
  4333. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  4334.                                                                                 
  4335.                                                                                 
  4336. Finally the territory definitions can be output to a combine file that can be   
  4337. used to amalgamate the base zones and related attributes (see data preparation) 
  4338. to get a geographic and attribute file for mapping by using the option OUTPUT   
  4339. TERRITORIES AS COMBINE FILE.                                                    
  4340.                                                                                 
  4341. You should have line segments data for amalgamation. If you started with        
  4342. polygon data, the polygons will simply be renamed during the amalgamation       
  4343. process.                                                                        
  4344.                                                                                 
  4345.                                                                                 
  4346. You can also output a points geographic file that can be used as an overlay     
  4347. to label the territories on a map by using                                      
  4348. OUTPUT TERRITORY NAMES AS GEOGRAPHIC FILE.                                      
  4349.                                                                                 
  4350.  
  4351.                                                                       84
  4352.                    21. ADDRESS MATCHING / GEOCODING                      
  4353.                        ============================
  4354.  
  4355.                                                                                 
  4356.                                                                                 
  4357.                                                                                 
  4358. Address matching enables location data to be mapped where the locations are     
  4359. specified as addresses.                                                         
  4360.                                                                                 
  4361. The address matching software is under development. The first version is        
  4362. available in this release.                                                      
  4363.                                                                                 
  4364.                                                                                 
  4365.                                                                                 
  4366.  
  4367.  21. 1 Introduction                                      
  4368.        ------------
  4369.  
  4370. Many organisations have data which are spatially referenced by addresses, such  
  4371. as customer databases.                                                          
  4372.                                                                                 
  4373. These data can be shown on a zones map by accumulating the data within each     
  4374. postal district and displaying the results using digitised postal district      
  4375. boundaries. Examples are total number of customers and average sales amount.    
  4376.                                                                                 
  4377. Digital data are now becoming available that contain address information e.g.   
  4378. the US Census TIGER data. These data enable the locations of the attribute data 
  4379. to be extracted as points and maps produced with or without related attribute   
  4380. data.                                                                           
  4381.                                                                                 
  4382. The OzGIS system allows digitised road data and their associated addresses to   
  4383. be processed. Sets of addresses can be processed to produce geographic files of 
  4384. point locations. These point files can then be displayed in the usual ways,     
  4385. either as symbols or names as map overlays or as sites sized according to       
  4386. some attribute data.                                                            
  4387.                                                                                 
  4388. For example, a bank may want to extract points using the addresses of           
  4389. some customers and then map the average monthly account balances.               
  4390.  
  4391.  21. 2 Addresses                                         
  4392.        ---------
  4393.  
  4394. An address is made up of three parts, a number, a name and a postal code.       
  4395. Examples are:                                                                   
  4396.                                                                                 
  4397. 123 Main Street 654321                                                          
  4398. Hyde Park                                                                       
  4399. 12 Funny Farm Drive, Hicksville 2601                                            
  4400.                                                                                 
  4401. 1. The number is a simple integer. Common variations such as 22A, 5-6, 5/66 etc 
  4402. are not supported. If a number is not given the point will be placed in the     
  4403. centre of the geographic feature.                                               
  4404.                                                                                 
  4405. 2. The name must be given, and is the main part of the address for matching.    
  4406.                                                                                 
  4407. 3. The postal district is an integer number that helps processing in cases      
  4408. where the same address name is used in different districts. It need not be      
  4409.  
  4410.                                                                       85
  4411. given.                                                                          
  4412.                                                                                 
  4413.  
  4414.  21. 3 Data entry                                        
  4415.        ----------
  4416.  
  4417. Lines data can be entered with the normal process. Addresses are supported for  
  4418. TIGER data and data in standard form. Other formats will be supported according 
  4419. to availability of data and demand.                                             
  4420.                                                                                 
  4421. Only line data is supported as that is what is currently available. Typically   
  4422. the data will be roads.                                                         
  4423.                                                                                 
  4424. Two ranges of street numbers will usually be associated with a road, a set of   
  4425. odd numbers down one side and even numbers down the other e.g. a digitised line 
  4426. segment may have road name "Hollywood Boulevarde" and number ranges 111 to 179  
  4427. and 120 to 220.                                                                 
  4428.                                                                                 
  4429. A road may also have one range (e.g. 1 to 200) or no range may be given.        
  4430.                                                                                 
  4431. The order of the road numbers defines the direction of the road. The direction  
  4432. does not have to be the same for the odd and even numbers. If two ranges are    
  4433. given and one is not odd and the other even, a single range is derived from the 
  4434. limits, but the direction must be the same as defined by the two ranges.        
  4435.                                                                                 
  4436.  
  4437.  21. 4 Address Matching                                  
  4438.        ----------------
  4439.  
  4440. An option is provided in the data preparation process to match addresses in a   
  4441. data file with those in the digitised line data in a geographic file.           
  4442.                                                                                 
  4443. The major difficulty is the matching of the road names allowing for differences 
  4444. in spelling.                                                                    
  4445.                                                                                 
  4446. After a match is found, the number in the given address is used to find the     
  4447. distance along the road (using the ranges) and hence a location is calculated.  
  4448.                                                                                 
  4449. The set of addresses are given on a data file that has the following:           
  4450.                                                                                 
  4451. 1. An identifier that can be used to attach attribute data to the point and     
  4452. which can be used as a label on maps. If no identifier is given the road name   
  4453. will be used. This identifier would often be a database primary key.            
  4454.                                                                                 
  4455. 2. The road number. If not given the generated point will be the centre of the  
  4456. road.                                                                           
  4457.                                                                                 
  4458. 3. The road name. Mandatory.                                                    
  4459.                                                                                 
  4460. 4. The post (zip) code. Optional.                                               
  4461.                                                                                 
  4462. A geographic file of points is generated. Any addresses that cannot be matched  
  4463. are listed on the OZGIS.OUT file.                                               
  4464.                                                                                 
  4465.  
  4466.                                                                       86
  4467.  
  4468.  21. 5 Matching Addresses                                
  4469.        ------------------
  4470.  
  4471.                                                                                 
  4472. Matching takes place on upper case characters i.e. case is not significant e.g. 
  4473. "Main St" and MAIN st" match.                                                   
  4474.                                                                                 
  4475. Multiple blanks are removed e.g. "Grand Parade" matches "Grand      Parade".    
  4476.                                                                                 
  4477. A parameter file is used to convert parts of the names. This is commonly used   
  4478. to handle abbreviations e.g. ROAD and RD.                                       
  4479.                                                                                 
  4480. Matching is controlled by a level:                                              
  4481.                                                                                 
  4482. Level 1. Every character in the names in the geographic and data files must be  
  4483. the same e.g. "PHREDS ROAD" and PHRED ROAD" are not the same.                   
  4484.                                                                                 
  4485. Level 2. Every character of the shorter name must match the other e.g. "phred"  
  4486. would match the above two strings.                                              
  4487.                                                                                 
  4488. Level 3. The first word in each name must match e.g.  "Bloggs Street" and       
  4489. "Bloggs Ave" match.                                                             
  4490.                                                                                 
  4491. Level 4. Matching is carried out by using derived names e.g. vowels are all     
  4492. treated the same, repeated letters are removed, non alphabetic characters are   
  4493. all the same.                                                                   
  4494.                                                                                 
  4495. Level 5. Matching uses the "soundex" algorithm                                  
  4496.                                                                                 
  4497.                                                                                 
  4498.  
  4499.  21. 6 Procedure                                         
  4500.        ---------
  4501.  
  4502. Address matching is an option in the data preparation process.                  
  4503.                                                                                 
  4504. Select PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY from the top menu, which gives the menu:        
  4505.                                                                                 
  4506. TUTORIALS & SYSTEM INFORMATION                                                  
  4507. PROCESS GEOGRAPHIC FILES                                                        
  4508. PROCESS ATTRIBUTES FILES                                                        
  4509. PROCESS NAMES FILES                                                             
  4510. OUTPUT EXTERNAL DATA FILES                                                      
  4511. ADDRESS MATCHING                                                                
  4512. CHANGE DEVICE FILE                                                              
  4513.                                                                                 
  4514. So you choose ADDRESS MATCHING, which displays the menu:                        
  4515.                                                                                 
  4516. EXACT MATCHING FOR POINTS OVERLAYS                                              
  4517. MATCH FOR START OF ADDRESS FOR POINTS OVERLAYS                                  
  4518. MATCH FOR FIRST WORD OF ADDRESS FOR POINTS OVERLAYS                             
  4519. DESPERATION MATCHING FOR POINTS OVERLAYS                                        
  4520. EXACT MATCHING FOR SITE MAPPING                                                 
  4521. MATCH FOR START OF ADDRESS FOR SITES MAPPING                                    
  4522. MATCH FOR FIRST WORD OF ADDRESS FOR SITES MAPPING                               
  4523. DESPERATION MATCHING FOR SITES MAPPING                                          
  4524.  
  4525.                                                                       87
  4526.                                                                                 
  4527. These options correspond to the 4 matching levels for either point overlays     
  4528. or site mapping.                                                                
  4529.                                                                                 
  4530. You have to specify a number of files:                                          
  4531.                                                                                 
  4532. 1. the geographic file that contains the roads and the road names and address   
  4533. limits                                                                          
  4534.                                                                                 
  4535. 2. Your data file containing the addresses to be matched                        
  4536.                                                                                 
  4537. 3. A parameter file of abbreviations to help the matching process e.g. AVE is   
  4538. defined as the abbreviation for Avenue                                          
  4539.                                                                                 
  4540. 4. the name of the geographic file to be generated with the points location     
  4541.                                                                                 
  4542. After you have generated the points geographic file you should check the        
  4543. file OZGIS.OUT to see how well the addresses were matched. You may then want    
  4544. to change some of the addresses in the data file to improve the hit rate.       
  4545.                                                                                 
  4546. You can now map the data with the OzGIS program. This is covered in other       
  4547. chapters, but briefly:                                                          
  4548.                                                                                 
  4549. DISPLAY GEOGRAPHIC FILES (NO ATTRIBUTES) is used to display the points as       
  4550. symbols.                                                                        
  4551.                                                                                 
  4552. You would probably then use DEFINE GEOGRAPHIC OVERLAYS and add your roads file  
  4553. as a lines overlay and also overlay the names of the points.                    
  4554.                                                                                 
  4555. DISPLAY SITES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE would be used if you have attribute data    
  4556. for the points. You would probably add the roads as a lines overlay and the     
  4557. identifiers as a names overlay.                                                 
  4558.                                                                                 
  4559. DISPLAY ZONES AND SITES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES could also be used if you       
  4560. want to display other data such as Census data as a zones map underneath        
  4561. the points with their attribute data.                                           
  4562.                                                                                 
  4563. The points could of course be added as overlays to any map.                     
  4564.  
  4565.  21. 7 Data                                              
  4566.        ----
  4567.  
  4568. You specify the addresses you want to match in a data files with fixed format   
  4569. records:                                                                        
  4570.                                                                                 
  4571. 10 bytes  Identifier. If blank the road name is used (first 10 bytes)           
  4572.                                                                                 
  4573. 50 bytes  Address                                                               
  4574.                                                                                 
  4575. For example, the demonstration file DEMOMTCH.DAT looks like:                    
  4576.                                                                                 
  4577. EXAMPLE ADDRESSES FOR MATCHING - DEMOMTCH.DAT                                   
  4578. ADDRESS001         1 GReat north road 2600                                      
  4579.                  666 GReat north road 2600                                      
  4580. JOE BLOGGS       333 GReat north road 2600                                      
  4581. ADDRESS004               GReat north road 2600                                  
  4582.             333 GReat north road                                                
  4583. PIZZA KING      GReat north road                                                
  4584.  
  4585.                                                                       88
  4586. ADDRESS007  333 GReat              2600                                         
  4587. HARRY S     333 GReat north rd     2600                                         
  4588. ADDRESS009  333 GReet narth read   2600                                         
  4589. ADDRESS011  666 GReat    north     road   2600                                  
  4590. ADDRESS012  666 Molonglo Gorge     2600                                         
  4591. ADDRESS013               Molonglo Gorge                                         
  4592.                   11 Northbourne Ave 2602                                       
  4593. ADDRESS015 44 Northbourne Ave    2600                                           
  4594. ADDRESS016 10 Northbourne Ave    2600                                           
  4595. ADDRESS017 68 Northbourne Ave    2600                                           
  4596. ADDRESS018 57 Northbourne Ave    2600                                           
  4597. ADDRESS01940 EPPING HWY                                                         
  4598. ADDRESS020 33 EPPING HWY                                                        
  4599.                                                                                 
  4600.  
  4601.  21. 8 Abbreviations parameter file                      
  4602.        ----------------------------
  4603.  
  4604. A parameter file must be given to allow for abbreviations such as ST, AVE, RD   
  4605.                                                                                 
  4606. A sample file from the USA Census TIGER documentaion is provided \OZGIS\USA.PRM 
  4607.                                                                                 
  4608. You should set up your own abbreviation file. The shorter it is, the faster will
  4609. be the matching process.                                                        
  4610.                                                                                 
  4611. The first record of the file is a comment, and each following record is:        
  4612.                                                                                 
  4613. 30 bytes text                                                                   
  4614. 10 bytes  abbreviation                                                          
  4615.                                                                                 
  4616.                                                                                 
  4617. The file must be in upper case, and the abbreviation must be shorter than the   
  4618. text string.                                                                    
  4619.                                                                                 
  4620. The demonstration file is DEMOMTCH.PRM:                                         
  4621.                                                                                 
  4622. Address matching parameter file DEMOMTCH.PRM                                    
  4623. AVENUE                        AVE                                               
  4624. BOULEVARD                     BLVD                                              
  4625. CIRCLE                        CIR                                               
  4626. DRIVE                         DR                                                
  4627. FREEWAY                       FWY                                               
  4628. HIGHWAY                       HWY                                               
  4629. MOTORWAY                      MTWY                                              
  4630. PARKWAY                       PKY                                               
  4631. PLACE                         PL                                                
  4632. ROAD                          RD                                                
  4633. STREET                        ST                                                
  4634.                                                                                 
  4635.                                                                                 
  4636.                                                                                 
  4637.  
  4638.  21. 9 Handling Errors                                   
  4639.        ---------------
  4640.  
  4641. The results of the matching process are written to the log file OZGIS.OUT       
  4642.                                                                                 
  4643. Each data record is listed with either "MATCHED", "DUPLICATE" or "REJECTED".    
  4644.  
  4645.                                                                       89
  4646. When the names match both the data and geographic file  addresses are listed as 
  4647. well as the level of the match.                                                 
  4648.                                                                                 
  4649. The output will be of the form:                                                 
  4650.                                                                                 
  4651.                                                                                 
  4652.  ======= ADDRESS MATCHING AT LEVEL 4 ======                                     
  4653.                                                                                 
  4654.                                                                                 
  4655. GEOGRAPHIC FILE demoaddr                                                        
  4656. ADDRESSES  FILE demomtch                                                        
  4657. PARAMETER  FILE demomtch                                                        
  4658.                                                                                 
  4659. MATCHED          333     GReat north road   2600                                
  4660. MATCHED          666     GReat    north     road             2600               
  4661. NO MATCH         666     Molonglo Gorge     2600                                
  4662. NO MATCH          68     Northbourne Ave    2600                                
  4663. MATCHED           11      EPPING HWY                            0               
  4664. MATCHED           33            EPPING HWY                      0               
  4665. NO MATCH          33     EPXXING HWY                            0               
  4666.                                                                                 
  4667.  
  4668.                                                                       90
  4669.                    22. SPATIAL OPERATIONS                                
  4670.                        ==================
  4671.  
  4672.                                                                                 
  4673.                                                                                 
  4674.                                                                                 
  4675. This chapter describes the facilities that enable a new geographic              
  4676. file to be generated that is the result of spatial operations such as union     
  4677. and intersection between the spatial objects in two input geographic files.     
  4678.                                                                                 
  4679. The options have not been fully tested.                                         
  4680.                                                                                 
  4681.                                                                                 
  4682.                                                                                 
  4683.  
  4684.  22. 1 Operations                                        
  4685.        ----------
  4686.  
  4687.                                                                                 
  4688. The operations take place between the objects in two input geographic files,    
  4689. with the resultant objects being output to a new geographic file.               
  4690.                                                                                 
  4691. The following operations are supported:                                         
  4692.                                                                                 
  4693. . Intersection of points with polygons                                          
  4694.                                                                                 
  4695.   For example, extract all sightings (points) of the wedgetail eagle within     
  4696.   vegetation type 100 (polygons)                                                
  4697.                                                                                 
  4698.   For example extract all retail sites within competitor's store catchments     
  4699.   (polygons).                                                                   
  4700.                                                                                 
  4701.   This is a point-in-polygon operation i.e. the points in one file that lie     
  4702.   inside any of the polygons in the second file are selected.                   
  4703.                                                                                 
  4704. . Intersection of lines with polygons                                           
  4705.                                                                                 
  4706.   For example, select all roads that are within the franchise area. (then match 
  4707.   addresses)                                                                    
  4708.                                                                                 
  4709.   This is a crossing operation i.e. the parts of any lines that cross (are      
  4710.   inside of) the polygons in the other file are output.                         
  4711.                                                                                 
  4712. . Intersection of polygons with polygons                                        
  4713.                                                                                 
  4714.   For example, Extract polygons that have soil types (feature codes) 500 to 600 
  4715.   and forest trees feature codes 77 to 88                                       
  4716.                                                                                 
  4717.   For example, Extract Census districts within the digitised areas covered by   
  4718.   all hospitals.                                                                
  4719.                                                                                 
  4720.   The polygons that are the overlapped parts of any pairs of polygons from      
  4721.   the two files are output (an AND operation)                                   
  4722.                                                                                 
  4723. . Union of polygons with polygons.                                              
  4724.                                                                                 
  4725.   For example, Extract polygons that have soil types  500 to 600  or            
  4726.  
  4727.                                                                       91
  4728.   forest trees feature codes 77 to 88                                           
  4729.                                                                                 
  4730.   Pairs of polygons from the two input files that overlap are merged to         
  4731.   form new polygons. Those that do not overlay are output as is.                
  4732.                                                                                 
  4733. . Buffer generation                                                             
  4734.                                                                                 
  4735.   Generation of buffers at a given distance around spatial objects may be       
  4736. supported in future releases.                                                   
  4737.                                                                                 
  4738.                                                                                 
  4739.                                                                                 
  4740.                                                                                 
  4741. Two levels of polygons will be supported:                                       
  4742.                                                                                 
  4743. 1. Simple polygons                                                              
  4744.                                                                                 
  4745. Single polygons are processed. There is no regard for polygons inside other     
  4746. polygons. Polygons with the names OUTSIDE or INSIDE are ignored.                
  4747.                                                                                 
  4748. This will often be all that is required.                                        
  4749.                                                                                 
  4750. These data can have been entered into the system as one                         
  4751. of the polygonal formats supported (SAS, Atlas etc).                            
  4752.                                                                                 
  4753. 2. Complex polygons NOT IMPLEMENTED YET                                         
  4754.                                                                                 
  4755. This handles zones which are made up of any mixture of polygons, some of        
  4756. which can be inside others to a considerable depth.                             
  4757.                                                                                 
  4758.                                                                                 
  4759. The results of the polygon processing is a file of line segments that can be    
  4760. built into polygons with the zone/polygon building process.                     
  4761.                                                                                 
  4762.  
  4763.  22. 2 Feature codes                                     
  4764.        -------------
  4765.  
  4766. Processing can take place for a range of feature codes or the whole of the      
  4767. files can be processed.                                                         
  4768.                                                                                 
  4769. A new feature code must be specified for the generated objects. Optionally the  
  4770. existing feature codes for both files of objects can be added as well.          
  4771.                                                                                 
  4772.  
  4773.  22. 3 Procedure                                         
  4774.        ---------
  4775.  
  4776. When the SPATIAL OPERATIONS item is selected from the top menu the following    
  4777. menu appears:                                                                   
  4778.                                                                                 
  4779. INTERSECT POINTS (SECONDARY) WITH SIMPLE POLYGONS (PRIMARY)                     
  4780. INTERSECT LINES (SECONDARY) WITH SIMPLE POLYGONS (PRIMARY)                      
  4781. INTERSECT SIMPLE POLYGONS  WITH SIMPLE POLYGONS                                 
  4782. UNION OF SIMPLE POLYGONS  WITH SIMPLE POLYGONS                                  
  4783. INTERSECT POINTS  WITH SIMPLE POLYGONS FOR FEATURE CODES                        
  4784. INTERSECT LINES  WITH SIMPLE POLYGONS FOR FEATURE CODES                         
  4785. INTERSECT POLYGONS  WITH SIMPLE POLYGONS FOR FEATURE CODES                      
  4786.  
  4787.                                                                       92
  4788. UNION OF POLYGONS  WITH SIMPLE POLYGONS FOR FEATURE CODES                       
  4789.                                                                                 
  4790. You select the appropriate option. You can either process all the geographic    
  4791. data or subset it for a feature code range.                                     
  4792.                                                                                 
  4793. Then you have to give the names of the two input geographic files. As indicated 
  4794. by the menu items, the primary geographic file is always a file of polygons     
  4795. while the secodary geographic file is the points or line segments or polygons.  
  4796.                                                                                 
  4797. You also have to give a name for the geographic file that will be generated.    
  4798.                                                                                 
  4799. You always have to provide a feature code (a positive number) for the           
  4800. generated objects, and can optionally have the feature codes from the           
  4801. intersected (or unioned) pairs of objects included in the new objects.          
  4802.                                                                                 
  4803. Polygons are not directly generated. If you intersect or form the union of      
  4804. polygons with polygons the output is line segments which then have to be        
  4805. built into polygons with the zone/polygon building process.                     
  4806.                                                                                 
  4807.  
  4808.                                                                       93
  4809.                    23. OzDigit DIGITISING (being ported from VAX)        
  4810.                        ==========================================
  4811.  
  4812.                                                                                 
  4813.                                                                                 
  4814. This chapter desribes the OzDigit program for digitising paper maps to obtain   
  4815. data for input into the OzGIS system.                                           
  4816.                                                                                 
  4817. It is uncertain when this software will be available.                           
  4818.                                                                                 
  4819.                   DRAFT DOCUMENTATION                                           
  4820.                                                                                 
  4821.                                                                                 
  4822.                                                                                 
  4823.  
  4824.  23. 1 Introduction                                      
  4825.        ------------
  4826.  
  4827. Digitising is a tedious, soul-destrying job. If you can, obtain your data       
  4828. from commercial or other sources. If you cant, try and get someone else to      
  4829. do it for you (but not someone you love!) If all else fails, this program       
  4830. will allow you to produce accurately digitised and topologically correct        
  4831. geographic data files.                                                          
  4832.                                                                                 
  4833. One IMPORTANT point:                                                            
  4834.                                                                                 
  4835. It is easy to rapidly digitise a map, but it can take a long time to fix        
  4836. any digitising errors such as digitising a line twice.                          
  4837.                                                                                 
  4838. Hence......                                                                     
  4839.                                                                                 
  4840. Digitise in a logical, precise way. Do a small amount at a time, process        
  4841. the data to check it, and then do some more.                                    
  4842.                                                                                 
  4843. In particular, the first time you try digitising, draw yourself a trivial       
  4844. map on a piece of paper and digitise that to work out the procedure.            
  4845.  
  4846.  23. 2 Configuration                                     
  4847.        -------------
  4848.  
  4849. Summagraphics compatible digitisers are supported. These plug directly into     
  4850. a port in the PC and work by generating Ascii messages to the PC that look      
  4851. like keyboard input.                                                            
  4852.                                                                                 
  4853. Configuration involves editing a line in the \ozgis\ozgis.ini file to           
  4854. specify the port that is being used.                                            
  4855.                                                                                 
  4856.  
  4857.  23. 3 Files                                             
  4858.        -----
  4859.  
  4860. You specify three files to the OzDigit program:                                 
  4861.                                                                                 
  4862. .  The menu file describes the menu being used and where it is located on the   
  4863.     board.                                                                      
  4864.                                                                                 
  4865. .  The digitiser file contains all the current digitised data (see below)       
  4866.  
  4867.                                                                       94
  4868.                                                                                 
  4869. .  An output data files is generated that is in standard geographic file        
  4870. format and is read into the system with the data entry process.                 
  4871.                                                                                 
  4872. The digitiser file actually contains the names of several other files, which    
  4873. you dont usually worry about, but some of which can be modified directly once   
  4874. you understand how the digitising process works.                                
  4875.                                                                                 
  4876. These other files all have the same name as the digitiser file. but with        
  4877. different extensions. for example:                                              
  4878.                                                                                 
  4879. PHRED.DIG the digitiser file                                                    
  4880. PHRED.CPS the control point file                                                
  4881. PHRED.FIT the parameters for the transformation                                 
  4882. PHRED.DGV the digitised data file                                               
  4883. PHRED.ZON the zone/poly names and feature codes file                            
  4884. PHRED.LIN the line segment names and feature codes file                         
  4885. PHRED.PNT the point names and feature codes file                                
  4886.                                                                                 
  4887.  
  4888.  23. 4 Preparation for Digitising                        
  4889.        --------------------------
  4890.  
  4891. First of all make sure that the paper map to be digitised is in good condition. 
  4892. If necessary iron it to make it flat and tape any rips.                         
  4893.                                                                                 
  4894. Fix the map to the digitiser board with tape. Remember that the very edge of the
  4895. board may not be "active", so put it away from the edge. If the map is too big  
  4896. it can be moved later to do the rest of the digitising i.e. you can digitise it 
  4897. in pieces.                                                                      
  4898.                                                                                 
  4899. The map should be close to horizontal on the board.                             
  4900.                                                                                 
  4901.  
  4902.  23. 5 Setting up the Menu                               
  4903.        -------------------
  4904.  
  4905. You control much of the digitising process from a paper menu that you stick     
  4906. on the digitiser board.                                                         
  4907.                                                                                 
  4908. If you have a big board you may find that you leave the menu stuck in the       
  4909. same place all the time. However, you may find that you often need to           
  4910. stick the menu on a corner of the map you are digitising, and may have to       
  4911. move it to digitise what is underneath.                                         
  4912.                                                                                 
  4913. You can have different sizes and shapes of menus to allow for fitting it        
  4914. on the board according to the shape of the map being digitised.                 
  4915.                                                                                 
  4916. You start by drawing yourself a menu on some paper.                             
  4917.                                                                                 
  4918. The menu has 17 entries:                                                        
  4919.                                                                                 
  4920. the digits 0 to 9                                                               
  4921. "ZONE" for zone / polygon internal points or points                             
  4922. "INT"  for intersection points (nodes)                                          
  4923. "LINE" for line segments                                                        
  4924. "DELP" for delete point                                                         
  4925. "DELS" for delete line segment                                                  
  4926.  
  4927.                                                                       95
  4928. "END"  end-of-job, end of number                                                
  4929.                                                                                 
  4930. You draw the menus on rectangular pieces of paper on a grid:                    
  4931.                                                                                 
  4932. e.g. you may set up a menu of 3 columns and 6 rows as follows:                  
  4933.                                                                                 
  4934.                                                                                 
  4935.       ----------------------                                                    
  4936.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4937.       |  0   |      | END  |                                                    
  4938.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4939.       ----------------------                                                    
  4940.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4941.       |  1   |  2   |  3   |                                                    
  4942.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4943.       ----------------------                                                    
  4944.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4945.       |  4   |  5   |  6   |                                                    
  4946.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4947.       ----------------------                                                    
  4948.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4949.       |  7   |  8   |  9   |                                                    
  4950.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4951.       ----------------------                                                    
  4952.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4953.       | ZONE | INT  | LINE |                                                    
  4954.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4955.       ----------------------                                                    
  4956.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4957.       | DELP | DELS |      |                                                    
  4958.       |      |      |      |                                                    
  4959.       ----------------------                                                    
  4960.                                                                                 
  4961. The menu boxes should all be the same size.                                     
  4962.                                                                                 
  4963. If you are doing a lot of digitising you will probably draw up several menus    
  4964. such as a vertical 1 column, 17 rows menu, a horizontal 1 row 17 columns        
  4965. menu and perhaps both 3X6 and 6X3 rectangular menus or a 5x4 menu.              
  4966.                                                                                 
  4967.                                                                                 
  4968. Before you start digitising you have to stick the menu on the board,            
  4969. select the DEFINE DIGITISING MENU option from the main OzDigit menu, and        
  4970. digitise the four corners of the menu so the program knows where you have put   
  4971. it. You also have to give the number of rows and columns in the menu.           
  4972. Finally you give symbol that goes into each each menu location where row        
  4973. 1 is the top, and column 1 is the left. The symbols are those above, with       
  4974. blank being a menu location that is not used.                                   
  4975.                                                                                 
  4976. The menu definition is written on a file and remains current until changed.     
  4977.                                                                                 
  4978. You can move the menu on the board during the digitising process, but you       
  4979. then have to redefine the corners. So you usually dont move it if you can       
  4980. help it - ever!                                                                 
  4981.                                                                                 
  4982. You use the menu by digitising a point within the square of the item you        
  4983. want to select. Numbers, which are identifiers, are selected by digitising      
  4984. the digits followed by EOJ.                                                     
  4985.                                                                                 
  4986.  
  4987.                                                                       96
  4988.  
  4989.  23. 6 Control points                                    
  4990.        --------------
  4991.  
  4992. When you digitise a point the OzDigit program reads it in digitiser board       
  4993. coordinates. These are usually in a range like 0 to 10,000                      
  4994.                                                                                 
  4995. The program has to be able to convert these coordinates to the map coordinates  
  4996. such as latitude/longitude or UTM.                                              
  4997.                                                                                 
  4998. This is done by digitising "control points".                                    
  4999.                                                                                 
  5000. These are several points on the map at known map coordinates that are           
  5001. digitised at the start of data capture. The program knows both the board and    
  5002. map coordinates of each of the points, so can generate a function to transform  
  5003. any digitised point to map coordinates.                                         
  5004.                                                                                 
  5005.                                                                                 
  5006. First of all you select some suitable points on the map where you know the      
  5007. actual map coordinates - usually on the map grid. You should use at least four  
  5008. points near the corners of the part of the map being digitised and preferably   
  5009. at least one near the centre of the map too. You usually mark the points        
  5010. on the map with a coloured pen so you can remember which ones you used, and     
  5011. number them 1,2,3...                                                            
  5012.                                                                                 
  5013.                                                                                 
  5014. Next select DEFINE CONTROL POINTS from the menu and define the points in turn   
  5015. giving an identifying number and the point in map coordinates (remember that    
  5016. for latitude longitude the X value is the longitude). The coordinates are       
  5017. given as decimals, and appropriate signs should be used e.g. latitude is        
  5018. negative below the equator like -35.0.                                          
  5019.                                                                                 
  5020. The results are stored on a control points file and you can read in an          
  5021. existing file and overwrite the values in it.                                   
  5022.                                                                                 
  5023. The digitising software does not use map projections. You can use the           
  5024. projections options for that purpose.                                           
  5025.                                                                                 
  5026.                                                                                 
  5027. Finally you have to digitise the points. You define the numbers by selecting    
  5028. from the menu digits followed by EOJ for the control point identifier, and      
  5029. then digitise the actual point. The first time you will have to digitise        
  5030. all the points, but after that only any that you might have changed.            
  5031.                                                                                 
  5032. The program generates the transformation equation table -> map coordinates      
  5033. and prints out a goodness-of-fit. You can accept that or can modify the         
  5034. control point definitions.                                                      
  5035.                                                                                 
  5036.  
  5037.  23. 7 Digitising the Map                                
  5038.        ------------------
  5039.  
  5040. The OzDigit program is designed for digitising maps and producing data in       
  5041. a correct topological structure of zone-polygon-line where boundary lines       
  5042. occur once only (usually) and are shared between the adjacent polygons.         
  5043.                                                                                 
  5044. This requires careful, logical digitising.                                      
  5045.  
  5046.                                                                       97
  5047.                                                                                 
  5048. These types of maps are for choropleth mapping e.g. Census maps.                
  5049.                                                                                 
  5050. However, the system can also be used to produce a subset such as just points,   
  5051. lines or simple polygons for production of map overlays (e.g. town locations,   
  5052. roads) or environmental applications e.g. vegetation type polygons where the    
  5053. polygons may not be adjacent.                                                   
  5054.                                                                                 
  5055. You start the digitising process by selecting DIGITISE NEW MAP DATA.            
  5056.                                                                                 
  5057. The procedure for digitising Census type maps is:                               
  5058.                                                                                 
  5059. First of all digitise "nodes" which are the intersection points of all          
  5060. the boundary lines. Every node has a number (identifier) which can be           
  5061. generated sequentially by the system, but it is recommended that you            
  5062. assign your own numbers. You should prepare the map before digitising by        
  5063. writing the numbers against every place lines join/cross (some people use       
  5064. coloured stickers). Alternatively label each point as you digitise it.          
  5065. Ensure that you mark the points so you dont digitise them twice or miss         
  5066. any.                                                                            
  5067.                                                                                 
  5068. Next you digitise the boundary lines. All lines start and end on a node.        
  5069. While digitising you can keep going along the map lines, but everytime you      
  5070. pass through a node you have to be sure that you digitise the node point        
  5071. so the program can connect to it. You usually find that you have missed         
  5072. labelling a few nodes.  Lines also have numeric identifiers. As before they     
  5073. can be automatically assigned but it is recommended that you choose a range of  
  5074. numbers that is different to those used for the points and label the map        
  5075. either before you start or as you go.  Ensure that you mark lines in some       
  5076. way as you go so you dont digitise lines twice and you dont miss any.           
  5077.                                                                                 
  5078. If you have a large map you should digitise complete polygons in a small        
  5079. part of the map, ensure it is correct, and then do a bit more, until            
  5080. finished.                                                                       
  5081.                                                                                 
  5082. Next you have to digitise internal points in each of the polygons that make     
  5083. up the zones. Once again you should label these points carefully, using         
  5084. a different range of numbers.                                                   
  5085.                                                                                 
  5086. In all cases you start digitising a map object by choosing the type from        
  5087. the digitiser menu i.e. ZONE, INT or LINE, and then the identifying             
  5088. number from the digits on the digitiser menu. You then start digitising         
  5089. the map data. You can digitise a sequence of objects without returning          
  5090. to the menu, in which case the identifying number is incremented for each       
  5091. object.                                                                         
  5092.                                                                                 
  5093. The PC display will show the data as it is digitised.                           
  5094.                                                                                 
  5095. When EOJ is selected you are presented with several options for displaying      
  5096. and modifying the data.                                                         
  5097.                                                                                 
  5098.                                                                                 
  5099. While you are digitising, the transformation is used to convert the locations   
  5100. to map coordinates.                                                             
  5101.                                                                                 
  5102. The digitised data is usually saved at the end of digitising and can be read    
  5103. back in next time.                                                              
  5104.                                                                                 
  5105.  
  5106.                                                                       98
  5107. If you are digitising data for overlays you may take a more casual approach     
  5108. as you are not concerned that lines can be joined into polygons. You may        
  5109. then digitise and allow nodes to be automatically generated. Polygons are       
  5110. then likely to be generated as closed lines, with the same node at each end.    
  5111.                                                                                 
  5112.                                                                                 
  5113.  
  5114.  23. 8 Examining digitised data                          
  5115.        ------------------------
  5116.  
  5117. You can choose the option EXAMINE DIGITISED DATA to plot points, lines          
  5118. or zones for ranges of identifying numbers.                                     
  5119.                                                                                 
  5120.  
  5121.  23. 9 Giving Names and Feature codes                    
  5122.        ------------------------------
  5123.  
  5124. Zones (polygons), lines and points are identified by numbers during the         
  5125. digitising process.                                                             
  5126.                                                                                 
  5127. If you want to assign attribute data to them when mapping with OzGIS            
  5128. program, you have to provide the names that correspond to the object            
  5129. identifying numbers.                                                            
  5130.                                                                                 
  5131. You do this by choosing one of:                                                 
  5132.                                                                                 
  5133. DEFINE ZONE NAMES AND FEATURE CODES                                             
  5134. DEFINE LINE NAMES AND FEATURE CODES                                             
  5135. DEFINE POINT NAMES AND FEATURE CODES                                            
  5136.                                                                                 
  5137. The identifying numbers are written to files, and can be read back in           
  5138. and changed.                                                                    
  5139.                                                                                 
  5140. You can also assign one feature code to each polygon, line or point by          
  5141. either specifying them individually or assigning a default code.                
  5142.                                                                                 
  5143.  
  5144.  23.10 Forming Polygons / checking                       
  5145.        ---------------------------
  5146.  
  5147.                                                                                 
  5148. The final product is a data file in standard OzGIS geographic format.           
  5149.                                                                                 
  5150. This is produced by choosing GENERATE GEOGRAPHIC DATA FILE                      
  5151.                                                                                 
  5152. This process involves joining lines into polygons, if required, and             
  5153. outputting the topological structure to a file.                                 
  5154.                                                                                 
  5155. Any names defined for zones, lines or points will be used.                      
  5156.                                                                                 
  5157. Errors are detected at this stage and messages are output to the OZGIS.OUT      
  5158. file. You need to use display and editing programs to fix any mistakes.         
  5159.                                                                                 
  5160. You  will find that careful analysis is sometimes required to discover          
  5161. digitising errors.                                                              
  5162.                                                                                 
  5163.  
  5164.                                                                       99
  5165.  
  5166.  23.11 Editing Digitised Data                            
  5167.        ----------------------
  5168.  
  5169. You can choose EDIT DIGITISED DATA to display and modify the data.              
  5170.                                                                                 
  5171. Options are:                                                                    
  5172.                                                                                 
  5173. delete lines, points or zones                                                   
  5174.                                                                                 
  5175. plot lines, points or zones                                                     
  5176.                                                                                 
  5177. renumber intersections or zones                                                 
  5178.                                                                                 
  5179. split lines                                                                     
  5180.                                                                                 
  5181. Change region displayed.                                                        
  5182.                                                                                 
  5183.  
  5184.  23.12 Variations                                        
  5185.        ----------
  5186.  
  5187.                                                                                 
  5188. Two extra digitising environments are available:                                
  5189.                                                                                 
  5190. 1. The table can be simulated by the PC screen and mouse/cursor. This           
  5191. can be used for very simple digitising, where your map has to be drawn on       
  5192. some clear medium. This also supports digitising boards that simulate a mouse.  
  5193.                                                                                 
  5194. 2. Map overlays can be digitised by displaying a geographic file on the         
  5195. PC screen as the map to be digitised. Control points are not required           
  5196. as the transformation is known and a standard digitiser menu will               
  5197. be provided on the screen.                                                      
  5198.                                                                                 
  5199.                                                                                 
  5200.  
  5201.                                                                      100
  5202.                    24. SITE CATCHMENTS                                   
  5203.                        ===============
  5204.  
  5205.                                                                                 
  5206.                                                                                 
  5207. Catchments can be defined as contours around sites and the attribute data       
  5208. extracted from base zones (usually Census data) for mapping.                    
  5209.                                                                                 
  5210.                                                                                 
  5211.                                                                                 
  5212.                                                                                 
  5213.  
  5214.  24. 1 Introduction                                      
  5215.        ------------
  5216.  
  5217. A common requirement is to know the demographics of an area surrounding a site. 
  5218.                                                                                 
  5219. For example, a shopping centre manager would like to know how many customers of 
  5220. a particular type should be attracted to the centre.                            
  5221.                                                                                 
  5222. The basic source of demographic data is usually Census data.  The aim of the    
  5223. site catchment software is to determine weights to be applied to Census         
  5224. districts around a site so values can be accumulated.                           
  5225.                                                                                 
  5226. As it is expected that the attraction to a site will fall away with distance,   
  5227. the procedure is to define a set of contours around each site.                  
  5228.                                                                                 
  5229. For example, it may be decided that 95% of people living within 10KM of a       
  5230. hospital will go there in am emergency, 50% within 20KM outside that, and 10%   
  5231. within 30KM.                                                                    
  5232.                                                                                 
  5233. The contours are defined interactively on the screen, and their shape will      
  5234. reflect other influences such as barriers and competition.                      
  5235.                                                                                 
  5236.  
  5237.                                                                      101
  5238.                                                                                 
  5239. For example, the contours may be drawn for two sites at locations X and Y as:   
  5240.                                                                                 
  5241.                                    *                                            
  5242.                                  *    *                                         
  5243.                                 *       *                                       
  5244.                               *           *                                     
  5245.                             *              *                                    
  5246.                            *                *                                   
  5247.                          *         *         *                                  
  5248.                        *         *   *        *                                 
  5249.                       *        *       *       *                                
  5250.                       *       *   ***   *       *                               
  5251.                       *      *   *   *   *      *                               
  5252.                       *      *  *  X  *  *      *                               
  5253.                        *     *   *   *  *      *                                
  5254.                         *     *   ***  *      *                                 
  5255.                          *     *      *      *                                  
  5256.                           *     ******      *                                   
  5257.                             *              *                                    
  5258.                              *          ***                                     
  5259.                               *********                                         
  5260.                                                                                 
  5261.                                                                                 
  5262.                                                                                 
  5263.                                                                                 
  5264.                *                                                                
  5265.              *   *                                                              
  5266.            *       *                                                            
  5267.          *   ***   *                                                            
  5268.         *   *   *   *                                                           
  5269.         *  *  Y  *  *                                                           
  5270.        *   *    *   *                                                           
  5271.         *   * *    *                                                            
  5272.           *  *    *                                                             
  5273.            *     *                                                              
  5274.              **                                                                 
  5275.                                                                                 
  5276.                                                                                 
  5277. After the catchment contours have been defined they can be overlayed on the     
  5278. underlying Census boundaries to find which Census districts lie within each     
  5279. contour.                                                                        
  5280.                                                                                 
  5281. The Census districts, the proportion within the contours and the contour levels 
  5282. are used to produce a list of districts and their weights for each site. The    
  5283. lists are output as a combine file which can be used to amalgamate Census data  
  5284. for mapping.                                                                    
  5285.                                                                                 
  5286. The site names and locations are output as a geographic file that can be used   
  5287. with the attribute file to map the sites.                                       
  5288.                                                                                 
  5289. Geographic files containing the contour lines and other site definition         
  5290. graphics can  also be produced for use as an overlay on maps.                   
  5291.  
  5292.                                                                      102
  5293.  
  5294.  24. 2 Example                                           
  5295.        -------
  5296.  
  5297. Suppose you want to analyse some shopping centre sites in Sydney, and you have  
  5298. a geographic file of postcode boundaries called SYDPOST, a geographic file of   
  5299. main roads called SYDROAD and a file of Census data for the postcodes call      
  5300. SYDCENS.                                                                        
  5301. Select SITE CATCHMENTS from the top menu. The main site catchment menu is:      
  5302.                                                                                 
  5303. TUTORIALS AND SYSTEM INFORMATION                                                
  5304. DEFINE SITE CATCHMENTS                                                          
  5305. GENERATE CATCHMENT FILE ZONES AND WEIGHTS                                       
  5306. ASSEMBLE CATCHMENT FILES FOR MAPPING                                            
  5307.                                                                                 
  5308. First of all the catchments have to be defined, so select DEFINE SITE CATCHMENTS
  5309.                                                                                 
  5310. The catchments are defined relative to a base map, and there is the concept of  
  5311. a current set of sites being worked on.                                         
  5312.                                                                                 
  5313. So give the geographic file as SYDPOST. The base map is displayed.              
  5314.                                                                                 
  5315. The following menu appears:                                                     
  5316.                                                                                 
  5317. ADD A NEW SITE                                                                  
  5318. DELETE A SITE                                                                   
  5319. RENAME A SITE                                                                   
  5320. REPOSITION SITE LOCN, NAME OR SYMBOL                                            
  5321. MODIFY SITE CONTOURS                                                            
  5322. SEARCH GEOG FILE FOR SITES INSIDE A CONTOUR                                     
  5323. CHANGE DISPLAYED REGION                                                         
  5324. TEMPORARYILY OVERLAY OTHER CATCHMENT FILE ON BASE MAP                           
  5325. OVERLAY GEOGRAPHIC FILES ON BASE MAP                                            
  5326. DISPLAY ALL CURRENT SITES                                                       
  5327. INCLUDE SITES FROM CATCHMENT FILE                                               
  5328. INCLUDE POINTS FROM GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                             
  5329. INCLUDE POLYGONS FROM GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                           
  5330. DISPLAY TEXT                                                                    
  5331. OUTPUT TO CATCHMENT FILE                                                        
  5332. OUTPUT TO CATCHMENT FILE AND EXIT                                               
  5333.                                                                                 
  5334. Next display the main roads by selecting OVERLAY GEOGRAPHIC FILES and then      
  5335. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE. Give the file name as SYDROAD.    
  5336. The roads are simply to help identify locations, so are not necessary.          
  5337.                                                                                 
  5338. You may also want to use the CHANGE DISPLAYED REGION option to change the part  
  5339. of Sydney that is displayed.                                                    
  5340.                                                                                 
  5341. Now a new set of catchments can be defined (you can read in an old set)         
  5342.                                                                                 
  5343. Select ADD A NEW SITE, which displays the menu:                                 
  5344.                                                                                 
  5345. ADD NEW SITE, CURSOR POSN                                                       
  5346. ADD NEW SITE, TYPED POSN                                                        
  5347.                                                                                 
  5348. Sites are initially defined as circles. You provide a name, the radius of the   
  5349. circle, and a weight.                                                           
  5350.  
  5351.                                                                      103
  5352.                                                                                 
  5353. Suppose it has been decided as a starting point the 75% of people living within 
  5354. a 5KM radius of a shopping centre will buy all their groceries there. So select 
  5355. ADD NEW SITE, CURSOR POSN for each site                                         
  5356. Give a name                                                                     
  5357. Give the radius as 5.0                                                          
  5358. Give the weight as 0.75                                                         
  5359. Select the location with the cursor                                             
  5360.                                                                                 
  5361. Now return to the previous menu and select OUTPUT TO CATCHMENT FILE AND EXIT    
  5362. Give the catchment file a name, say SYDNEY.                                     
  5363.                                                                                 
  5364. Now the first version of the catchments have been defined, the proportions of   
  5365. the underlying base polygons that are within the contours can be calculated for 
  5366. each site and the weights applied.                                              
  5367.                                                                                 
  5368. Select GENERATE CATCHMENT FILE ZONES AND WEIGHTS                                
  5369.                                                                                 
  5370. Give the names of the base zones geographic file as SYDPOST (it could be        
  5371. something else) and the name of the catchment file SYDNEY.                      
  5372.                                                                                 
  5373. The polygons and the contours are now intersected to find the areas of the      
  5374. common parts and the catchment file is updated for the list of zones and        
  5375. weights for each site.                                                          
  5376.                                                                                 
  5377. Now the mapping data has to be output to files for mapping:                     
  5378.                                                                                 
  5379. Select ASSEMBLE CATCHMENT FILES FOR MAPPING which displays a menu:              
  5380.                                                                                 
  5381. INCLUDE SITES FROM CATCHMENT FILE                                               
  5382. CHANGE SYMBOL DISPLAY LOCATION                                                  
  5383. CHANGE NAME DISPLAY LOCATION                                                    
  5384. CHANGE DISPLAYED REGION                                                         
  5385. OUTPUT ZONES AND WEIGHTS TO COMBINE FILE                                        
  5386. AMALGAMATE ATTRIBUTE DATA FOR COMBINE FILE                                      
  5387. OUTPUT GEOGRAPHIC FILE FOR SYMBOLS AND CONTOUR DISPLAY                          
  5388. OUTPUT GEOGRAPHIC FILE FOR SITE NAMES AND OFFSET LINES                          
  5389.                                                                                 
  5390. First select INCLUDE SITES FROM CATCHMENT FILE and give the catchment files as  
  5391. SYDNEY (you could input several files).                                         
  5392.                                                                                 
  5393. Now generate a geographic file for mapping the sites by selecting               
  5394. OUTPUT GEOGRAPHIC FILE FOR SYMBOLS AND CONTOUR DISPLAY and giving a file name   
  5395. as say SITES. Then select OUTPUT GEOGRAPHIC FILE FOR SITE NAMES AND OFFSET LINES
  5396. and give a file name, say NAMES.                                                
  5397.                                                                                 
  5398. Now accumulate the attribute data for the sites:                                
  5399. First select OUTPUT ZONES AND WEIGHTS TO COMBINE FILE and give the file as      
  5400. COMB. The combine file will contain the list of zones (postcodes) for each      
  5401. site and the weights.                                                           
  5402.                                                                                 
  5403. Select AMALGAMATE ATTRIBUTE DATA FOR COMBINE FILE                               
  5404. The attribute file is that for the base zones SYDCENS and the combine file is   
  5405. COMB. Give the output attributes as SITES.                                      
  5406.                                                                                 
  5407. You can now map the site data, so return to the top menu and select             
  5408. INTERACTIVE DISPLAY AND ANALYSIS OF MAP DATA                                    
  5409.                                                                                 
  5410.  
  5411.                                                                      104
  5412. You now have the two main files for mapping, a points file called SITES and the 
  5413. related attribute file SITES.                                                   
  5414.                                                                                 
  5415. You could now select DISPLAY SITES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE to map the data.       
  5416.                                                                                 
  5417. However, you can also display the original base map data at the same time:      
  5418.                                                                                 
  5419. Select DISPLAY ZONES AND SITES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                          
  5420.                                                                                 
  5421. Give the zones attributes file as SYDCENS                                       
  5422. Give the sites attribute file as SITES                                          
  5423. Give the zones geographic file as SYDPOST                                       
  5424. Give the sites geographic file as SITES                                         
  5425.                                                                                 
  5426. The map is now displayed, with the site symbols on top of the base map.         
  5427.                                                                                 
  5428. Now add the contour lines by selecting DEFINE GEOGRAPHIC OVERLAYS and           
  5429. then OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE. Give the file as SITES.      
  5430.                                                                                 
  5431.  
  5432.  24. 3 Geographic files                                  
  5433.        ----------------
  5434.  
  5435. Sites are intiially defined as circles on the ground of a given size.           
  5436.                                                                                 
  5437. The map projection must be known to do this.                                    
  5438.                                                                                 
  5439. The geographic files must be Latitude Longitude with units of degrees.          
  5440.                                                                                 
  5441. Census boundary files are usually in this form.                                 
  5442.                                                                                 
  5443. You may have to use the projections options.                                    
  5444.                                                                                 
  5445. In particular, even if the file is lat. long. you may have to write that        
  5446. information into the file header by:                                            
  5447.                                                                                 
  5448. Select CHOOSE FROM PROJECTION SET 1 and then GEOGRAPHIC LATITUDE LONGITUDE      
  5449. Then use WRITE PROJECTION DEFINITION INTO GEOGRAPHIC FILE                       
  5450.                                                                                 
  5451. You will find that the process of intersecting the catchment contours and the   
  5452. base map polygons is slow. As the speed depends on the number of points in the  
  5453. polygons and as the process is approximate it is suggested that the data        
  5454. preparation option be used SIMPLIFY (THIN) LINE SEGMENTS                        
  5455.                                                                                 
  5456. The catchments are held as latitude / longitude polygons so are independent of  
  5457. the base map i.e. you can use one base map during definition and another during 
  5458. the intersection process. The process assumes an even population distribution   
  5459. across the base map zones, so the smaller the zones the more accurate the       
  5460. results would be.                                                               
  5461.                                                                                 
  5462. Note that the current set of sites being processed must always fit on the base  
  5463. map.                                                                            
  5464.                                                                                 
  5465.  
  5466.                                                                      105
  5467.  
  5468.  24. 4 Catchment files                                   
  5469.        ---------------
  5470.  
  5471. The system aims to provide facilities for analysis of sites for the             
  5472. definition of site locations and catchments, the retrieval of data,             
  5473. development of models and display of results.                                   
  5474.                                                                                 
  5475. The base of the process is the catchment file.                                  
  5476. A catchment file holds the definition of several sites.  The sites have         
  5477. some common grouping (e.g. all part of the same retail chain) and all fit       
  5478. on the same base map.                                                           
  5479.                                                                                 
  5480. A typical analysis would involve several catchment files, e.g. several sets     
  5481. of sites each for a different organisations( e.g. several sets, each            
  5482. defined on different base maps to increase resolution. )                        
  5483.                                                                                 
  5484. Site definition is carried out for a current set of sites.  These               
  5485. sites can be modified and new sites defined.  A base map is always              
  5486. displayed and all the current sites must fit on the displayed map.              
  5487.                                                                                 
  5488. Also defined for assistance are any other catchment files relevant to the analys
  5489. Site symbols, names and catchments are displayed if they fit on the             
  5490. map.  These sites cannot be modified.                                           
  5491.                                                                                 
  5492. A catchment file contains the following information for each site.              
  5493.                                                                                 
  5494. -    site name (10 characters)                                                  
  5495. -    site location                                                              
  5496. -    site symbol display location                                               
  5497. -    site name display location                                                 
  5498. -    catchment contours (up to 5)                                               
  5499. -    base zones and weights within catchment                                    
  5500.  
  5501.  24. 5 Catchment modification                            
  5502.        ----------------------
  5503.  
  5504. The whole process is iterative with catchments being modified and the results   
  5505. mapped.                                                                         
  5506.                                                                                 
  5507. The catchment definition menus provide the options (using a displayed base      
  5508. map):                                                                           
  5509. INCLUDE SITES FROM CATCHMENT FILE                                               
  5510. Enables existing sites to be considered.                                        
  5511.                                                                                 
  5512. ADD A NEW SITE                                                                  
  5513. DELETE A SITE                                                                   
  5514. RENAME A SITE                                                                   
  5515. Provides basic site control.                                                    
  5516.                                                                                 
  5517. REPOSITION SITE LOCN, NAME OR SYMBOL                                            
  5518. Enables shuffling of displayed site information when sites are crowded.         
  5519.                                                                                 
  5520. MODIFY SITE CONTOURS                                                            
  5521. Enables several contours to be defined for a site as circles or digitised       
  5522. simple polygons. The contours can reflect the interaction between sites and any 
  5523. barriers.                                                                       
  5524.  
  5525.                                                                      106
  5526.                                                                                 
  5527. Contours are essentially simple i.e. they are assumed to be concentric, and do  
  5528. not cross.                                                                      
  5529.                                                                                 
  5530. CHANGE DISPLAYED REGION                                                         
  5531. Enables zooming and panning of the base map.                                    
  5532.                                                                                 
  5533. TEMPORARYILY OVERLAY OTHER CATCHMENT FILE ON BASE MAP                           
  5534. Enables other site catchment files to be added as overlays.                     
  5535.                                                                                 
  5536. OVERLAY GEOGRAPHIC FILES ON BASE MAP                                            
  5537. Enables lines, points etc to be added to the base map.                          
  5538.                                                                                 
  5539. INCLUDE POINTS FROM GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                             
  5540. Enables a set of sites to be defined as circles (all same radius) at locations  
  5541. given in the file.                                                              
  5542.                                                                                 
  5543.  
  5544.                                                                      107
  5545.                      A. MAP DATA FORMATS                                  
  5546.                        ================
  5547.  
  5548.                                                                                 
  5549.                                                                                 
  5550. This appendix describes the data formats supported.                             
  5551.                                                                                 
  5552.                                                                                 
  5553. You obtain your data on a file in one of the following formats                  
  5554. and use the appropriate option to read that file and create an OzGIS file       
  5555. that can be used for mapping.                                                   
  5556.                                                                                 
  5557.                                                                                 
  5558.                                                                                 
  5559.                                                                                 
  5560.  
  5561.   A. 1 Introduction                                      
  5562.       ------------
  5563.  
  5564. The OzGIS system was designed to accept data from external sources.             
  5565.                                                                                 
  5566. These data may be supplied in standard formats that are supported by the        
  5567. IMPORT DATA FILES option in the top menu.                                       
  5568.                                                                                 
  5569. If not, data will  have to be reformatted into one of the system formats        
  5570. before use.                                                                     
  5571.                                                                                 
  5572. Map objects are identified by 10 character keys e.g. PARIS, NEW YORK, 12345     
  5573.                                                                                 
  5574. Where keys are generated within OzGIS they are usually left aligned numbers.    
  5575.  
  5576.   A. 2 OzGIS data Formats                                
  5577.       ------------------
  5578.  
  5579. Every type of file has a standard format within OzGIS.                          
  5580.                                                                                 
  5581. The data files have been designed with a simple format which can be easily      
  5582. generated on computer systems.                                                  
  5583.                                                                                 
  5584. Most data are held as character files so that they can be generated by          
  5585. programs with, for example, database system export procedures, formatted        
  5586. FORTRAN write statements, or by a text editor.  The record lengths are up to    
  5587. 80 bytes long.                                                                  
  5588.                                                                                 
  5589. Each file starts with a comment record of up to 80 characters, which should     
  5590. be used to hold a meaningful description of the file.  The OzGIS system         
  5591. will display this comment when data files are interrogated, so it is in         
  5592. your interest to make the comments meaningful.  This record must contain        
  5593. at least one non-blank character.                                               
  5594.                                                                                 
  5595. Data values are entered in record fields that are multiples of 10 bytes.        
  5596. The following computer restrictions apply:                                      
  5597.                                                                                 
  5598.      -  Character data (e.g. zone names) are usually left justified and         
  5599.         blank filled.  Sorted character strings must conform to the ASCII       
  5600.         collating sequence.                                                     
  5601.                                                                                 
  5602.  
  5603.                                                                      108
  5604.      -  All real values (i.e. with decimal points) can be placed anywhere       
  5605.         in the 10 byte fields, but the decimal points must be included.         
  5606.                                                                                 
  5607.      -  All integer values must be right justified in the 10 byte fields.       
  5608.         Their values must be within the range the computer is capable of        
  5609.         handling.                                                               
  5610.                                                                                 
  5611. While the file formats are defined as fixed size fields, variable formats can   
  5612. be used, but numbers must be delimitted by commas and text fields must          
  5613. be enclosed in """" pairs.                                                      
  5614.                                                                                 
  5615. The maximum numbers of some data items that can be handled                      
  5616. are system parameters. Refer to the Appendix.                                   
  5617.  
  5618.   A. 3 Description of File Formats                       
  5619.       ---------------------------
  5620.  
  5621. The formats for describing the data files in the following sections are         
  5622. similar.                                                                        
  5623.                                                                                 
  5624. The number of bytes in the field is given at the start of the line.  If         
  5625. there are several values in a format, this condition is indicated               
  5626. differently (e.g. 8 x 10 implies eight fields of 10 bytes).                     
  5627.                                                                                 
  5628. The information on the next line is the type of data in a field:                
  5629.                                                                                 
  5630.      byte     = character                                                       
  5631.      real     = number containing a decimal point                               
  5632.      integer  = number without a decimal point                                  
  5633.  
  5634.                                                                      109
  5635.  
  5636.   A. 4 Format of attribute files                         
  5637.       -------------------------
  5638.  
  5639.  
  5640.   A. 4. 1 Preprocessing                                     
  5641.           -------------
  5642.  
  5643. Attribute data are often obtained from Census Bureaux. These data are seldom    
  5644. what is required, so will need processing before use.                           
  5645.                                                                                 
  5646. Data often need normalising to allow for the differences in zone sizes. This is 
  5647. done by arithmetic operations where new attributes are derived by dividing by   
  5648. total population, area etc.                                                     
  5649.                                                                                 
  5650. Also, data often need amalgamation e.g. census age groups to get the required   
  5651. group.                                                                          
  5652.  
  5653.   A. 4. 2 OzGIS Standard Format                             
  5654.           ---------------------
  5655.  
  5656. Attribute files contain the attribute value of each zone or line or site        
  5657. for a number of attributes.  The names must correspond to those defined in      
  5658. a geographic file.                                                              
  5659.                                                                                 
  5660. The attribute description is used by OzGIS as a heading in a map                
  5661. displaying the attribute.  The units description is used by OzGIS as a          
  5662. heading to the class values in the map legend.                                  
  5663.                                                                                 
  5664. For efficient use of the system and to facilitate disc file management,         
  5665. files should contain as many attributes as possible (to avoid having            
  5666. separate files for each attribute).                                             
  5667.                                                                                 
  5668. Attribute files will usually be prepared by special programs which extract      
  5669. data from a data-base and convert attribute values into the OzGIS               
  5670. format.                                                                         
  5671.                                                                                 
  5672.      Comment Record:                                                            
  5673.      80       byte      comment describing the data                             
  5674.                                                                                 
  5675.      Header Record:                                                             
  5676.      10       integer   number of attributes                                    
  5677.      10       integer   number of names                                         
  5678.      10       real      value used to indicate missing data                     
  5679.                                                                                 
  5680.      Name Records:                                                              
  5681.      8 x 10   byte      names, sorted into ascending order                      
  5682.                                                                                 
  5683. Sets of records follow to define the attributes:-                               
  5684.                                                                                 
  5685.      Definition Record:                                                         
  5686.      30       byte      attribute description                                   
  5687.      10       byte      units description                                       
  5688.                                                                                 
  5689.      Values Records:                                                            
  5690.      8 x 10   real      attribute values for zones, lines or sites in name      
  5691.                         order                                                   
  5692.  
  5693.                                                                      110
  5694.                                                                                 
  5695.  
  5696.   A. 4. 3 Sample attribute file DEMOATTR.DAT                
  5697.           ----------------------------------
  5698.  
  5699. DEMOATTR.DAT   - ATTRIBUTES FOR SIMPLE 3 ZONE TEST MAP                          
  5700.          5         6     -9.9                                                   
  5701. ABCDEFGHIJZONE 1    ZONE 2    ZONE 3    ZONE 4    ZONE Z                        
  5702. FIRST STATISTIC               FIRST UNITS                                       
  5703.        1.0       2.0       3.0       4.0       5.0       6.0                    
  5704. SECOND STAT                   SECOND UNITS                                      
  5705.      100.0     200.0      -9.9     400.0     500.0     600.0                    
  5706. THIRD STAT                    3RD UNITS                                         
  5707.        0.1       0.9       0.3       0.7       0.1       0.8                    
  5708. FOURTH STATS                  4TH UNIT                                          
  5709.        1.0       2.0       3.0       3.0       2.5       1.5                    
  5710. FIFTH STAT                    5TH UNIT                                          
  5711.        9.0       6.0       3.0       2.0       6.0       8.0                    
  5712.  
  5713.   A. 4. 4 Simple Attribute format (tabular database format) 
  5714.           -------------------------------------------------
  5715.  
  5716.                                                                                 
  5717. Many data retrieval systems (e.g. ORACLE,SAS) produce attribute data in a form  
  5718. where for each attribute the names and their values are given.                  
  5719.                                                                                 
  5720. This tabular format is supported in OzGIS although there are some restrictions  
  5721. on its use.  The list of names is obtained from the first attribute; hence      
  5722. no new names can occur in following attributes (although names may be           
  5723. missing).  A set of data records for an attribute is assumed to finish (and     
  5724. the next set start) when the attribute description & units changes.             
  5725.                                                                                 
  5726.      Comment record:                                                            
  5727.      80      byte       Comment describing the data                             
  5728.                                                                                 
  5729.      Data records:                                                              
  5730.      10      byte       name                                                    
  5731.      10      real       value                                                   
  5732.      30      byte       attribute description                                   
  5733.      10      byte       attribute units                                         
  5734.                                                                                 
  5735.  
  5736.   A. 4. 5 Sample simple attribute file DEMOSASA.DAT         
  5737.           -----------------------------------------
  5738.  
  5739. SIMPLE FORMAT ATTRIBUTE FILE - DEMOSASA.DAT                                     
  5740. TOP            1.0   DESCRIPTION A                 UNITS A                      
  5741. SQUARE         2.0   DESCRIPTION A                 UNITS A                      
  5742. DIAMOND        3.0   DESCRIPTION A                 UNITS A                      
  5743. TRIANGLE       4.0   DESCRIPTION A                 UNITS A                      
  5744. TOP            1.0   DESCRIPTION B                 UNITS B                      
  5745. DIAMOND        3.0   DESCRIPTION B                 UNITS B                      
  5746. SQUARE         2.0   DESCRIPTION B                 UNITS B                      
  5747. TRIANGLE       4.0   DESCRIPTION B                 UNITS B                      
  5748. TOP            1.0   DESCRIPTION C                 UNITS C                      
  5749. SQUARE         2.0   DESCRIPTION C                 UNITS C                      
  5750. DIAMOND        3.0   DESCRIPTION C                 UNITS C                      
  5751. TRIANGLE       4.0   DESCRIPTION C                 UNITS C                      
  5752.  
  5753.                                                                      111
  5754. TOP            1.0   DESCRIPTION D                 UNITS D                      
  5755. TRIANGLE       4.0   DESCRIPTION D                 UNITS D                      
  5756. DIAMOND        3.0   DESCRIPTION D                 UNITS D                      
  5757. DIAMOND        3.0   DESCRIPTION E                 UNITS E                      
  5758. TRIANGLE       4.0   DESCRIPTION E                 UNITS E                      
  5759.                                                                                 
  5760.  
  5761.   A. 4. 6 Spreadsheet WK1 format (Lotus, Excel etc)         
  5762.           -----------------------------------------
  5763.  
  5764.                                                                                 
  5765. The WK1 file format is used to import/export data between OzGIS and spreadsheet 
  5766. and database systems.                                                           
  5767.                                                                                 
  5768. Refer to the chapter on the WK1 interface to systems.                           
  5769.                                                                                 
  5770. Data from spreadsheets can be input in Lotus 1-2-3 format (WK1).                
  5771.                                                                                 
  5772. The spreadsheet must be set up in a fixed format:                               
  5773.                                                                                 
  5774. The data values are in a matrix with the values for the zones (or sites or      
  5775. lines) in columns and the different attributes across in the rows.              
  5776. Values can be missing and can be integer or floating point.                     
  5777.                                                                                 
  5778. The first column must contain labels which are the 10 character zone (site etc) 
  5779. names, beginning at row 3. These must be SORTED in ascending order.             
  5780.                                                                                 
  5781. The top row contains labels that are the (up to) 30 character attribute         
  5782. descriptions starting at column 2.                                              
  5783.                                                                                 
  5784. The second row is the 10 character attribute descriptions.                      
  5785. This is recommended but does not have to be present as some systems (e.g. MS    
  5786. ACCESS) do not allow units to be defined.                                       
  5787.                                                                                 
  5788. e.g. the file DEMO123.dat can be read into the spreadsheet. It should look      
  5789. like:                                                                           
  5790.                                                                                 
  5791.                  POPULATION GROWTH   SALES                                      
  5792.                  NUMBER              $                                          
  5793. ABBOTSFORD                 7418      237                                        
  5794. BURWOOD E                  9925      955                                        
  5795. CONCORD                    8984      202                                        
  5796. CROYDON N                  9369      298                                        
  5797. CROYDON W                   735                                                 
  5798. FIVE DOCK                  9903      716                                        
  5799. HABERFIELD                           727                                        
  5800. HOMEBUSH                   6631      704                                        
  5801. HUDSONPARK                 4668       71                                        
  5802. MORTLAKE                   1725      198                                        
  5803. STRATHFIELD                6285      663                                        
  5804. YARALLA                    9875      516                                        
  5805.                                                                                 
  5806. For example, with Microsoft Excel for Windows, the test file can be read by     
  5807. choosing the option "Open" from the "File" menu and giving the test file as     
  5808. \OZDEMO\DEMO123.DAT. A spreadsheet in the above format can be output by         
  5809. selecting the "Save As" option from the "Files" menu and using the WK1 format   
  5810. option.                                                                         
  5811.                                                                                 
  5812.  
  5813.                                                                      112
  5814.  
  5815.   A. 4. 7 ATLAS Data files                                  
  5816.           ----------------
  5817.  
  5818. Attribute data files for the Atlas mapping system come as pairs of files, a     
  5819. format file and a data file.                                                    
  5820.                                                                                 
  5821. The first record of the format file is a map name, which is ignored.            
  5822. There follows a a set of records, each of which gives the name of an            
  5823. attribute. For example, the following file specifies two attributes:            
  5824.                                                                                 
  5825. "      Bundesland$"                                                             
  5826. "Population 1984        Totale Population in Tausend"                           
  5827. "Ausdehnung in qkm      Ausdehnung in Quadratkilometer"                         
  5828.                                                                                 
  5829.                                                                                 
  5830. The data files have one record for each map item. Each record starts with the   
  5831. item name, and is followed by the values. The values are in the same order as   
  5832. the attribute names and there is one per attribute (2 here). Values can be in   
  5833. integer, decimal point or exponential formats. A value of 1.0E36 is missing     
  5834. data. For example:                                                              
  5835.                                                                                 
  5836. "SCHLES.-HOLSTEIN", 2615 , 157.21                                               
  5837. "HAMBURG", 1.23E21 , 1.0E36                                                     
  5838. "BREMEN", 671 , 404                                                             
  5839. "NIEDERSACHSEN", 7230 , 47.447                                                  
  5840. "NORDR.-WESTFALEN", 16.777 , 34061                                              
  5841. "HESSEN", 5548 , 21114                                                          
  5842. "RHEINLAND-PFALZ", 3627 , 198.48                                                
  5843. "SAARLAND", 1052 , 25.71                                                        
  5844. "B.-WUERTTEMBERG", 9240 , 35751                                                 
  5845. "BAYERN", 10964 , 70552                                                         
  5846. "BERLIN", 1850 , 480                                                            
  5847.                                                                                 
  5848. Names and attribute descriptions must be delimited by apostrophes as shown,     
  5849. and values must be comma delimited. Only the first 10 characters of a zone etc  
  5850. name is used and only the first 30 characters of a description.                 
  5851.                                                                                 
  5852. Two data files have to be specified. The first is the format file,              
  5853. the second the Atlas data file. The format file is handled as a parameter file  
  5854. within the entry process so can be present on disk as a file named with         
  5855. extension .PRM. In practise your two files will probably have the Atlas standard
  5856. file names with extensions FMT and DAT and you give the full file names when    
  5857. asked for them.                                                                 
  5858.                                                                                 
  5859. For example, you might have a pair of files named EUROPE.FMT and EUROPE.DAT     
  5860. so you give the parameter file as EUROPE.FMT and the data file as either EUROPE 
  5861. or EUROPE.DAT (as DAT is the default extension).                                
  5862.  
  5863.   A. 4. 8 LAMM format                                       
  5864.           -----------
  5865.  
  5866. The LAMM package was developed at the CSIRO Division of Building Research. The  
  5867. format is supported as it is the only suitable format for mapping available in  
  5868. the Australian Bureau of Statistics GEOSTATS system.                            
  5869.                                                                                 
  5870. The first record gives the number of map items and the number of attributes     
  5871.  
  5872.                                                                      113
  5873. respectively.                                                                   
  5874.                                                                                 
  5875. The attribute names follow, one per record                                      
  5876.                                                                                 
  5877. Finally the value records are given, being the name followed by the values.     
  5878. The records are sorted into ascending name order. Values are separated by       
  5879. blanks or commas.                                                               
  5880.                                                                                 
  5881. An example file is DEMOLAMM:                                                    
  5882.                                                                                 
  5883. 12,8                                                                            
  5884. MALES 35 - 44 (81)                                                              
  5885. MALES 35 - 44 (86)                                                              
  5886. MALES - UNEMPLOYED (76)                                                         
  5887. MALES - UNEMPLOYED (81)                                                         
  5888. MALES - UNEMPLOYED (86)                                                         
  5889. INCOME MALES $18001-$26000 (76)                                                 
  5890. INCOME MALES $18001-$26000 (81)                                                 
  5891. INCOME MALES $18001-$26000 (86)                                                 
  5892. 'ABBOTSFORD'   69 0 14 27 48 0 51 55                                            
  5893. 'BURWOOD E'    223 0 48 134 89 0 218 397                                        
  5894. 'CONCORD'      102 0 5 12 29 0 109 197                                          
  5895. 'CROYDON N'    161 0 27 50 53 0 156 284                                         
  5896. 'CROYDON W'    180 0 24 36 76 0 307 241                                         
  5897. 'FIVE DOCK'    50 0 20 2 0 0 19 11                                              
  5898. 'HABERFIELD'   126 0 28 20 20 0 208 185                                         
  5899. 'HOMEBUSH'     114 0 26 51 37 0 165 212                                         
  5900. 'HUDSONPARK'   243 0 65 99 65 0 231 385                                         
  5901. 'MORTLAKE'     0 0 0 0 2 0 0 113                                                
  5902. 'STRATHFIELD'  100 0 4 7 10 0 74 70                                             
  5903. 'YARALLA'      7 0 16 2 0 0 4 3                                                 
  5904.                                                                                 
  5905.  
  5906.   A. 4. 9 Comma delimited format                            
  5907.           ----------------------
  5908.  
  5909. The comma delimited format consists of a set of records:                        
  5910.                                                                                 
  5911. Each record has a series of values separated by commas.                         
  5912.                                                                                 
  5913. The first record gives the "column" names. The first is the map item names, and 
  5914. the others are the attribute descriptions.                                      
  5915.                                                                                 
  5916. The following records are the data:                                             
  5917.                                                                                 
  5918. The first value is the item (zone,line or site) name and there follows one      
  5919. number for each attribute.                                                      
  5920.                                                                                 
  5921.                                                                                 
  5922. The file DEMOCOMD.DAT looks like:                                               
  5923.                                                                                 
  5924. "ZONE","DOGS","CATS","BIRDS","RATS","FISH","HENS","SNAKES","COWS"               
  5925. "Australia",1,0,0,0,36,40,0,400.123                                             
  5926. "Europe",123.45,0,4,3,47,70,3,0                                                 
  5927.                                                                                 
  5928.  
  5929.                                                                      114
  5930.  
  5931.   A. 4.10 Australian 1991 Census format                     
  5932.           -----------------------------
  5933.  
  5934.                                                                                 
  5935. The Community profile floppy disk software from the ABS generates comma         
  5936. delimited files that are the same as the above comma delimted format except     
  5937. for an extra (second) column that gives a description for the Census regions.   
  5938.                                                                                 
  5939. The software drops the extra column.                                            
  5940.                                                                                 
  5941.  
  5942.   A. 4.11 Other attribute data formats                      
  5943.           ----------------------------
  5944.  
  5945. Other formats will be supported as required.                                    
  5946.                                                                                 
  5947. We will support any formats for major data suppliers, but you must send sample  
  5948. data and documentation.                                                         
  5949.                                                                                 
  5950. We will also attempt to support file formats from other packages.               
  5951.  
  5952.                                                                      115
  5953.  
  5954.   A. 5 Text Attribute files                              
  5955.       --------------------
  5956.  
  5957. Text attribute files allow miscellaneous information to be attached to map      
  5958. items and accessed during map interrogation                                     
  5959.                                                                                 
  5960. The file format is:                                                             
  5961.                                                                                 
  5962. The first record is an 80 character comment                                     
  5963.                                                                                 
  5964. Sets of records follow for each map item:                                       
  5965.    The item name (1-10 characters) preceded by $                                
  5966.    Any number of lines of text (up to 80 characters long)                       
  5967.                                                                                 
  5968. The $ indicates the start of a new item                                         
  5969.                                                                                 
  5970. An example file is DEMOTEXT.DAT                                                 
  5971.                                                                                 
  5972. A file could look like:                                                         
  5973.                                                                                 
  5974. SALES TERRITORY DEFINITIONS                                                     
  5975. $Terr 1                                                                         
  5976. North West NSW                                                                  
  5977. Fred Smith                                                                      
  5978. 1991 Target $200,000                                                            
  5979. $Terr 2                                                                         
  5980. Central Queensland                                                              
  5981. Salley Jones                                                                    
  5982. 1991 Target $320,000                                                            
  5983. $Terr 3                                                                         
  5984. Tasmania                                                                        
  5985. The Big Bopper                                                                  
  5986. 1991 Target $10,000                                                             
  5987.  
  5988.                                                                      116
  5989.  
  5990.   A. 6 Standard OzGIS formats for geographic files       
  5991.       -------------------------------------------
  5992.  
  5993.  
  5994.   A. 6. 1 General Information                               
  5995.           -------------------
  5996.  
  5997. The standard data format reflects the internal topological file structure.      
  5998.                                                                                 
  5999. In practice, a complete data file is seldom available. It is more common to     
  6000. bring in just points (as a map and points partition) or lines (as a map and     
  6001. segments partition). Zones are usually formed from the segments by using the    
  6002. zone/polygon building process.                                                  
  6003.                                                                                 
  6004. Coordinates are usually given either in degrees (for lat,long) or in metres /   
  6005. feet for UTM.                                                                   
  6006.  
  6007.   A. 6. 2 Structure of data                                 
  6008.           -----------------
  6009.  
  6010. Geographic files contain several partitions.  The first must be the map         
  6011. partition, and can be followed by at most one of each of zones, polygons,       
  6012. lines, segments and points partitions.                                          
  6013.                                                                                 
  6014. Each partition is preceded by a type record, which is one of MAP, ZONES,        
  6015. POLYGONS, LINES or POINTS; for example, a zones file must  have the             
  6016. following structure:                                                            
  6017.                                                                                 
  6018.      Comment record                                                             
  6019.      MAP                                                                        
  6020.      map records                                                                
  6021.      POLYGONS                                                                   
  6022.      polygon records                                                            
  6023.      ZONES                                                                      
  6024.      zone records                                                               
  6025.      SEGMENTS                                                                   
  6026.      segment records                                                            
  6027.                                                                                 
  6028. Different partitions are present (the MAP partition is always first)            
  6029.  according to the type of data:-                                                
  6030.                                                                                 
  6031. Files which describe zones have a ZONES partition to define                     
  6032. the zones, a POLYGONS partion to give the polygons that                         
  6033. bound each zone (including lakes and islands), and a SEGMENTS partition         
  6034. to define the coordinate points that draw the segments along the                
  6035. polygon boundaries.                                                             
  6036.                                                                                 
  6037. Sites files have a POINTS partition to give the site names                      
  6038. and locations.                                                                  
  6039.                                                                                 
  6040. Lines files have a LINES partition to define the line names                     
  6041. and a SEGMENTS partion to define the coordinate points in the                   
  6042. segments that make up the lines.                                                
  6043.                                                                                 
  6044. Line overlays are defined by SEGMENTS partitions.                               
  6045.                                                                                 
  6046.  
  6047.                                                                      117
  6048. Marker and name overlays are defined by POINTS partitions.                      
  6049.                                                                                 
  6050. Coordinate data should be entered in standard units.  Coordinate pairs are      
  6051. always in the order (X,Y) (e.g. (Longitude, Latitude)).  Note that latitude     
  6052. must be entered as a negative number in the Southern Hemisphere.                
  6053.                                                                                 
  6054. Data entered in latitude-longitude projection can be converted to other         
  6055. projections.                                                                    
  6056. Feature codes may be included to give a classification of geographic items.     
  6057. e.g. segments may be classified as different types of roads.                    
  6058.                                                                                 
  6059. All geographic regions (windows) are given in actual coordinate values in       
  6060. the order:  X-minimum, X-maximum, Y-minimum, Y-maximum.                         
  6061.  
  6062.   A. 6. 3 Internal Data                                     
  6063.           -------------
  6064.  
  6065. The geographic data are held internally as a word-addressable                   
  6066. random access disk file.                                                        
  6067. The file structure reflects the data structure with the necessary               
  6068. indexing etc for processing.                                                    
  6069. Additional data are also generated for efficient processing:-                   
  6070.                                                                                 
  6071. Polygons are held in display order so the map zones can be                      
  6072. rapidly displayed.                                                              
  6073.                                                                                 
  6074.  A POINTS partition is generated internally by OzGIS                            
  6075. for the centroids of the zone polygons.                                         
  6076. This enables markers or zone names to be overlayed over                         
  6077. a zones map, and for the points to be displayed as sites                        
  6078. where the site names are the zone names.                                        
  6079.                                                                                 
  6080. Lists of names are also generated for zones, lines or sites                     
  6081. for rapid retrieval.                                                            
  6082.  
  6083.   A. 6. 4 Comment Record                                    
  6084.           --------------
  6085.  
  6086.      80      byte       comment describing the data                             
  6087.                                                                                 
  6088.  
  6089.   A. 6. 5 Map Partition                                     
  6090.           -------------
  6091.  
  6092. This partition contains general information about the file (map) and must       
  6093. be the first partition.                                                         
  6094.                                                                                 
  6095.      Type Record:                                                               
  6096.      3        byte      partition header = MAP                                  
  6097.                                                                                 
  6098.      Window Record:                                                             
  6099.      4 x 10  real       the region covered by the file                          
  6100.                                                                                 
  6101.      Projection Record: (now redundant)                                         
  6102.      10 integer         Map projection code                                     
  6103.                         0=none, 1=lat-long degrees                              
  6104.      10       integer   type of zones (optional)                                
  6105.      10       integer   tolerance for joining line segments endpoints into      
  6106.  
  6107.                                                                      118
  6108.                         polygons. Values range 0-3, usually zero                
  6109.                         Used when endpoints calculated by spatial operations    
  6110.                         e.g. polygon intersection, when arithmetic roundoff     
  6111.                         can cause joining to fail                               
  6112.                                                                                 
  6113.  
  6114.   A. 6. 6 Zones Partition                                   
  6115.           ---------------
  6116.  
  6117. This partition defines the zones in the geographic region.                      
  6118.                                                                                 
  6119. Each zone is defined by one or more polygons.  A zone may consist of a          
  6120. polygon, several separated polygons, polygons with interior polygons of         
  6121. other zones, etc.                                                               
  6122.                                                                                 
  6123. If a zones partition is present, a polygons partition with the referenced       
  6124. must be given.                                                                  
  6125.                                                                                 
  6126. The partition may be used as a polygon underlay and feature codes may be used   
  6127. to give a classification e.g. the polygons may be different soil types.         
  6128.                                                                                 
  6129.      Type Record:                                                               
  6130.      5        byte      partition header = ZONES                                
  6131.                                                                                 
  6132.      Definition Record:                                                         
  6133.      10       integer   number of zones                                         
  6134.      10       integer   number of feature codes                                 
  6135.                                                                                 
  6136.      Feature code Records (if required):                                        
  6137.      8 x 10  integer    feature codes                                           
  6138.                                                                                 
  6139.      Zone Records:                                                              
  6140.      10       byte      zone name, usually left justified, blank filled         
  6141.      10       integer   number of polygons in the zone                          
  6142.                                                                                 
  6143.      Polygon Records:                                                           
  6144.      8 x 10  integer    identifying numbers of the polygons                     
  6145.  
  6146.   A. 6. 7 Line Partition                                    
  6147.           --------------
  6148.  
  6149. The partition defines networks of lines (e.g. roads, rivers).  Each network     
  6150. has a name and is specified in terms of line segments.The name can be used      
  6151. to apply quantised attribute data.                                              
  6152.                                                                                 
  6153. Type record:                                                                    
  6154.      5       byte       partition Leader = LINES                                
  6155.                                                                                 
  6156. Header record:                                                                  
  6157.      10      integer    number of lines                                         
  6158.                                                                                 
  6159.                                                                                 
  6160. Line record:                                                                    
  6161.      10      byte       line name, usually left justified, blank                
  6162.                         filled                                                  
  6163.      10      integer    number of segments forming the line                     
  6164.                                                                                 
  6165.                                                                                 
  6166.  
  6167.                                                                      119
  6168. Region Record:                                                                  
  6169.      4x10    real       line limits (window)                                    
  6170.                         X minimum, X-maximum, Y-minimum, Y-maximum)             
  6171.                                                                                 
  6172. Segments Records:                                                               
  6173.      8x10    integer    the identifying numbers of the line segments.           
  6174.  
  6175.   A. 6. 8 Polygons Partition                                
  6176.           ------------------
  6177.  
  6178. A polygon defines an enclosed geographic area.  Each polygon is specified       
  6179. in terms of the line segments which constitute its boundary.  If a zones        
  6180. partition is given, every polygon referenced by the zones must be defined.      
  6181.                                                                                 
  6182. The centroid or internal point of a polygon is be used by OzGIS to              
  6183. locate text (zone names) or graphic symbols;                                    
  6184. a points partition is generated.                                                
  6185.                                                                                 
  6186. Type Record:                                                                    
  6187.      8        byte      partition header = POLYGONS                             
  6188.                                                                                 
  6189.      Header Record:                                                             
  6190.      10       integer   number of polygons                                      
  6191.                                                                                 
  6192. A set of records follow for each polygon:-                                      
  6193.                                                                                 
  6194.      Definition Record:                                                         
  6195.      10       integer   polygon identification number                           
  6196.      10       byte      name of zone enclosed by polygon                        
  6197.      10       integer   number of lines forming the polygon boundary            
  6198.      10       integer   level of polygon for display using                      
  6199.                         polygon fill 0=standard, 1=lakes, 2=islands in          
  6200.                         lakes etc. (range 0-5)                                  
  6201.                                                                                 
  6202.      Region Record:                                                             
  6203.      4 x 10   real      polygon limits (window)                                 
  6204.                         (X-minimum, X-maximum, Y-minimum, Y-maximum)            
  6205.                                                                                 
  6206.      2 x 10   real      centroid or labelling point (X,Y) in the polygon        
  6207.                         (set to centre of window if not given)                  
  6208.      10       real      area of polygon                                         
  6209.                         (calculated if not given)                               
  6210.                                                                                 
  6211.      Segments Records:                                                          
  6212.      8 x 10   integer   the identifying numbers of the segments + ve if         
  6213.                         segment is clockwise, -ve if anticlockwise.             
  6214.  
  6215.   A. 6. 9 Segments Partition                                
  6216.           ------------------
  6217.  
  6218. Line segments are defined by a set of points connected by straight lines.       
  6219.                                                                                 
  6220. Segments may define the boundaries of zones, define line                        
  6221. networks, or line overlays.                                                     
  6222.                                                                                 
  6223. When a segment is a boundary segment of a polygon, it can be the boundary       
  6224. of at most two polygons.                                                        
  6225.   In other words, the polygons must be a unique tessellation of the geographic r
  6226.  
  6227.                                                                      120
  6228.                                                                                 
  6229. When the segments define polygon boundaries, the partition should contain       
  6230. only the segments of the polygons, and the records must contain the names       
  6231. of the zones on each side.  Left and right zones are defined by the             
  6232. direction implied by the sequence of points in the line.  The zone names        
  6233. must correspond to those defined in the zones partition.  The special zone      
  6234. name OUTSIDE (left aligned)                                                     
  6235. should be used when the line is at the edge of the map, or on                   
  6236. the boundary of void areas.                                                     
  6237.                                                                                 
  6238. Line segments (of polygons)                                                     
  6239.  must be closed (i.e., the last point in a segment must be the                  
  6240. first point of another segment), and segments must not cross or have loops.     
  6241. Further, segment must not be repeated.                                          
  6242.                                                                                 
  6243. Segments that are to be used as geographic overlays may have feature codes to   
  6244. give a classification e.g. different types of rivers.                           
  6245.                                                                                 
  6246. Address information can be present. This consists of the name of the street     
  6247. followed by 0, 1 or 2 sets of entries for street number ranges and postal codes.
  6248. These zip codes are optional as are the number ranges. If 2 ranges are given    
  6249. one is odd and the other even numbers. The start and end values are given       
  6250. according to the direction of the numbers and the digitising direction.         
  6251.                                                                                 
  6252.      Type Record:                                                               
  6253.      8        byte      partition header = SEGMENTS                             
  6254.                                                                                 
  6255.      Header Record:                                                             
  6256.      10       integer   number of segments                                      
  6257.                                                                                 
  6258. A set of records follows for each segment.                                      
  6259.                                                                                 
  6260.      Definition Record:                                                         
  6261.      10       integer   identifying number                                      
  6262.      10       byte      name of left zone (if line is part of a zone            
  6263.                         boundary)                                               
  6264.      10       byte      name of right zone (if line is part of a zone           
  6265.                         boundary)                                               
  6266.      10       integer   number of points in segment                             
  6267.      10       integer   number of feature codes                                 
  6268.      10       byte      non blank indicates that address info follows           
  6269.      10       byte      name of line network, default set to ldent number       
  6270.                         this is also the name for interrogation                 
  6271.                                                                                 
  6272.      Feature code Records (if required):                                        
  6273.      8 x 10  integer    feature codes                                           
  6274.                                                                                 
  6275.      Address Records (if required):                                             
  6276.      10       byte      name of street, park etc                                
  6277.      6 x 10  integer    start number, end number, postal (ZIP) code, followed   
  6278.                         by optional second set                                  
  6279.                                                                                 
  6280.      Point Records:                                                             
  6281.      8 x 10   real      (X,Y) coordinate pairs (4 per record)                   
  6282.  
  6283.                                                                      121
  6284.  
  6285.   A. 6.10 Points Partitions                                 
  6286.           -----------------
  6287.  
  6288. The partition contains a set of points or sites at which symbols can be         
  6289. overlayed on the map.  The site name can be used to apply quantised             
  6290. attribute data or used to annotate the points.                                  
  6291.                                                                                 
  6292. Feature codes can define a classification for display as sites.                 
  6293.                                                                                 
  6294. Type Record:                                                                    
  6295.      6        byte      partition header = POINTS                               
  6296.                                                                                 
  6297.      Header Record:                                                             
  6298.      10       integer   number of points                                        
  6299.                                                                                 
  6300.      Point Records:                                                             
  6301.      10       real      X-coordinate value                                      
  6302.      10       real      Y-coordinate value                                      
  6303.      40       byte      site name or annotation                                 
  6304.      10       integer   number of feature codes                                 
  6305.                                                                                 
  6306.      Feature code Records (if required):                                        
  6307.      8 x 10  integer    feature codes                                           
  6308.                                                                                 
  6309. Note that only the first 10 characters are used for the site name.              
  6310.  
  6311.   A. 6.11 Sample boundaries geographic file DEMOZSEG.DAT    
  6312.           ----------------------------------------------
  6313.  
  6314. Geographic data for zones (e.g. Census districts) are usually brought in as the 
  6315. line segments that form the boundaries of the zones.                            
  6316.                                                                                 
  6317. The boundary segments contain the (X,Y) vertices that make up the line and the  
  6318. names of the zones on each side of the line.                                    
  6319.                                                                                 
  6320.                                                                                 
  6321. These data are usually entered via the IMPORT DATA FILES option in the top menu,
  6322. then excessive vertices discarded (thinned) using PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY, and 
  6323. then the full zone / polygon/ line segment / centroids structure built using    
  6324. BUILD TOPOLOGY FROM LINES SEGMENTS to prepare for display.                      
  6325.                                                                                 
  6326. For example, to extract ZIP code boundaries from USA TIGER files, the left and  
  6327. right ZIP codes are extracted from the records and formed into left aligned     
  6328. zone names, and the latitude / longitude vertices are also extracted. If the    
  6329. left and right zone names are the same the segments are internal to the zone    
  6330. and can be ignored.                                                             
  6331.                                                                                 
  6332. The following illustrates the standard format used to enter such data. Note     
  6333. that the MAP partition is required but that the extent need not be given.       
  6334.                                                                                 
  6335. EXAMPLE ZONE BOUNDARY SEGMENTS THAT CAN BE BUILT INTO ZONES - DEMOZSEG.DAT      
  6336. MAP                                                                             
  6337.   0.0       0.0       0.0       0.0                                             
  6338.          0                                                                      
  6339. SEGMENTS                                                                        
  6340.         10                                                                      
  6341.  
  6342.                                                                      122
  6343.        107ZONE 1    OUTSIDE            2                                        
  6344. 102.00    503.00    114.00    503.00                                            
  6345.        125ZONE 2    ZONE 1             2                                        
  6346. 102.00    503.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6347.        143ZONE 1    ZONE 3             2                                        
  6348. 114.00    503.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6349.        161ZONE 3    OUTSIDE            6                                        
  6350. 114.00    503.00    115.00    505.00    116.00    507.00    117.00    509.00    
  6351. 118.00    511.00    119.00    513.00                                            
  6352.        187ZONE 2    ZONE 3             2                                        
  6353. 110.00    513.00    119.00    513.00                                            
  6354.        205ZONE 2    OUTSIDE            4                                        
  6355. 119.00    513.00    114.00    518.00    109.00    517.00    104.00    516.00    
  6356.        227ZONE 2    OUTSIDE            2                                        
  6357. 104.00    516.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6358.        245SURPLUS   SURPLUS            2                                        
  6359. 119.00    513.00    122.00    506.00                                            
  6360.        263OUTSIDE   ZONE 2             2                                        
  6361. 103.00    509.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6362.        281OUTSIDE   ZONE 2             2                                        
  6363. 102.00    503.00    103.00    509.00                                            
  6364.  
  6365.   A. 6.12 Sample segments file with adddresses DEMOADDR.DAT 
  6366.           -------------------------------------------------
  6367.  
  6368. Address information can be added to line segments. Note the non-blank flag.     
  6369.                                                                                 
  6370. EXAMPLE  SEGMENTS (ROADS) WITH ADDRESSES - DEMOADDR.DAT                         
  6371. MAP                                                                             
  6372.   0.0       0.0       0.0       0.0                                             
  6373.          0                                                                      
  6374. SEGMENTS                                                                        
  6375.         10                                                                      
  6376.        107ZONE 1    OUTSIDE            2            ADDRESS                     
  6377. Great North Road                                                                
  6378.          1       666      2600                                                  
  6379. 102.00    503.00    114.00    503.00                                            
  6380.        12            ZONE 1             2          ADDRHERE                     
  6381. Molonglo Gorge                                                                  
  6382.                                                                                 
  6383. 102.00    503.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6384.        143ZONE 1    ZONE 3             2            address                     
  6385. Burra Street                                                                    
  6386.          1        99         6        140                                       
  6387. 114.00    503.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6388.        161                             6            address                     
  6389. Northbourne Ave                                                                 
  6390.          1        55      2602        20         66      2600                   
  6391. 114.00    503.00    115.00    505.00    116.00    507.00    117.00    509.00    
  6392. 118.00    511.00    119.00    513.00                                            
  6393.        187ZONE 2    ZONE 3             2                                        
  6394. 110.00    513.00    119.00    513.00                                            
  6395.        205                             4            address                     
  6396. Yass rd                                                                         
  6397.          1        99      2600                                                  
  6398. 119.00    513.00    114.00    518.00    109.00    517.00    104.00    516.00    
  6399.        227ZONE 2    OUTSIDE            2                                        
  6400. EPPING HWY                                                                      
  6401.  
  6402.                                                                      123
  6403.         44        22                  77         11                             
  6404. 104.00    516.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6405.        245SURPLUS   SURPLUS            2            address                     
  6406. Hume Highway                                                                    
  6407.          1        99      2301        88         44      2304                   
  6408. 119.00    513.00    122.00    506.00                                            
  6409.        263OUTSIDE   ZONE 2             2            address                     
  6410. Mains Avenue                                                                    
  6411.          1        99      2600         6        140      2600                   
  6412. 103.00    509.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6413.        281OUTSIDE   ZONE 2             2            address                     
  6414. Lover's Lane                                                                    
  6415.         33        11                                                            
  6416. 102.00    503.00    103.00    509.00                                            
  6417.                                                                                 
  6418. 66 >> <SS>Sample geographic file DEMOZONES.DAT                                  
  6419. The full topological geographic structure can be entered (although in practise  
  6420. this is seldom available).                                                      
  6421.                                                                                 
  6422. COMMENT LINE FOR TEST DATA     - DEMOZONE.DAT                                   
  6423. MAP                                                                             
  6424. 102.00    122.00    502.00    518.00                                            
  6425.          0                                                                      
  6426. ZONES                                                                           
  6427.          3                                                                      
  6428. ZONE 1             1                                                            
  6429.        352                                                                      
  6430. ZONE 2             2                                                            
  6431.        377       402                                                            
  6432. ZONE 3             1                                                            
  6433.        327                                                                      
  6434. POLYGONS                                                                        
  6435.          4                                                                      
  6436.        327ZONE 3             3         0                                        
  6437. 110.00    119.00    503.00    513.00    114.00    510.00                        
  6438.        187      -161       143                                                  
  6439.        352ZONE 1             3         0                                        
  6440. 102.00    114.00    503.00    513.00    108.00    506.00                        
  6441.       -125       107       143                                                  
  6442.        377ZONE 2             3         0                                        
  6443. 102.00    110.00    503.00    513.00    104.00    508.00                        
  6444.       -263      -281       125                                                  
  6445.        402ZONE 2             3         0                                        
  6446. 104.00    119.00    513.00    518.00    110.00    515.00                        
  6447.        205       227       187                                                  
  6448. SEGMENTS                                                                        
  6449.         10                                                                      
  6450.        107ZONE 1    OUTSIDE            2                                        
  6451. 102.00    503.00    114.00    503.00                                            
  6452.        125ZONE 2    ZONE 1             2                                        
  6453. 102.00    503.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6454.        143ZONE 1    ZONE 3             2                                        
  6455. 114.00    503.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6456.        161ZONE 3    OUTSIDE            6                                        
  6457. 114.00    503.00    115.00    505.00    116.00    507.00    117.00    509.00    
  6458. 118.00    511.00    119.00    513.00                                            
  6459.        187ZONE 2    ZONE 3             2                                        
  6460. 110.00    513.00    119.00    513.00                                            
  6461.  
  6462.                                                                      124
  6463.        205ZONE 2    OUTSIDE            4                                        
  6464. 119.00    513.00    114.00    518.00    109.00    517.00    104.00    516.00    
  6465.        227ZONE 2    OUTSIDE            2                                        
  6466. 104.00    516.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6467.        245SURPLUS   SURPLUS            2                                        
  6468. 119.00    513.00    122.00    506.00                                            
  6469.        263OUTSIDE   ZONE 2             2                                        
  6470. 103.00    509.00    110.00    513.00                                            
  6471.        281OUTSIDE   ZONE 2             2                                        
  6472. 102.00    503.00    103.00    509.00                                            
  6473.                                                                                 
  6474.  
  6475.   A. 6.13 Sample lines geographic file DEMOLINES.DAT        
  6476.           ------------------------------------------
  6477.  
  6478. A lines structure is used for line data that is to be displayed for attribute   
  6479. data. Each line can be made up of several segments:                             
  6480.                                                                                 
  6481. SAMPLE LINE NETWORK DATA       DEMOLINES.DAT                                    
  6482. MAP                                                                             
  6483. 103.50    121.50    503.50    517.50                                            
  6484.          0                                                                      
  6485. LINES                                                                           
  6486.          4                                                                      
  6487. ROAD 3             3                                                            
  6488. 110.50    119.50    503.50    513.50                                            
  6489.        187       161       143                                                  
  6490. ROAD 1             2                                                            
  6491. 103.50    114.50    503.50    513.50                                            
  6492.        125       107                                                            
  6493. ROAD 2             2                                                            
  6494. 103.50    110.50    503.50    513.50                                            
  6495.        263       281                                                            
  6496. ROAD 4             2                                                            
  6497. 104.50    119.50    513.50    517.50                                            
  6498.        205       227                                                            
  6499. SEGMENTS                                                                        
  6500.          9                                                                      
  6501.        107                             2         0          ROAD 1              
  6502. 103.50    503.50    114.50    503.50                                            
  6503.        125                             2         0          ROAD 1              
  6504. 103.50    503.50    110.50    513.50                                            
  6505.        143                             2         0          ROAD 3              
  6506. 114.50    503.50    110.50    513.50                                            
  6507.        161                             6         0          ROAD 3              
  6508. 114.50    503.50    115.50    505.50    116.50    507.50    117.50    509.50    
  6509. 118.50    511.50    119.50    513.50                                            
  6510.        187                             2         0          ROAD 3              
  6511. 110.50    513.50    119.50    513.50                                            
  6512.        205                             4         0          ROAD 4              
  6513. 119.50    513.50    114.50    517.50    109.50    517.50    104.50    516.50    
  6514.        227                             2         0          ROAD 4              
  6515. 104.50    516.50    110.50    513.50                                            
  6516.        263                             2         0          ROAD 2              
  6517. 103.50    509.50    110.50    513.50                                            
  6518.        281                             2         0          ROAD 2              
  6519. 103.50    503.50    103.50    509.50                                            
  6520.  
  6521.                                                                      125
  6522.  
  6523.   A. 6.14 Sample points geographic file DEMOPOINT.DAT       
  6524.           -------------------------------------------
  6525.  
  6526. Points files just give the (X,Y) locations and a site name / label.             
  6527.                                                                                 
  6528. These files can be used with an attribute file for mapping site data or can be  
  6529. used to place sysmols or labels at locations (overlays).                        
  6530.                                                                                 
  6531. COMMENT LINE FOR TEST DATA     - DEMOPOINT.DAT                                  
  6532. MAP                                                                             
  6533. 102.00    122.00    502.00    518.00                                            
  6534.          0                                                                      
  6535. POINTS                                                                          
  6536.          3                                                                      
  6537. 114.0     503.0     PNT1                                                        
  6538. 104.0     516.0     PNT2                                                        
  6539. 114.0     518.0     PNT3                                                        
  6540.                                                                                 
  6541.  
  6542.                                                                      126
  6543.  
  6544.   A. 7 Format of polygon geographic files                
  6545.       ----------------------------------
  6546.  
  6547.  
  6548.   A. 7. 1 Standard (not implemented)                        
  6549.           --------------------------
  6550.  
  6551. Geographic data are often available in polygon format, and this data            
  6552. definition enables it to be used used with OzGIS.                               
  6553.                                                                                 
  6554. The common line segments on the boundaries of adjacement polygons are           
  6555. effectively defined twice in polygon data; OzGIS assumes that they are          
  6556. exactly the same.  The polygon boundary must not cross itself.                  
  6557.                                                                                 
  6558. Each polygon has a name, which is the name of the zone to which it belongs.     
  6559.                                                                                 
  6560. Polygons may occur inside other polygons.  Where the polygon is not part of     
  6561. a zone (e.g. a lake) it may be given the name OUTSIDE.  The level field         
  6562. defines lakes, islands within lakes etc.  When maps are generated on            
  6563. devices using polygon fill the level gives the order of display so the          
  6564. polygons will overwrite correctly.                                              
  6565.                                                                                 
  6566.                                                                                 
  6567. Comment record:                                                                 
  6568.                                                                                 
  6569.      80      byte       comment describing the data                             
  6570.                                                                                 
  6571. Definition Record:                                                              
  6572.      10      integer    map projection code                                     
  6573.      10      integer    zone type (optional)                                    
  6574.                                                                                 
  6575. Each polygon is defined by a set of records:                                    
  6576.                                                                                 
  6577. Polygon header:                                                                 
  6578.      10      byte       zone name, usually left justified, blank filled         
  6579.                         or OUTSIDE if an internal polygon.                      
  6580.      10      integer    number of points in the line                            
  6581.      10      real       level of polygon for hardcopy generation using          
  6582.                         polygon fill 0=standard, 1=lakes, etc.                  
  6583.                                                                                 
  6584. Centroid record:                                                                
  6585.      2x10    real       centroid or labelling point (X,Y) in polygon            
  6586.                                                                                 
  6587. Point records:                                                                  
  6588.      8x10    real       (X,Y) coordinate pairs (4 per record) The last          
  6589.                         point must be the same as the first.                    
  6590.                                                                                 
  6591.  
  6592.   A. 7. 2 SAS Format Zone Files                             
  6593.           ---------------------
  6594.  
  6595. The SAS system provides a crude polygon format for map data. The old format has 
  6596. been updated to allow for multiple polygons in zones and for data at several    
  6597. levels of resolution.                                                           
  6598.                                                                                 
  6599. The polygons must be given in the correct order for display when there are      
  6600.  
  6601.                                                                      127
  6602. polygons within other polygons.                                                 
  6603.                                                                                 
  6604. The data consists of variable length records with the following fields:         
  6605.                                                                                 
  6606. field1: the zone name                                                           
  6607. field2: the polygon number within the zone (usually 1)                          
  6608. field3: the X value                                                             
  6609. field4: the Y value                                                             
  6610.                                                                                 
  6611. For example, part of a file might be as follows, where zone 19 has 2 polygons   
  6612.                                                                                 
  6613.   17   1 135.0198593289   -45.006152242                                         
  6614.   17   1 135.0214474499   -45.008039698                                         
  6615.   17   1 135.0234586746   -45.011447966                                         
  6616.   17   1 135.0232417881   -45.011781529                                         
  6617.   17   1 135.0146185011   -45.012796119                                         
  6618.   17   1 135.0149845481   -45.012392245                                         
  6619.   17   1 135.0148004219   -45.011233956                                         
  6620.   17   1 135.0155192316   -45.009236805                                         
  6621.   17   1 135.0140719935   -45.006661419                                         
  6622.   19   1 135.0200279355   -45.018230647                                         
  6623.   19   1 135.0211774409   -45.018684313                                         
  6624.   19   1 135.0218305141   -45.017554402                                         
  6625.   19   1 135.023555249    -45.017326832                                         
  6626.   19   1 135.024860993    -45.014845043                                         
  6627.   19   1 135.0251943022   -45.014588848                                         
  6628.   19   1 135.0192894787   -45.023670658                                         
  6629.   19   1 135.0179009587   -45.022158593                                         
  6630.   19   1 135.0182676911   -45.021624267                                         
  6631.   19   1 135.0180351585   -45.020997345                                         
  6632.   19   1 135.0192095339   -45.020121485                                         
  6633.   19   1 135.0194375813   -45.01857923                                          
  6634.   19   2 135.0279172212   -45.023049563                                         
  6635.   19   2 135.0281361789   -45.022784472                                         
  6636.   19   2 135.0283748209   -45.0230802                                           
  6637.   19   2 135.0285159498   -45.022607252                                         
  6638.   19   2 135.0283438861   -45.023600549                                         
  6639.   21   1 135.041364044   -45.0087376237                                         
  6640.   21   1 135.039871216   -45.0095451251                                         
  6641.   21   1 135.039485425   -45.0093839765                                         
  6642.   21   1 135.037185282   -45.0106722265                                         
  6643.             .                                                                   
  6644.             .                                                                   
  6645.             .                                                                   
  6646.             .                                                                   
  6647.             .                                                                   
  6648.  
  6649.   A. 7. 3 Simple Format (old SAS) Zone Files                
  6650.           ----------------------------------
  6651.  
  6652. Simple format files are in common use by the SAS system and other packages      
  6653. providing SAS interfaces.  Polygon for lakes etc. should follow standard        
  6654. polygons to provide the correct display order for overwriting.                  
  6655.                                                                                 
  6656. This format has now been updated in the SAS system.                             
  6657.                                                                                 
  6658.                                                                                 
  6659. Each data record has the form                                                   
  6660.  
  6661.                                                                      128
  6662.      10      byte       zone name                                               
  6663.      10      real       X coordinate                                            
  6664.      10      real       Y coordinate                                            
  6665.      10      integer    Polygon number within zone                              
  6666.  
  6667.   A. 7. 4 Sample simple zones data file DEMOSASG.DAT        
  6668.           ------------------------------------------
  6669.  
  6670. SQUARE        3.0       5.0                                                     
  6671. SQUARE        7.0       5.0                                                     
  6672. SQUARE        7.0       10.0                                                    
  6673. SQUARE        3.0       10.0                                                    
  6674. DIAMOND       8.0       8.0                                                     
  6675. DIAMOND       10.0      5.0                                                     
  6676. DIAMOND       12.0      8.0                                                     
  6677. DIAMOND       10.0      11.0                                                    
  6678. TRIANGLE      13.0      5.0                                                     
  6679. TRIANGLE      16.0      10.0                                                    
  6680. TRIANGLE      19.0      5.0                                                     
  6681. TRIANGLE      13.0      2.0            2                                        
  6682. TRIANGLE      15.0      2.0            2                                        
  6683. TRIANGLE      14.0      4.0            2                                        
  6684. SQUARE        4.0       0.0            2                                        
  6685. SQUARE        8.0       0.0            2                                        
  6686. SQUARE        8.0       4.0            2                                        
  6687. SQUARE        4.0       4.0            2                                        
  6688. SQUARE        0.0       0.0            2                                        
  6689. SQUARE        5.0       1.0            2                                        
  6690. SQUARE        5.0       3.0            2                                        
  6691. SQUARE        7.0       3.0            2                                        
  6692. SQUARE        7.0       1.0            2                                        
  6693. OUTSIDE       15.0      6.0            2                                        
  6694. OUTSIDE       15.0      7.0            2                                        
  6695. OUTSIDE       17.0      7.0            2                                        
  6696. OUTSIDE       17.0      6.0            2                                        
  6697. TOP           4.0       8.0                                                     
  6698. TOP           19.0      8.0                                                     
  6699. TOP           19.0      9.0                                                     
  6700. TOP           4.0       9.0                                                     
  6701.  
  6702.                                                                      129
  6703.  
  6704.   A. 8 GIS / common geographic file formats              
  6705.       ------------------------------------
  6706.  
  6707.  
  6708.   A. 8. 1 DIME format                                       
  6709.           -----------
  6710.  
  6711. This format is supported, but has not had much use. The data are primarily 2    
  6712. point segments, so is inefficient on storage.                                   
  6713.                                                                                 
  6714. Note that only 499 2 point segments can be handled.                             
  6715.                                                                                 
  6716. The data are usually passed through BUILD ZONES?POLYGONS to build polygons and  
  6717. then through PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY to join up the segments into ones of      
  6718. decent length.                                                                  
  6719.                                                                                 
  6720. The data are long Ascii records, and look something like:                       
  6721.                                                                                 
  6722. XX91609160012583                       1                                        
  6723.   MANUEL              ST                       8    8      201   299   200      
  6724.    29891600000011 14502 1450219711197119160       38  440195019510003016     234
  6725.   10003016     213   1818                        396750 757476396740            
  6726. 7574760610215040685606098370406849                                              
  6727.   MANUEL              ST                       8    8      301   359   300      
  6728.   35891600000029 14502 1450219711197119160       44  480195019510003016     233 
  6729.   10003016     212   1818                        396740 757476396730            
  6730. 7574760609837040684906095020406848                                              
  6731.   MANUEL              ST                       8    8      361   399   360      
  6732.   39891600000037 14502 1450219711197119160       48  540195019510003016     233 
  6733.   10003016     233   1818                        396730 757476396718            
  6734. 7574760609502040684806090470406846                                              
  6735.   SCHOOL              ST                       9    9      900   998   901      
  6736.    99991600000045 162   162  19720197209160       37  220200020010003031     107
  6737.   10003031     108   1818                        396611 755737396619            
  6738. 7557430605026045580006053140455632                                              
  6739.   SCHOOL              ST                       9    9     1000  1098  1001      
  6740.   109991600000052 162   162  19720197209160       22  140200020010003031     115
  6741.   10003031     115   1818                        396619 755743396624            
  6742. 7557460605314045563206054910455542                                              
  6743.  
  6744.   A. 8. 2 DLG optional 3 format                             
  6745.           ---------------------
  6746.  
  6747. The DLG-3 format is the major interchange format in use, and data can be        
  6748. obtained from many mapping agencies e.g. from USGS.                             
  6749.                                                                                 
  6750. The data differs in concept from the usual data displayed by OzGIS in that it   
  6751. is preclassified by the assignment of numeric "feature codes".                  
  6752.                                                                                 
  6753. All identifiers are numbers. These are converted to names by left aligning      
  6754. them in the 10 character name fields.                                           
  6755.                                                                                 
  6756. The data entry process processed the lines only. Any line with one vertice or   
  6757. two vertices and the same node numbers is taken as a point.                     
  6758.                                                                                 
  6759. Other lines are output with the left and right names set to the area names.     
  6760.  
  6761.                                                                      130
  6762. Left and right area numbers of zero or one are taken to be outside the map.     
  6763.                                                                                 
  6764. Feature codes are stored as numbers (combined input pairs) for lines, points    
  6765. and zones e.g. '291  22' becomes 2910022.                                       
  6766.                                                                                 
  6767. The first area is ignored as it should be the boundary of the map.              
  6768.                                                                                 
  6769. Polygons are generated by passing the geographic file through the zone building 
  6770. process.  This carries the area feature codes through to the polygons, retains  
  6771. the line segments, and forms a points segment that contains the centroids of    
  6772. the polygons.                                                                   
  6773.                                                                                 
  6774. Note that file should have 80 character fixed length records. In practise files 
  6775. often have no end-of-records (e.g. USGS CD-ROM files) or records may be         
  6776. truncated. Records with end-of-line markers must no be more than 80             
  6777. characters long.                                                                
  6778.                                                                                 
  6779. Zero length records are not allowed.                                            
  6780.                                                                                 
  6781. You will find that DLG-3 files off ARC-INFO systems often have extraneous       
  6782. background polygons that "zap" the map when displayed.                          
  6783.                                                                                 
  6784. Some test files are supplied for Hawaii.  These were read off the USGS GeoDATA  
  6785. CD ROM on a SUN system, and 'newline' characters inserted to form 80 character  
  6786. records.  The files had to be edited as an arbitrary polygon was given as       
  6787. outside the map as the left and right areas on the line (this could also be     
  6788. handled during display by specifying feature codes).                            
  6789.                                                                                 
  6790. The test files are:                                                             
  6791.                                                                                 
  6792. HAWDLGWB - water boundaries i.e. the islands                                    
  6793. HAWDLGWB - administrative boundaries                                            
  6794. HAWDLGRD - roads                                                                
  6795. HAWDLGST - streams                                                              
  6796.                                                                                 
  6797. The data format is described in the US Geological Survey Circular 895-c         
  6798. "USGS Digital Cartographic Data Standards, Digital Line Graphs"                 
  6799.                                                                                 
  6800. The files look like:                                                            
  6801.                                                                                 
  6802. USGS-NMD  DLG DATA - CHARACTER FORMAT - 09-29-82 VERSION s21_wb.dlg             
  6803. HAWAIIAN ISLANDS POLY 10 DROPPED        1967, 1980  2000000.                    
  6804. this record not used, cant be zero length                                       
  6805.      3     3  9999     2 0.50800000000D+02     4     0     4     1              
  6806.    0.637820640000000D+07   0.676865799729109D-02   0.800000000000000D+07        
  6807.    0.180000000000000D+08  -0.157000000000000D+09   0.300000000000000D+07        
  6808.    0.0                     0.0                     0.0                          
  6809.    0.0                     0.0                     0.0                          
  6810.    0.0                     0.0                     0.0                          
  6811.  0.10000000000D+01 0.0               0.0               0.0                      
  6812. SW       19.000000 -160.000000        -316386.41  1771715.66                    
  6813. NW       22.000000 -160.000000        -312489.03  2102112.53                    
  6814. NE       22.000000 -155.000000         208312.61  2101093.98                    
  6815. SE       19.000000 -155.000000         210917.63  1770684.40                    
  6816. WATER BODIES           0    74    74 010    12    12 010    70    70   1        
  6817. N    1  -316386.41  1771715.66           0           0     0                    
  6818. N    2  -312489.03  2102112.53           0           0     0                    
  6819. N    3   208312.61  2101093.98           0           0     0                    
  6820.  
  6821.                                                                      131
  6822. N    4   210917.63  1770684.40           0           0     0                    
  6823. .                                                                               
  6824. .                                                                               
  6825. .                                                                               
  6826. .                                                                               
  6827. N   74  -320966.08  2105481.92           2           0     0                    
  6828.    -69    70                                                                    
  6829. A    1   -68438.87  1949336.24           3     0     1     0     0              
  6830.      8     9     7                                                              
  6831.      0     0                                                                    
  6832. A    2  -327997.34  2094827.63           3     0     1     0     0              
  6833.    -10    -2    -1                                                              
  6834.     40   150                                                                    
  6835. .                                                                               
  6836. .                                                                               
  6837. .                                                                               
  6838. .                                                                               
  6839. A   13   -91708.84  2025480.45           3     0     1     0     0              
  6840.    -66   -65   -67                                                              
  6841.     40   150                                                                    
  6842. L    1     7     6     2     0                24     1     0                    
  6843.   -332906.23  2078428.77  -332805.62  2077920.57  -331991.53  2078579.38        
  6844.   -332446.45  2079748.67  -331479.96  2080407.19  -331224.96  2080914.69        
  6845.   -331578.38  2082032.98  -331221.19  2082845.09  -330100.11  2084620.90        
  6846.   -329235.22  2085279.61  -328573.03  2086192.72  -328571.24  2087107.12        
  6847.   -327247.56  2088577.74  -325977.26  2088727.66  -325164.16  2088878.47        
  6848.   -324909.37  2089284.37  -324503.57  2088978.78  -323182.17  2089280.99        
  6849.   -322319.07  2089025.30  -321707.68  2089938.51  -321250.68  2089836.02        
  6850.   -320995.88  2090241.92  -319775.79  2090696.74  -318961.20  2091609.55        
  6851.    290  4000                                                                    
  6852. .                                                                               
  6853. .                                                                               
  6854. .                                                                               
  6855. .                                                                               
  6856. L   70    74    66    11     0                 2     1     0                    
  6857.   -320966.08  2105481.92  -321422.78  2105736.82                                
  6858.    290  4002                                                                    
  6859.  
  6860.   A. 8. 3 Gina format                                       
  6861.           -----------
  6862.  
  6863. The standard interchange format for GeoVision GIS is Gina.                      
  6864.                                                                                 
  6865. Only some of the data file is processed. Feature codes must be numeric. Zone    
  6866. names generated are of the form ZONE12345 and site names are of the form        
  6867. POINT12345.                                                                     
  6868.                                                                                 
  6869. Only boundary lines and points are output - you have to generate                
  6870. the zones / polygons afterwards.                                                
  6871.                                                                                 
  6872. The sample file DEMOGINA.DAT is as follows:                                     
  6873.                                                                                 
  6874. udb-start b v 8192                                                              
  6875.                                                                                 
  6876. udb-header 0.5 fred-db "Fred's test database"                                   
  6877. descr      29oct85 14:32:10 example GINA files                                  
  6878. coord-sys  rect  feet                                                           
  6879. extent -12000, -8000,  12000, 8000                                              
  6880.  
  6881.                                                                      132
  6882. layer 1 base        "base information layer"                                    
  6883. layer 2 roads       "roads and streets layer"                                   
  6884. layer 3 hydro       "hydrographic layer (rivers, streams etc)"                  
  6885. layer 4 telephone   "telephone plant layer"                                     
  6886. layer 5 lots        "property lots layer"                                       
  6887.                                                                                 
  6888. network 1 emergency l 2 "emergency routes"                                      
  6889. network 2 property  p 5 "property polygon network"                              
  6890.                                                                                 
  6891. udb-primary                                                                     
  6892. table road free                                                                 
  6893. field name        char 40   i n   "road name"                                   
  6894. field r_type      char 12   i n   "type of road, arterial, highway etc"         
  6895. field lanes       num  2,0        "maximum number of lanes"                     
  6896. field surface     char 10   n     "type of surface"                             
  6897. fc   1000, 1099                                                                 
  6898. table house free                                                                
  6899. field h_type      char 10   n     "house type: bungalow;""test quotes""  etc"   
  6900. field lot_no      num 10    i     "lot number"                                  
  6901. fc   1130,  1139                                                                
  6902. table lots free                                                                 
  6903. field lot_no      num  10   i u n "lot number"                                  
  6904. field address_no  num  6,0  i n                                                 
  6905. field street      char 40   n     "street name"                                 
  6906. fc   1100                                                                       
  6907.                                                                                 
  6908.                                                                                 
  6909. udb-feature                                                                     
  6910. feat 1  1002 2 0 l xy 0 0 0 1 0                                                 
  6911. coor 1805 1120 1805 1143                                                        
  6912. coor 2018 1143 2018 1204 2508 1204                                              
  6913. text "Elm Street"                                                               
  6914. attr Elm suburban 2 "asphalt"                                                   
  6915. feat 2  1004 2 0 l xy 0 0 0 1 0                                                 
  6916. coor 2508 1204 2508 820                                                         
  6917. text "Oak Street"                                                               
  6918. attr Oak arterial 4 "concrete"                                                  
  6919. feat 3  1400 5 2 l xy                                                           
  6920. coor 2508 903 2508 933                                                          
  6921. feat 4  1400 5 2 l xy                                                           
  6922. coor 2508 933 2568 933                                                          
  6923. feat 5  1400 5 2 l xy                                                           
  6924. coor 2568 933 2568 903                                                          
  6925. feat 6  1400 5 2 l xy                                                           
  6926. coor 2508 903 2568 903                                                          
  6927. feat 7  1400 5 2 l xy                                                           
  6928. coor 2508 873 2508 903                                                          
  6929. feat 8  1400 5 2 l xy                                                           
  6930. coor 2568 903 2568 873                                                          
  6931. feat 9  1400 5 2 l xy                                                           
  6932. coor 2508 873 2568 873                                                          
  6933. feat 20  1100 5 2 p xy                                                          
  6934. coor 2520 920                                                                   
  6935. attr  10875,  104 Oak                                                           
  6936. feat 21  1133 5 0 l xy                                                          
  6937. coor 2530  920                                                                  
  6938. attr 2-story  10875                                                             
  6939. feat 22  1100 5 2 p xy                                                          
  6940.  
  6941.                                                                      133
  6942. coor 2520  890                                                                  
  6943. attr 10874,  106 Oak                                                            
  6944. feat 23  1133 5 0 l xy                                                          
  6945. coor  2530 890                                                                  
  6946. attr bungalow 10874                                                             
  6947.                                                                                 
  6948. udb-polygon                                                                     
  6949. poly 3 20 r e                                                                   
  6950. poly 4 20 r e                                                                   
  6951. poly 6 20 l e                                                                   
  6952. poly 5 20 r e                                                                   
  6953. poly 6 22 r e                                                                   
  6954. poly 8 22 r e                                                                   
  6955. poly 9 22 l e                                                                   
  6956. poly 7 22 r e                                                                   
  6957.                                                                                 
  6958. udb-indirect                                                                    
  6959. table road_types free                                                           
  6960. field r_type    char 12 i u n  "road type"                                      
  6961. field maint     char 2         "maintenance class"                              
  6962. field resp_code char 3  n      "responsibility code"                            
  6963. attr highway    m3  A-4                                                         
  6964. attr aterial    m6  B-3                                                         
  6965. attr secondary  n2  B-1                                                         
  6966. attr suburban   s4  B-8                                                         
  6967.                                                                                 
  6968.                                                                                 
  6969. udb-indirect                                                                    
  6970. table house_types  free                                                         
  6971. field h_type    char 10  i u n "house  types"                                   
  6972. field tax_code  char 4   n     "taxation code"                                  
  6973. attr bungalow  10-5                                                             
  6974. attr 2-story   12-2                                                             
  6975. attr split     11-5                                                             
  6976.                                                                                 
  6977. udb-end                                                                         
  6978.  
  6979.   A. 8. 4 ANSII standard                                    
  6980.           --------------
  6981.  
  6982. The new standard format for interchange will be supported when test data become 
  6983. available.                                                                      
  6984.  
  6985.   A. 8. 5 SIF format (not available)                        
  6986.           --------------------------
  6987.  
  6988. SIF format will be supported if there is a demand.                              
  6989. Data files appear to be 80 character ascii files.                               
  6990.                                                                                 
  6991. The files contain a series of commands that define how the coordinates are to be
  6992. displayed.                                                                      
  6993.                                                                                 
  6994. Most of the commands are ignored.                                               
  6995.                                                                                 
  6996. The commands of value seem to be:                                               
  6997.                                                                                 
  6998. DID/ is the first record in the file, and gives some basic information. The     
  6999. parameter MO=2 or MO=3 gives the number of dimensions (compulsory?). Any Z value
  7000.  
  7001.                                                                      134
  7002. is ignored.                                                                     
  7003.                                                                                 
  7004. OVR/   defines the active level. This is stored in the relations as a number    
  7005. column 'ovr' as it seems to  be  effectively a layer.                           
  7006.                                                                                 
  7007. ASC/ggnum defines the graphic group number, and is used to  form the entid of   
  7008. form SIFggnum.                                                                  
  7009.                                                                                 
  7010. If ggnum is 0 the item is ignored (not appended).                               
  7011.                                                                                 
  7012. If ggnum is <0 a number is assigned to it (sequentially starting at 10001).     
  7013.                                                                                 
  7014. LST/xx, defines a line. There are 2-101 vertices in a record. If a record has   
  7015. 101 values and the next record starts with the same point as the end point it is
  7016. taken to be a continuation. (actually found some records with more than 101)    
  7017.                                                                                 
  7018. LST/ and LST/OP are line strings.                                               
  7019.                                                                                 
  7020. LST/HO and LST/SO are polygons (solid & holes)                                  
  7021.                                                                                 
  7022. Vertices are (x,y) or (x,y,z) according to the DID/ header.                     
  7023.                                                                                 
  7024. New records that are not continuations are taken to be new components.          
  7025.                                                                                 
  7026.                                                                                 
  7027.  
  7028.   A. 8. 6 DXF format                                        
  7029.           ----------
  7030.  
  7031. Digitised map data can be entered into OzGIS in the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange 
  7032. and File format as lines, points and polygons.                                  
  7033.                                                                                 
  7034. The format is described in the AutoCAD manuals.                                 
  7035.                                                                                 
  7036. If the data are to be used for choropleth mapping (with attribute data) the     
  7037. entities must have been digitised  with handles to give the entities names. The 
  7038. hexadecimal handle values will become the zone (or point) names that will also  
  7039. have to be used in the attribute files. You can rename the  entities with a     
  7040. combine file by using the data reparation process, but the the easiest method   
  7041. is to edit the names with a word-processor. The names are treated as text. The  
  7042. handles are given in type 5 groups.                                             
  7043.                                                                                 
  7044. The entities are processed as follows:                                          
  7045.                                                                                 
  7046. LINEs are stored as line segments, and can only be used for line overlays       
  7047. as there is no left & right zone names to enable polygons to be built.          
  7048.                                                                                 
  7049. POINTs are stored as points. Any handle will be used as the name.               
  7050.                                                                                 
  7051. POLYLINE & VERTEXes give a series of points that are either lines for line      
  7052. overlays, or polygons if a bit flag values defines it as closed. If a           
  7053. handle value is given it becomes the name and attribute values can be linked    
  7054. to it (polygons).                                                               
  7055.                                                                                 
  7056. TEXT entities are stored as points with the text group used as the name         
  7057. or for assigning attribute values (first 10 characters).                        
  7058.                                                                                 
  7059.  
  7060.                                                                      135
  7061.  
  7062.   A. 8. 7 IDRISI Vector Format                              
  7063.           --------------------
  7064.  
  7065. Vector overlay files from the IDRISI raster GIS system can be entered.          
  7066.                                                                                 
  7067. The files have a simple format of the form                                      
  7068.                                                                                 
  7069. ident,number vertices                                                           
  7070. X,Y                                                                             
  7071. . .                                                                             
  7072. . .                                                                             
  7073. X,Y                                                                             
  7074.                                                                                 
  7075. Where a 0,0 record indicates end of data                                        
  7076.                                                                                 
  7077. Points, lines or polygons can be entered.                                       
  7078.                                                                                 
  7079. Only records with one vertice will be processed for points, with more than one  
  7080. vertice for lines, and more than two vertices for polygons.                     
  7081.                                                                                 
  7082. Three sample files are supplied for deaths during the 1854 London Cholera       
  7083. outbreak. These are STREET.VEC, DEATH.VEC and PUMP.VEC. See the associated      
  7084. *.DVC decumentation files for details.                                          
  7085.                                                                                 
  7086. From NCGIA, Santa Barbara. Digitized in 1992 by Rusty Dodson from the map       
  7087. included in the book by John Snow:  "Snow on Cholera...", London:  Oxford       
  7088. University Press, 1936.                                                         
  7089.                                                                                 
  7090. A trivial two line file could be:                                               
  7091.                                                                                 
  7092. 1 2                                                                             
  7093. 16.7380009 18.6959991                                                           
  7094. 17.6599998 18.7119999                                                           
  7095. 36 3                                                                            
  7096. 11.3450403 4.9679508                                                            
  7097. 11.0809002 4.4880772                                                            
  7098. 11.6251144 3.5709989                                                            
  7099. 0 0                                                                             
  7100.  
  7101.   A. 8. 8 ATLAS Export Format                               
  7102.           -------------------
  7103.  
  7104. Digitised boundary data can often be purchased in a format supported by the     
  7105. Atlas PC mapping system.                                                        
  7106.                                                                                 
  7107. The files are Ascii, and records are of the form:                               
  7108.                                                                                 
  7109. "name",n,x1,y1,...........Xn,Yn                                                 
  7110.                                                                                 
  7111. where                                                                           
  7112.                                                                                 
  7113. n=1 => a point                                                                  
  7114. n=2 => a circle                                                                 
  7115. n>2 => a polygon                                                                
  7116. n<0 => a line                                                                   
  7117.                                                                                 
  7118.  
  7119.                                                                      136
  7120. These data can be entered via the OzGIS system with some restrictions:          
  7121.                                                                                 
  7122. . circles are not supported                                                     
  7123.                                                                                 
  7124. . only the first 10 characters of the name can be used to assign attribute      
  7125.   values.                                                                       
  7126.                                                                                 
  7127. . there cannot be more than one spatial object in a record                      
  7128.                                                                                 
  7129. . The name of a polygon that is internal e.g. a lake, should be "OUTSIDE".      
  7130.                                                                                 
  7131.                                                                                 
  7132. An example file for africa AFRICA.DAT may be included with your system.         
  7133.                                                                                 
  7134. Example file records from the africa files are:                                 
  7135.                                                                                 
  7136. "Morocco",141                                                                   
  7137. 13.92683,60.72203                                                               
  7138. 13.92685,60.67901                                                               
  7139. 13.99129,60.48547                                                               
  7140. 14.1201,60.33495                                                                
  7141. 14.24891,60.18444                       A POLYGON                               
  7142. 14.3777,60.07695                                                                
  7143. 14.48501,60.05548                                                               
  7144. 14.61376,60.07703                                                               
  7145. 14.72104,60.09858                                                               
  7146. 14.80687,60.14163                                                               
  7147.     .                                                                           
  7148.     .                                                                           
  7149. "Tunisia",113                          A ZONE with 2 polygons                   
  7150. 24.03397,61.15581                                                               
  7151.    .          .    polygon 1                                                    
  7152.    .          .                                                                 
  7153. 24.03397,61.15581                                                               
  7154. 25.49409,58.66141                                                               
  7155.    .          .    polygon 2                                                    
  7156.    .          .                                                                 
  7157. 25.49409,58.66141                                                               
  7158. 24.03397,61.15581   < - first point repeated after every polygon                
  7159.                                                                                 
  7160.                                                                                 
  7161.     .                                                                           
  7162.     .                                                                           
  7163. "Mbabane",1                                                                     
  7164. 41.41317,7.313157                                                               
  7165. "Maseru",1                                                                      
  7166. 38.45704,4.957369                       POINTS                                  
  7167. "Pretoria",1                                                                    
  7168. 39.15494,8.036585                                                               
  7169.     .                                                                           
  7170.     .                                                                           
  7171.     .                                                                           
  7172. "euro3",-41                                                                     
  7173. 33.15051,61.9                                                                   
  7174. 33.10709,61.72918                                                               
  7175. 33.14988,61.68601                       A LINE                                  
  7176. 33.21407,61.62125                                                               
  7177. 33.34267,61.55629                                                               
  7178.  
  7179.                                                                      137
  7180.     .                                                                           
  7181.     .                                                                           
  7182.     .                                                                           
  7183. Atlas seems to handle multiple polygons within a zone by simply putting them    
  7184. all together in the record following the name i.e. if the first vertex is       
  7185. found to be equal to another in the following list, then that is the end of     
  7186. that polygon and the next vertex is the start of the next polygon etc. For      
  7187. some strange reason the first point of the region is repeated after each        
  7188. of the polygons.                                                                
  7189.                                                                                 
  7190. Atlas does not support topologically structured polygons, so ensure that        
  7191. internal polygons are given after the containing polygons so they are not       
  7192. overwritten on the screen. Also, internal polygons that are to have the         
  7193. background colour should have names "OUTSIDE".                                  
  7194.                                                                                 
  7195. Apparently there are two possibilities for regions with multiple polygons:      
  7196.                                                                                 
  7197. The polygons can be kept together, which results in the format which you        
  7198. see in the africa-files (see below). This is the default! The other             
  7199. possibility is to split the the region into separate polygons. This results     
  7200. in an export format where each polygon starts with the boundary name, number    
  7201. of vertices and then the vertices. (The easiest way to do this in ATLAS is      
  7202. to SELECT ALL, and then BOUNDARY, SPLIT, ISLANDS.)                              
  7203.                                                                                 
  7204. The following is supposed to be from the ATLAS EXPORT/IMPORT MANUAL:            
  7205.                                                                                 
  7206. ISLANDS AND LAKES                                                               
  7207.                                                                                 
  7208. The Island/Lake Rule                                                            
  7209. --------------------                                                            
  7210.                                                                                 
  7211. If you return to the firs coordinate pair in the description of a region,       
  7212. you have closed the main polygon. The line to the next coordinate pair          
  7213. will not be drawn, but will instead signal the start of an island or lake.      
  7214. The last coordinate pair in the island or lake must be the same as the first    
  7215. one; this must also be followed by the first coordinate pair of the main        
  7216. polygon - this line again will not be drawn. This rule may be applied as        
  7217. many times in succession as necessary, one time for each island or lake.        
  7218.                                                                                 
  7219. Curves created with Atlas*Draw can also have islands, but ASCII boundary        
  7220. files do not support this.                                                      
  7221.                                                                                 
  7222. General Region Structure With Island/Lake                                       
  7223. ------------------------------------------                                      
  7224.                                                                                 
  7225. The format for a region containing an island and/or lake is:                    
  7226.                                                                                 
  7227. "Pname","Sname",numxy                                                           
  7228. x1,y1                                                                           
  7229. ..                                                                              
  7230. xn,yn                                                                           
  7231. x1,y1                                                                           
  7232. xx1,yy1,                                                                        
  7233. ..                                                                              
  7234. xx1,yy1                                                                         
  7235. x1,y1                                                                           
  7236.                                                                                 
  7237. The second xx1,yy1 pair closes the island or lake and is immediately            
  7238.  
  7239.                                                                      138
  7240. followed by an x1,y1 pair, which closes back to the main polygon.               
  7241. Additional islands or lakes can follow, as long as each closes on itself        
  7242. and then closes back to the main polygon.                                       
  7243.                                                                                 
  7244. The illustrations below show examples of a region with an island, and of a      
  7245. region with a lake containing an embedded region.                               
  7246.                                                                                 
  7247. The region with an island is listed as:                                         
  7248.                                                                                 
  7249. "Region w/Island",11                                                            
  7250. 1,1 first coordinate pair                                                       
  7251. 1,0                                                                             
  7252. 0,0                                                                             
  7253. 0,1                                                                             
  7254. 1,1 end of main polygon                                                         
  7255. 2,1 start of island                                                             
  7256. 3,1                                                                             
  7257. 3,0                                                                             
  7258. 2,0                                                                             
  7259. 2,1 end of island                                                               
  7260. 1,1 end of main polygon                                                         
  7261.                                                                                 
  7262. An entry for a region with a lake containing an embedded region:                
  7263.                                                                                 
  7264. "Region w/lake",11                                                              
  7265. 0,3 first coordinate pair                                                       
  7266. 3,3                                                                             
  7267. 3,0                                                                             
  7268. 0,0                                                                             
  7269. 0,3 end of main polygon                                                         
  7270. 1,2 start of lake                                                               
  7271. 1,1                                                                             
  7272. 2,1                                                                             
  7273. 2,2                                                                             
  7274. 1,2 end of lake                                                                 
  7275. 0,3 end of main polygon                                                         
  7276. "Embedded Region", 5                                                            
  7277. 1,2                                                                             
  7278. 2,2                                                                             
  7279. 2,1                                                                             
  7280. 1,1                                                                             
  7281. 1,2                                                                             
  7282.                                                                                 
  7283. According to the documentation, regions with multiple polygons can name         
  7284. them all with a record of the form e.g. "poly1","poly2","poly3",num             
  7285. The data we have seen does not seem to do this, but just gives one name.        
  7286.                                                                                 
  7287.                                                                                 
  7288.  
  7289.   A. 8. 9 MapInfo Data Interchange Format                   
  7290.           -------------------------------
  7291.  
  7292. Many data suppliers can provide geographic data in a format suitable for use    
  7293. with the MapInfo mapping system.                                                
  7294.                                                                                 
  7295. This format is partially supported, primarily for Census boundaries.            
  7296. The main restriction is that the more contrived spatial types are not supported.
  7297.                                                                                 
  7298.  
  7299.                                                                      139
  7300. The data is supplied usually as two files. The MapInfo Interchange File (MIF)   
  7301. contains the coordinates. The other file, the MID file, contains data, of which 
  7302. the only part of interest is the names of the spatial objects. Hence the MID    
  7303. file has to be given if you want to display attribute data, such as Census      
  7304. data, according to the names. Optionally the MID file need not be given, in     
  7305. which case the lines, points and polygons can only be used as overlays.         
  7306.                                                                                 
  7307.                                                                                 
  7308. The MIF file starts with a header of the form:                                  
  7309.                                                                                 
  7310.              Version 2                                                          
  7311.              Delimiter ","                                                      
  7312.              CoordSys Earth Projection 1, 0                                     
  7313.              Columns 2                                                          
  7314.                Name Char(40)                                                    
  7315.                ID Integer                                                       
  7316.              Data                                                               
  7317.                                                                                 
  7318. The only parts of the header used are:                                          
  7319.                                                                                 
  7320. "Delimiter" defines the seperator used in the MID file, default <tab>           
  7321.                                                                                 
  7322. "Columns" gives the number of values in the MID file for each object            
  7323.                                                                                 
  7324. "Data" indicates the end of the header and start of the coordinates etc         
  7325.                                                                                 
  7326. The data part of the file describes several types of objects. Only real         
  7327. geographic types are processed:                                                 
  7328.                                                                                 
  7329. POINT and CENTER describe points (sites)                                        
  7330. LINE and PLINE describe line segments                                           
  7331. REGION describes zones (polygons)                                               
  7332.                                                                                 
  7333. Entries such as PEN are ignored.                                                
  7334.                                                                                 
  7335. A typical Census boundary file will have region entries with coordinates that   
  7336. will be output as polygons and centre's output as points. The polygons and the  
  7337. points will both have the same names from the MID file, so Census data can be   
  7338. mapped as either zones or sites, and the polygons and points can also be used   
  7339. for overlays e.g. to put names on the polygons.                                 
  7340.                                                                                 
  7341.                                                                                 
  7342. For example, the data part of a MID file could look like:                       
  7343.                                                                                 
  7344. Region 1                                                                        
  7345.   41                                                                            
  7346. 147.30982 -42.851953                                                            
  7347. 147.309298 -42.851559                                                           
  7348. 147.309174 -42.851233                                                           
  7349. 147.309033 -42.851096                                                           
  7350. 147.308207 -42.851211                                                           
  7351.        .       .                                                                
  7352.        .       .                                                                
  7353.        .       .                                                                
  7354.        .       .                                                                
  7355.        .       .                                                                
  7356.        .       .                                                                
  7357. 147.312079 -42.850697                                                           
  7358.  
  7359.                                                                      140
  7360. 147.310575 -42.851964                                                           
  7361. 147.30982 -42.851953                                                            
  7362.     Pen (1,2,12582912)                                                          
  7363.     Brush (2,16777215,16777215)                                                 
  7364.     Center 147.308418 -42.848512                                                
  7365. Region 1                                                                        
  7366.   13                                                                            
  7367. 147.286268 -42.838088                                                           
  7368. 147.282985 -42.841294                                                           
  7369. 147.283788 -42.842113                                                           
  7370. 147.285434 -42.843622                                                           
  7371. 147.286394 -42.844522                                                           
  7372. 147.28709 -42.845175                                                            
  7373. 147.289192 -42.847147                                                           
  7374. 147.290486 -42.84662                                                            
  7375.        .       .                                                                
  7376.        .       .                                                                
  7377.        .       .                                                                
  7378.        .       .                                                                
  7379.                                                                                 
  7380. The MID file provides the names of the objects as "columns". You will have      
  7381. to provide the number of the column that is the names (usually 1)               
  7382.                                                                                 
  7383. If a polygon  is inside another it should have the name "OUTSIDE" so it         
  7384. will be displayed with the background colour.                                   
  7385.                                                                                 
  7386. A MID file with the name in column 1 looks like:                                
  7387.                                                                                 
  7388. Canberra,637                                                                    
  7389. Burra Creek,639                                                                 
  7390. Phred,640                                                                       
  7391. London,641                                                                      
  7392. Wagga Wagga,642                                                                 
  7393. 1230807,644                                                                     
  7394.   .                                                                             
  7395.   .                                                                             
  7396.   .                                                                             
  7397.                                                                                 
  7398.  
  7399.                                                                      141
  7400.  
  7401.   A. 9 Format of names files                             
  7402.       ---------------------
  7403.  
  7404.                                                                                 
  7405. Names files give lists of zones, lines or sites which are to be used to         
  7406. restrict certain kinds of processing in OzGIS.                                  
  7407.                                                                                 
  7408. The file would usually be prepared with a text editor, possibly operating       
  7409. on a file output from OzGIS.                                                    
  7410.                                                                                 
  7411.      Comment Record:                                                            
  7412.      80       byte      comment describing the data                             
  7413.                                                                                 
  7414.      Name Records (one per zone or line or site)                                
  7415.      10       byte      name                                                    
  7416.                                                                                 
  7417.  
  7418.   A. 9. 1 Sample names file DEMOATTR.DAT                    
  7419.           ------------------------------
  7420.  
  7421. DEMONAMES.DAT - NAMES FILE                                                      
  7422. ZONE 1                                                                          
  7423. ZONE 2                                                                          
  7424. ZONE 4                                                                          
  7425.                                                                                 
  7426.  
  7427.   A.10 Format of colour names files (Removed from system)
  7428.       --------------------------------------------------
  7429.  
  7430.                                                                                 
  7431. Colour names files are usually generated within OzGIS, but they may be          
  7432. entered as data files. The file X11-BGR is supplied.                            
  7433.                                                                                 
  7434. Comment record:                                                                 
  7435.      80      byte       comment describing the file                             
  7436.                                                                                 
  7437. Colour records:                                                                 
  7438.      40      byte       colour name (in ascending order)                        
  7439.      10      real       blue value, range 0.0 to 1.0                            
  7440.      10      real       green value, range 0.0. to 1.0                          
  7441.      10      real       red value, range 0.0 to 1.0                             
  7442.                                                                                 
  7443. The demonstration file DEMOCOLNM.DAT looks like:                                
  7444.                                                                                 
  7445. DEMO COLOUR NAMES FILE                                                          
  7446. aquamarine                                   .8314    1.0000     .4980          
  7447. blue                                        1.0000     .0000     .0000          
  7448. brown                                        .1647     .1647     .6471          
  7449. darkseagreen                                 .5608     .7373     .5608          
  7450. hotpink                                      .7059     .4118    1.0000          
  7451. lemonchiffon                                 .8039     .9804    1.0000          
  7452. lightskyblue                                 .9804     .8078     .5294          
  7453. mintcream                                    .9804    1.0000     .9608          
  7454. pink                                         .7961     .7529    1.0000          
  7455. purple                                       .9412     .1255     .6275          
  7456. royalblue                                    .8824     .4118     .2549          
  7457.  
  7458.                                                                      142
  7459. salmon                                       .4471     .5020     .9804          
  7460. steelblue                                    .7059     .5098     .2745          
  7461. turquoise                                    .8157     .8784     .2510          
  7462. yellowgreen                                  .1961     .8039     .6039          
  7463.                                                                                 
  7464.  
  7465.   A.11 Format of combine files                           
  7466.       -----------------------
  7467.  
  7468.                                                                                 
  7469. Combine files define new map zones in terms of zones in a base map, or site     
  7470. catchments in terms of percentages of base zones.                               
  7471.                                                                                 
  7472. Comment record:                                                                 
  7473.      80      byte       comment describing the file                             
  7474.                                                                                 
  7475. Header record:                                                                  
  7476.      10      integer    number of items defined                                 
  7477.                                                                                 
  7478.                                                                                 
  7479. Sets of records follow for the items:                                           
  7480.                                                                                 
  7481. Item definition record:                                                         
  7482.      10      byte       name (ascending order)                                  
  7483.      10      integer    number of zones                                         
  7484.                                                                                 
  7485. Zone records:                                                                   
  7486.      10      byte       zone name (ascending order)                             
  7487.      10      real       proportion of zone in area (0 to 1.0)                   
  7488.                                                                                 
  7489.                                                                                 
  7490.  
  7491.   A.11. 1 Sample combine file DEMOCOMB.DAT                  
  7492.           --------------------------------
  7493.  
  7494. This file defines three territories AREA1, AREA2, AREA3 in terms of base zones  
  7495. A, B, ......                                                                    
  7496.                                                                                 
  7497. 3 AREAS                                                                         
  7498.          3TEST AREAS                                                            
  7499. AREA1              1                                                            
  7500. H             1.0                                                               
  7501. AREA2              3                                                            
  7502. N             1.0                                                               
  7503. O             1.0                                                               
  7504. R             1.0                                                               
  7505. AREA3              5                                                            
  7506. A             1.0                                                               
  7507. B             1.0                                                               
  7508. C             1.0                                                               
  7509. D             1.0                                                               
  7510. E             1.0                                                               
  7511.  
  7512.   A.12 Format of presentation files                      
  7513.       ----------------------------
  7514.  
  7515.                                                                                 
  7516. Presentation files give a set of saved map files that are to be referenced      
  7517.  
  7518.                                                                      143
  7519. by menu items so the maps can be easily displayed when giving demonstrations.   
  7520.                                                                                 
  7521. Presentation files must have names with extension prs e.g. DEMO.PRS             
  7522.                                                                                 
  7523.      First record:                                                              
  7524.                                                                                 
  7525.      60      byte       menu header                                             
  7526.                                                                                 
  7527. A pair of records is given for each saved display file                          
  7528.      60      byte       menu item text                                          
  7529.      50      byte       saved map file in full form                             
  7530.                                                                                 
  7531.  
  7532.   A.12. 1 Sample presentation file                          
  7533.           ------------------------
  7534.  
  7535. AURISA Exhibition                                                               
  7536. Far East Asia zone map                                                          
  7537. DEMOFEA.SAV                                                                     
  7538. Lowe Electorate bivariate zone map                                              
  7539. BIVLOWE.SAV                                                                     
  7540. Diagram map                                                                     
  7541. DIAG1.SAV                                                                       
  7542. Zones & Sites map                                                               
  7543. ZONESITE.SAV                                                                    
  7544. Australia Statistical Division zones map                                        
  7545. DEMOOZ.SAV                                                                      
  7546. Canberra LGAs zone map with overlays                                            
  7547. ACT.SAV                                                                         
  7548.  
  7549.   A.13 Format of marker files                            
  7550.       ----------------------
  7551.  
  7552.                                                                                 
  7553. Markers are displayed in OzGIS as single polygons using polygon fill.           
  7554.                                                                                 
  7555. OzGIS has standard files available (star, triangle etc.) but a you can          
  7556. define your own.                                                                
  7557.                                                                                 
  7558. A marker is a single closed polygon.  OzGIS requires that the points that       
  7559. define the polygon lie within a circle of unit diameter.                        
  7560.                                                                                 
  7561. The data points are usually prepared by drawing the marker on graph paper,      
  7562. centred on the origin, and lying within a circle of radius 0.5.                 
  7563.                                                                                 
  7564.      Comment record:                                                            
  7565.                                                                                 
  7566.      80      byte       marker name, comments                                   
  7567.                                                                                 
  7568.      Header record:                                                             
  7569.                                                                                 
  7570.      10      integer    number of points (3-100)                                
  7571.                                                                                 
  7572.      Boundary record:                                                           
  7573.                                                                                 
  7574.      8x10    real       Polygon points (X,Y) 4 per record                       
  7575.                         Values are in the range (-0.5 to +0.5)  The last        
  7576.                         point must be the same as the first                     
  7577.  
  7578.                                                                      144
  7579.                                                                                 
  7580.  
  7581.   A.13. 1 Sample marker file SQUARE.DAT                     
  7582.           -----------------------------
  7583.  
  7584. SQUARE.DAT - MARKER                                                             
  7585.          5                                                                      
  7586. -0.35     -0.35     -0.35     0.35      0.35      0.35      0.35      -0.35     
  7587. -0.35     -0.35                                                                 
  7588.  
  7589.   A.14 Format of device files                            
  7590.       ----------------------
  7591.  
  7592.                                                                                 
  7593. Device files describe the characteristics of graphics display devices and set   
  7594. colours etc.                                                                    
  7595.                                                                                 
  7596. Standard files are usually held on the system for all devices available. Users  
  7597. would not usually define their own.                                             
  7598.                                                                                 
  7599.  OzGIS was designed to operate as a highly interactive colour mapping system    
  7600. where speed of display was obtained by the use of an  advanced raster display   
  7601. system.                                                                         
  7602.                                                                                 
  7603.  The software can operate on most graphics devices, but there could be loss of  
  7604. speed and capabilities depending on the characteristics of the devices being    
  7605. used.                                                                           
  7606.                                                                                 
  7607.  OzGIS is based on graphics packages with the functionality of the GKS graphic  
  7608. standard. These graphic packages provide graphic primitives such as lines,      
  7609. text, and filled polygons. An important feature of GKS is that it is device     
  7610. independent so the package allows OzGIS to produce maps on a large range of     
  7611. devices.                                                                        
  7612.                                                                                 
  7613.  Every device available for use with OzGIS has at least one file associated with
  7614. it.                                                                             
  7615.                                                                                 
  7616. All devices within OzGIS have the same characteristics so e.g. a map previewed  
  7617. on a display device can be output directly to a hard-copy device. The files     
  7618. ensure that a device with limited capabilities can  simulate the required       
  7619. capabilities in the best way.                                                   
  7620.                                                                                 
  7621.  The device files also set GKS primitive attributes such as colours and zone    
  7622. fill types. A colour display system has several files available that provide    
  7623. standard sets of colours for maps. Files with similar colours are usually       
  7624. available for different devices for hard-copy generation.                       
  7625.                                                                                 
  7626. The easiest way to generate device data files is to edit standard ones.         
  7627.                                                                                 
  7628. The device files require colours to be specified in blue,green,red. One way to  
  7629. decide on these values is to look at the definitions in the colour names data   
  7630. file \ozgis\x11-bgr.dat.                                                        
  7631.                                                                                 
  7632. When outputting to a printer under WINDOWS you will find that you need a device 
  7633. file with a white background. Also, some printer drivers only show text that is 
  7634. black or white.                                                                 
  7635.                                                                                 
  7636. Hardcopy device files are based on the SCIPLOT package which has a fixed set of 
  7637.  
  7638.                                                                      145
  7639. colours. Of course plotter colours depend on the pens. SCIPLOT colours are:     
  7640.      Black                                                                      
  7641.      Blue                                                                       
  7642.      Green                                                                      
  7643.      Cyan                                                                       
  7644.      Red                                                                        
  7645.      Magenta                                                                    
  7646.      Brown                                                                      
  7647.      Light Gray                                                                 
  7648.      Dark Gray                                                                  
  7649.      Light Blue                                                                 
  7650.      Light Green                                                                
  7651.      Light Cyan                                                                 
  7652.      Light Red                                                                  
  7653.      Light Magenta                                                              
  7654.      Yellow                                                                     
  7655.      White                                                                      
  7656.                                                                                 
  7657.                                                                                 
  7658.                                                                                 
  7659.      Comment record:                                                            
  7660.                                                                                 
  7661.      80      byte       Device description                                      
  7662.                                                                                 
  7663.                                                                                 
  7664.      Size record:                                                               
  7665.                                                                                 
  7666.      10      real       Extent of device surface                                
  7667.      Note: defines units used for all sizes in data i.e. divide by this         
  7668.      10      real       width of device in device units (now set from OZGIS.INI)
  7669.      10      real       max address height of device    (now set from OZGIS.INI)
  7670.                                                                                 
  7671.      Type record:                                                               
  7672.                                                                                 
  7673.      10      integer    GKS workstation number                                  
  7674.      10      integer    Display type, 1 = raster display, pixel addressed       
  7675.                                       2 = continuous coordinates                
  7676.      10      integer    Fill type, 1 = solid colour                             
  7677.                                    2 = pattern                                  
  7678.                                    3 = device hatching                          
  7679.                                    4 = OzGIS hatching for OzMAP etc             
  7680.                                    5 = colour simulation for 4 pen plotter      
  7681.      10      integer    Locator device number, 0 = none, 1 = default            
  7682.                                                2 = crosshairs                   
  7683.                                                                                 
  7684.      Advanced Raster Record  (now set fromOZGIS.IN)                             
  7685.                                                                                 
  7686.      10      integer    number of bit planes (1-24)                             
  7687.      10      integer    length of LUT (1-4096)                                  
  7688.      10      integer    number of pixels across screen (256-4096)               
  7689.      10      integer    number of lines on screen (256-4096)                    
  7690.      10      integer    run-length encoding/decoding, 0 = not available         
  7691.                                                                                 
  7692.      Colour definition record:                                                  
  7693.                                                                                 
  7694.      10      integer    number of colours defined                               
  7695.                                                                                 
  7696.      Colour table records:                                                      
  7697.  
  7698.                                                                      146
  7699.                                                                                 
  7700.      10      real       blue value (0.0 - 1.0) for colour table                 
  7701.      10      real       green                                                   
  7702.      10      real       red                                                     
  7703.                                                                                 
  7704.      Hatch definition record:                                                   
  7705.                                                                                 
  7706.      10      integer    number of hatch patterns (0 - 256)                      
  7707.                                                                                 
  7708.      Hatch records (if required):                                               
  7709.                                                                                 
  7710.      10      integer    line number (1 - 8)                                     
  7711.                         (from overlay and quant. lines)                         
  7712.      10      real       line angles (0.0 - 180.0)                               
  7713.      10      real       line separation  (<0.1)                                 
  7714.      10      integer    line number (0 - 4) , 0 = not used                      
  7715.      10      real       second line angle (if reqd)                             
  7716.      10      real       second line separation (if reqd)                        
  7717.                                                                                 
  7718. The rest of the data records set internal tables for GKS primitive              
  7719. attributes.  Most records reference the colour table; the index has range 1     
  7720. to length of table.                                                             
  7721.                                                                                 
  7722.                                                                                 
  7723. A style table is used with the colour table for polygon fill according to       
  7724. the fill type.                                                                  
  7725.                                                                                 
  7726. -  SOLID - the colour is used, style not relevant                               
  7727. -  HATCH - the pen colour is obtained from the colour table, the hatch          
  7728.            pattern number from the style table                                  
  7729. -  PATTERN - the colour table is not used, the style table gives the device     
  7730.              dependent pattern number                                           
  7731.                                                                                 
  7732. Area Fill records:                                                              
  7733.                                                                                 
  7734. 10   integer            colour index                                            
  7735. 10   integer            fill or style index                                     
  7736.                                                                                 
  7737. Several fill records are required, in following order:                          
  7738.                                                                                 
  7739. -  background. NOTE also the menu / messages/ everything colour                 
  7740. -  zone missing data                                                            
  7741. -  excluded zones                                                               
  7742. -  diagram background                                                           
  7743. -  line or site quantisation legend and diagram                                 
  7744. -  8 polygon underlay records                                                   
  7745.                                                                                 
  7746. Text records:                                                                   
  7747.                                                                                 
  7748. 10   integer            colour index                                            
  7749. 10   integer            font number  (1-9)                                      
  7750. 10   integer            text precision 0=STRING, 1=CHAR, 2=STROKE               
  7751. 10   real               height of character space (pixels)                      
  7752. 10   real               width of character space  (pixels)                      
  7753.                                                                                 
  7754. Note:  the DOS version uses sizes that are a multiple of 8 pixels, and will     
  7755. adjust the size accordingly e.g. 8X8, 16X16, 16X8.                              
  7756.                                                                                 
  7757.  
  7758.                                                                      147
  7759. Fonts are available for use on the screen, but are more usually used for output 
  7760. on plotters.                                                                    
  7761.                                                                                 
  7762. The following fonts are available:                                              
  7763.                                                                                 
  7764. For OzMap and DOS version:                                                      
  7765.                                                                                 
  7766. 1 VGA/EGA hardware font or default hardcopy font                                
  7767. 2 Simplex Roman, the most basic                                                 
  7768. 3 Duplex Roman, more detailed than the simplex with about twice as many strokes 
  7769. 4 Complex Roman, similar but with more tapered segments                         
  7770. 5 Triplex Roman, heavier version                                                
  7771. 6 Simplex script, based on handwriting                                          
  7772. 7 Complex script                                                                
  7773. 8 Complex italic italic version of complex roman                                
  7774. 9 Triplex italic                                                                
  7775.                                                                                 
  7776. The windows fonts are defined in the \ozgis\ozgis.ini file                      
  7777.                                                                                 
  7778. The text records are:                                                           
  7779.                                                                                 
  7780. 4 records to define the text available for name overlays at sites or typed      
  7781. in text.                                                                        
  7782. The text is usually defined in increasing size order.                           
  7783.                                                                                 
  7784. Legend text record:  This is fixed size text used for generation of all the     
  7785. legends.  The size is very important as it governs the overall size of the      
  7786. legend e.g. the zone legend boxes are 3 times the text height in height, 2      
  7787. times the text width in width.                                                  
  7788.                                                                                 
  7789. Attribute description text record:  This is normally large text.  The           
  7790. interactive system has to be able to clear it off for each attribute so it      
  7791. should be fixed size hardware text in that case.  When two variates are         
  7792. displayed the two descriptions are separated by                                 
  7793.  a 'VS' or 'AND' generated using the                                            
  7794. legend text.                                                                    
  7795.                                                                                 
  7796.                                                                                 
  7797. Line records:                                                                   
  7798.                                                                                 
  7799. 10   integer            colour index                                            
  7800. 10   integer            GKS type (1-4)                                          
  7801.                         1 = solid, 2 = dashed, 3 = dotted, 4 = dash dot         
  7802.                                                                                 
  7803. The actual records are as follows:                                              
  7804.                                                                                 
  7805. 4 records for lines to be used for line overlays.                               
  7806.                                                                                 
  7807. 4 records for lines to be used for quantised lines (line-type has no            
  7808. meaning here as types are assigned according to quantisation).                  
  7809.                                                                                 
  7810. Note that these first 8 records also define the hatching                        
  7811. plotter 'pens' if applicable.                                                   
  7812.                                                                                 
  7813. A record to define zone boundaries line.                                        
  7814.                                                                                 
  7815. A record to define the line used to draw axes on diagrams (should be            
  7816. solid).                                                                         
  7817.  
  7818.                                                                      148
  7819.                                                                                 
  7820. A record to define the line used to draw statistical values on diagrams.        
  7821.                                                                                 
  7822. Marker records:                                                                 
  7823.                                                                                 
  7824. 10     integer     colour index                                                 
  7825. 10     integer     fill style index                                             
  7826. 10     real        marker height (and width)                                    
  7827. 40     byte        marker file name, left aligned, system format                
  7828.                                                                                 
  7829. The records are as follows:                                                     
  7830.                                                                                 
  7831. 4 records for markers to be used as overlays at sites.                          
  7832.                                                                                 
  7833. 4 records for markers used for sites with quantised attribute data (marker      
  7834. size has no meaning, is set for class).                                         
  7835.                                                                                 
  7836. 1 record for site marker background  (currently not used)                       
  7837.                                                                                 
  7838. 1 record for scatter diagram (GKS marker no 1)                                  
  7839.                                                                                 
  7840. Colour Sequence records (170 records):                                          
  7841.                                                                                 
  7842. 10     integer  colour index                                                    
  7843. 10     integer  style index                                                     
  7844.                                                                                 
  7845. These records give sequences of colours (or patterns) or hatching for           
  7846. colouring zones after quantisation.                                             
  7847.                                                                                 
  7848. There are two types of sequence:                                                
  7849.                                                                                 
  7850. -  a 121 value array for single variate zones followed by                       
  7851. -  a 7x7 array for bivariate                                                    
  7852.                                                                                 
  7853.                                                                                 
  7854. The class fill is found by sampling out of the sequence for the number of       
  7855. classes, e.g. for bivariate                                                     
  7856.                                                                                 
  7857. 2 classes         1        7                                                    
  7858. 3 classes         1   4    7                                                    
  7859. 4 classes         1  3  5  7                                                    
  7860.                                                                                 
  7861. Similarly, the single variate 121 value array allows exact sampling for         
  7862. number of classes 2-7; a best choice is made for 8,9 or 10 classes.  In the     
  7863. special case of pseudo-continuous colour maps the whole 121 values are          
  7864. used.                                                                           
  7865.                                                                                 
  7866. Menu colour records (graphics mode, fixed for text mode)                        
  7867.                                                                                 
  7868. 10 integer background text number (1-8)                                         
  7869. 10 integer foreground text number (1-8)                                         
  7870.                                                                                 
  7871. The menu colours are:                                                           
  7872.                                                                                 
  7873. 1 main menus                                                                    
  7874. 2 lists                                                                         
  7875. 3 help messages                                                                 
  7876. 4 input of values                                                               
  7877.  
  7878.                                                                      149
  7879. 5 error messages                                                                
  7880.                                                                                 
  7881. The 5 menu records for DOS use internal text numbers                            
  7882. The following 5 records for WINDOWS reference colours in the usuual way.        
  7883.                                                                                 
  7884. WINDOWS system colour records follow for the GUI elements such as windows       
  7885. titles, scrollbars, buttons etc (some elements such as arrows dont seem to be   
  7886. supported). Video boards with 16 colours seem to have fixed colours, and        
  7887. apparently the hardware colour table is never rewritten. A guess at these       
  7888. colours is in the file WINSV.DAT. Video boards with 256 colours are rewritten.  
  7889.                                                                                 
  7890. Note:  Files for advanced raster display systems with long LUT's should be      
  7891. set up as follows:                                                              
  7892.                                                                                 
  7893. -  Display type = 1                                                             
  7894. -  Fill type = 1                                                                
  7895. -  LUT length 256 or greater                                                    
  7896. -  One LUT colour for each record in the data file i.e. all colour index        
  7897.    values unique                                                                
  7898.                                                                                 
  7899. The system by passes the colour index and style index when operating in         
  7900. fast interactive code and accesses the LUT directly.                            
  7901.  
  7902.                                                                      150
  7903.                      B. USA Census data                                   
  7904.                        ===============
  7905.  
  7906.                                                                                 
  7907.                                                                                 
  7908.                                                                                 
  7909.                                                                                 
  7910. This appendix describes the procedure for entering US Census Bureau CD-ROM      
  7911. files into the OzGIS system, and gives examples of the procedures to            
  7912. prepare data and display maps.                                                  
  7913.                                                                                 
  7914.                                                                                 
  7915.                                                                                 
  7916.                                                                                 
  7917.                                                                                 
  7918.  
  7919.   B. 1 Overview                                          
  7920.       --------
  7921.  
  7922. The Census Bureau supplies data on CD-ROM. There are two types supported:       
  7923.                                                                                 
  7924. 1. the population and housing Census data (STF1A files), one State              
  7925.    per CD-ROM                                                                   
  7926.                                                                                 
  7927. 2. the digitised map data (TIGER format) supplied as one County per             
  7928.    CD-ROM                                                                       
  7929.                                                                                 
  7930. The data entry process provides the facilities to input these data, BUT...      
  7931.                                                                                 
  7932. THE FILES MUST BE NAMED IN THE CORRECT WAY as described later.                  
  7933.                                                                                 
  7934. The CD-ROM files can be very large, but the internal OzGIS files are much       
  7935. smaller. Hence the  usual procedure will be to read the raw data files          
  7936. directly off CD-ROM. Processing can take some time.                             
  7937.                                                                                 
  7938. The basic facility provided in the OzGIS system is to map tract/BNA or          
  7939. block group level data on a County basis. Census data can be extracted          
  7940. into one attribute file for one or more Counties. Census boundaries can         
  7941. be extracted into separate files for each county. Multiple county maps          
  7942. are generated by mapping the single attribute file with multiple geographic     
  7943. files.                                                                          
  7944.                                                                                 
  7945. Data for map overlays (e.g. roads) can also be extracted from TIGER data.       
  7946. These data can be displayed without Census data.                                
  7947.                                                                                 
  7948. Other data could be extracted from the CD-ROMs (e.g. blocks, places) and        
  7949. will be supported if there is demand.                                           
  7950.                                                                                 
  7951. The capacity of the OzGIS system can be exceeded by these data. This            
  7952. should be less of a problem with the WINDOWS version as it uses extended memory.
  7953. The capacity should be sufficient to produce tract/BNA maps with overlays for   
  7954. single counties in all cases.                                                   
  7955.                                                                                 
  7956. Generally the procedure for producing tract/BNA maps is to enter the TIGER      
  7957. data for the county of interest and all the STF1A files for the same county     
  7958. by selecting the appropriate options from the data entry menus.                 
  7959.                                                                                 
  7960.  
  7961.                                                                      151
  7962. Usually a new DOS directory will be set up for each map area. It must be on     
  7963. the same disk as the \OZGIS directory.                                          
  7964.                                                                                 
  7965. Census data is often not exactly what is required, PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY     
  7966. will probably be used to produce derived attributes. Common processing is to    
  7967. amalgamate age ranges and to normalise by dividing by total population.         
  7968.                                                                                 
  7969. The boundary line segments will probably be thinned to reduce                   
  7970. their size and speed up display by using the PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY option.   
  7971.                                                                                 
  7972. The BUILD TOPOLOGY option has to be used to form the polygons from the          
  7973. TIGER lines data.                                                               
  7974.                                                                                 
  7975. Finally the data are mapped with SIMPLE CENSUS-TYPE mapping of INTERACTIVE      
  7976. DISPLAY AND ANALYSIS options.                                                   
  7977.                                                                                 
  7978. The most important sections in this appendix are:                               
  7979.                                                                                 
  7980. Processing STF1A data  and                                                      
  7981. OzGIS Processing of TIGER data                                                  
  7982.                                                                                 
  7983. These sections follow, with an example and further more general information     
  7984. after that.                                                                     
  7985.  
  7986.   B. 2 Documentation                                     
  7987.       -------------
  7988.  
  7989. Extensive documentation is available from the Census Bureau and on the          
  7990. CD-ROMs.                                                                        
  7991.                                                                                 
  7992. Some of that documentation is reproduced here.                                  
  7993.  
  7994.   B. 3 OzGIS Processing of TIGER data                    
  7995.       ------------------------------
  7996.  
  7997. You enter TIGER data into OzGIS with the data entry process.                    
  7998.                                                                                 
  7999. Select IMPORT GEOGRAPHIC FILES from the top menu and then                       
  8000. IMPORT A TIGER FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                           
  8001.                                                                                 
  8002. The next menu is:                                                               
  8003.                                                                                 
  8004. TRACTS / BNA                                                                    
  8005. BLOCK GROUPS                                                                    
  8006. BLOCKS                                                                          
  8007. ZIP CODES (IF PRESENT)                                                          
  8008. VOTING DISTRICTS                                                                
  8009. SELECT LANDMARKS BY FEATURE CODES                                               
  8010. SELECT LINES BY FEATURE CODES                                                   
  8011. SELECT POINTS BY FEATURE CODES                                                  
  8012.                                                                                 
  8013. You will probably use options TRACTS / BNA and BLOCK GROUPS to extract          
  8014. boundaries for mapping with STF1A data. The build process has to be used        
  8015. to build the polygons.                                                          
  8016.                                                                                 
  8017. The option SELECT LINES BY FEATURE CODES will also be used often to extract     
  8018. line overlay data such as roads.                                                
  8019.                                                                                 
  8020.  
  8021.                                                                      152
  8022. The Feature codes are described later in this appendix.                         
  8023.                                                                                 
  8024. The TIGER files must be present on hard disk or CD-ROM  with file names in a    
  8025. restricted form.                                                                
  8026.                                                                                 
  8027. It seems that each state is on at least one CD-ROM (some states like California 
  8028. are on two or more, but most are either on one by themselves or share           
  8029. a disk with one or two small states). The structure of the CD-ROM appears       
  8030. to be: general documentation and full state FIPS listing files at               
  8031. the top  (GRF_N_xx, where xx is the state's FIPS code); a subdirectory          
  8032. for each state named by its FIPS code (e.g. Indiana's subdirectory is 18); in   
  8033. each state's subdir are subdirectories for each county, again by FIPS codes     
  8034. (e.g. Allen County, Indiana is 003) using 3 digits; in each of these reside the 
  8035. (finally!) Tiger files of the form TGRXXYYY.F4n, where XX is the STATE code and 
  8036. YYY is the county code and n is the record format code.                         
  8037.                                                                                 
  8038. You usually read data directly off CD-ROM by giving the full file name.         
  8039. The files will probably already be named correctly on CD-ROM, where they usually
  8040. to have extensions of the form ".F4n". e.g. e:/36/121/tgr36121.f41              
  8041. You give the name of any one of the files and that name is used as a            
  8042. template for the rest of the files.                                             
  8043.                                                                                 
  8044. There are two forms of file name:                                               
  8045.                                                                                 
  8046. Firstly, as files are often on CD-ROM with file names of the form, for          
  8047. example boondocks.f41, boondocks.f42, boondocks.f43 etc, the data entry         
  8048. process will look for sets of files with names of the form ????.f4n             
  8049.                                                                                 
  8050. If no files are present of this form it will look for a second form, where      
  8051. the file names must contain the string "TGRn" where n is 1,2,3 or 7. This       
  8052. ensures that related files are named as a set. Files on hard disk are usually   
  8053. given names with extension ".DAT".                                              
  8054.                                                                                 
  8055. Name examples on hard disk are WASHTGR1.DAT, WASHTGR2.DAT, WASHTGR3.DAT,        
  8056. WASHTGR7.DAT and  TGR1NY.DAT and TGR2NY.DAT                                     
  8057.                                                                                 
  8058. Only the files of the required types are required:                              
  8059.                                                                                 
  8060. Extracting Census boundaries usually requires types 1 and 2, but in some        
  8061. cases the zone names (e.g. voting districts or 1980 regions) require that       
  8062. the record type 3 file is also processed.                                       
  8063.                                                                                 
  8064. Extracting lines by feature code requires types 1 and 2.                        
  8065.                                                                                 
  8066. Extracting points by feature codes requires type 1.                             
  8067. Extracting landmark features by feature code requires type 7.                   
  8068.                                                                                 
  8069. Address extraction by feature code requires types 1 and 2. Type 6 records       
  8070. are not processed.                                                              
  8071.  
  8072.   B. 4 Processing STF1A data                             
  8073.       ---------------------
  8074.  
  8075. US Census data STF1A files can be entered into the system with the entry        
  8076. process by choosing IMPORT ATTRIBUTE FILES from the menu and then               
  8077. one of:                                                                         
  8078. IMPORT USA CENSUS STF 1A FILES FOR TRACT/BNA                                    
  8079. IMPORT USA CENSUS STF 1A FILES FOR BLOCK GROUPS                                 
  8080.  
  8081.                                                                      153
  8082.                                                                                 
  8083. The data files must be present with names of the form *1An* where n is in       
  8084. the range 0 to 9. The supplied files on CD-ROM will probably have extensions    
  8085. DBF and file names in the correct form. Data files on hard disk are usually     
  8086. given the extension .DAT                                                        
  8087.                                                                                 
  8088. Example file names are e:/xyz/stf1a0dc.dbf, stf1a0in.dat, wash1a3.dat           
  8089. You do not need to give the file extension if it is the default .DAT            
  8090.                                                                                 
  8091. All files present will be processed, so anywhere between 1 and 10 files         
  8092. will be read. It takes a long time to read all the data, but it will be         
  8093. usual to load it all in once.                                                   
  8094.                                                                                 
  8095. You give the name of any one of the files and that name is used as a            
  8096. template for the rest of the file names.                                        
  8097.                                                                                 
  8098. If you only want to process one or two files you will have to copy them to hard 
  8099. disk. It will be usual to input files directly from CD-ROM as they can be very  
  8100. big. The internal files are much smaller as only a small part of the data is    
  8101. required.                                                                       
  8102.                                                                                 
  8103. THE FIRST STF1A FILE (number zero) MUST ALWAYS BE PRESENT as it contains the    
  8104. level codes necessary to avoid multiple records being extracted.                
  8105.                                                                                 
  8106. A parameter file must be given. These are described in the next section.        
  8107. You can use the supplied parameter file by giving the name as *STF1A, as        
  8108. described in the following section.                                             
  8109.                                                                                 
  8110. You can also set up your own parameter file, probably by modifying the example  
  8111. provided.                                                                       
  8112.                                                                                 
  8113. Attributes (table variables) that are not on the parameter file will not be     
  8114. processed, so a subset can be extracted by including just the appropriate       
  8115. entries in the file.                                                            
  8116.                                                                                 
  8117. You give a list of numbers for the counties you want to process e.g.            
  8118. 001, 005,...                                                                    
  8119.                                                                                 
  8120. If all the values for an attribute are zero nothing is written to the output    
  8121. file for that attribute.                                                        
  8122.                                                                                 
  8123. A log file is output to OZGIS.OUT which lists the attributes output and the     
  8124. position on the file. The positions are of value when generating new            
  8125. attributes as arithmetic expressions and for selecting attributes for display.  
  8126.  
  8127.   B. 5 The STF1A parameter file                          
  8128.       ------------------------
  8129.  
  8130. A parameter file must be used to define the description, units and number of    
  8131. decimal places for each variable (field).                                       
  8132.                                                                                 
  8133. A sample parameter file is provided:   \OZGIS\STF1A.PRM (i.e. called *STF1A)    
  8134.                                                                                 
  8135. This file was generated by editing the STF1A data dictionary, and there is no   
  8136. guarantee that it is correct. (We would be pleased to accept a better version). 
  8137.                                                                                 
  8138. The format is fixed, so ensure any file has data in the correct columns if you  
  8139. modify the file. The first line of the file is a comment, then there is one     
  8140.  
  8141.                                                                      154
  8142. line for each Census table variable that is to be processed in the following    
  8143. format:                                                                         
  8144.                                                                                 
  8145.  8 characters table name                                                        
  8146.  2 characters filler                                                            
  8147. 30 characters variable description                                              
  8148.  2 characters filler                                                            
  8149. 10 characters units description                                                 
  8150.  2 characters filler                                                            
  8151.  1 digit number of decimal places (0 or 2)                                      
  8152.                                                                                 
  8153.                                                                                 
  8154. The example parameter file is as follows:                                       
  8155.                                                                                 
  8156. Sample STF1A parameter file                                                     
  8157. P0010001  TOTAL  PERSONS                  PERSONS     0                         
  8158. P0020001  TOTAL  FAMILIES                 FAMILIES    0                         
  8159. P0030001  TOTAL HOUSEHOLDS                HOUSEHOLDS  0                         
  8160. P0040001  PERSONS INSIDE URBANIZED AREA   PERSONS     0                         
  8161. P0040002  PERSONS OUTSIDE URBANIZED AREA  PERSONS     0                         
  8162.              .                                                                  
  8163.              .                                                                  
  8164.              .                                                                  
  8165.              .                                                                  
  8166.              .                                                                  
  8167.  
  8168.   B. 6 Example                                           
  8169.       -------
  8170.  
  8171. You should have looked at the early chapters on entering data and displaying    
  8172. Census-type maps before you look at this example.                               
  8173.                                                                                 
  8174.                                                                                 
  8175. Suppose you want to produce a map of 1990 Census data for three counties in     
  8176. Texas for tract/BNA zones.                                                      
  8177.                                                                                 
  8178. First you look up the county FIPS codes in the documentation:                   
  8179.                                                                                 
  8180. 48         Texas                                                                
  8181.      .                                                                          
  8182.      .                                                                          
  8183. 48   047   Brooks County                                                        
  8184.      .                                                                          
  8185.      .                                                                          
  8186. 48   117   Deaf Smith County                                                    
  8187.      .                                                                          
  8188.      .                                                                          
  8189. 48   301   Loving County                                                        
  8190.                                                                                 
  8191. So the codes are 047, 117 and 301.                                              
  8192.                                                                                 
  8193.                                                                                 
  8194. Now set up a directory to work in on the SAME disk as the \OZGIS directory.     
  8195.                                                                                 
  8196. e.g.                                                                            
  8197. CD \                                                                            
  8198. MKDIR TEXAS                                                                     
  8199. CD TEXAS                                                                        
  8200.  
  8201.                                                                      155
  8202.                                                                                 
  8203.                                                                                 
  8204. Now get the CD-ROM with the STF1A file for Texas and the TIGER CD-ROMs for      
  8205. the three counties.                                                             
  8206.                                                                                 
  8207. What you need to do is to prepare an attribute file with Census data for        
  8208. the three counties and three geographic files, one for each county.             
  8209.                                                                                 
  8210.                                                                                 
  8211. You will probably find it most profitable to work through this example          
  8212. using your own CD-ROM files.                                                    
  8213.                                                                                 
  8214.                                                                                 
  8215.                                                                                 
  8216. Step1: input the Census data                                                    
  8217. ----------------------------                                                    
  8218.                                                                                 
  8219. Mount the STF1A CD-ROM in the drive. Suppose the files are called               
  8220. TEXAS1A0.DBF ......... TEXAS1A9.DBF.                                            
  8221.                                                                                 
  8222. Select IMPORT DATA FILES from the top menu.                                     
  8223.                                                                                 
  8224. A menu appears:                                                                 
  8225.                                                                                 
  8226. TUTORIALS & SYSTEM INFORMATION                                                  
  8227. IMPORT GEOGRAPHIC FILES                                                         
  8228. IMPORT ATTRIBUTE FILES                                                          
  8229. IMPORT A NAMES FILE                                                             
  8230. IMPORT A COMBINE FILE                                                           
  8231. IMPORT A DEVICE FILE                                                            
  8232. IMPORT A MARKER FILE                                                            
  8233.                                                                                 
  8234. select the option to IMPORT ATTRIBUTE FILES                                     
  8235.                                                                                 
  8236. A new menu appears:                                                             
  8237.                                                                                 
  8238. IMPORT A STANDARD FORMAT ATTRIBUTE FILE                                         
  8239. IMPORT A SPREADSHEET WK1 FORMAT FILE                                            
  8240. IMPORT A DATABASE (SIMPLE) FORMAT ATTRIBUTE FILE                                
  8241. IMPORT A LAMM FORMAT ATTRIBUTE FILE                                             
  8242. IMPORT USA CENSUS STF 1A FILES FOR TRACT/BNA                                    
  8243. IMPORT USA CENSUS STF 1A FILES FOR BLOCK GROUPS                                 
  8244. IMPORT ATLAS DATA FILES                                                         
  8245.                                                                                 
  8246. Obviously you now select:                                                       
  8247.                                                                                 
  8248. IMPORT USA CENSUS STF 1A FILES FOR TRACT/BNA                                    
  8249.                                                                                 
  8250. Give the input data file as E:/xxx/TEXAS1A0.DBF (using the correct drive)       
  8251.                                                                                 
  8252. Give the output attribute file as TEXAS1 (no extension!!)                       
  8253.                                                                                 
  8254. Give the parameter file as *STF1A                                               
  8255.                                                                                 
  8256. Give the numbers for the counties i.e. 047, 117 and 301.                        
  8257.                                                                                 
  8258. All the files will be processed. Trace messages will say what is going on.      
  8259.                                                                                 
  8260.  
  8261.                                                                      156
  8262. Exit from the program.                                                          
  8263.                                                                                 
  8264. Either print the file OZGIS.OUT or copy it to a file. This is a list of         
  8265. the census variables and their positions in the attribute file.                 
  8266.                                                                                 
  8267.                                                                                 
  8268. Some comments ....... the file name given (TEXAS1A0.DBF) is used as a template  
  8269. to generate the other file names (TEXAS1A1.DBF etc) and all files in the set    
  8270. on the CD-ROM are processed.                                                    
  8271.                                                                                 
  8272. If the file name is not of the standard form you have to copy the files to      
  8273. hard disk and rename them.                                                      
  8274.                                                                                 
  8275. You can process just some of the files by copying them to hard disk (the first  
  8276. file, number zero, must always be there). i.e. all the files present are        
  8277. processed.                                                                      
  8278.                                                                                 
  8279.                                                                                 
  8280. Step2: derive census variables (optional)                                       
  8281. -----------------------------------------                                       
  8282.                                                                                 
  8283. You now have an attribute file called TEXAS1 ready for mapping. However,        
  8284. raw Census variables are often not exactly what you want.                       
  8285.                                                                                 
  8286. Suppose you actually want to map teenagers in the age group 12 to 15 years old. 
  8287.                                                                                 
  8288. Also, if you are interested in the way the data are spatially distributed you   
  8289. have to normalise the data to allow for differences in the total number of      
  8290. people in the different tract/BNAs.                                             
  8291.                                                                                 
  8292. This can be done as follows:                                                    
  8293.                                                                                 
  8294. First look at the file OZGIS.OUT from the data entry process to find the        
  8295. variable numbers. Suppose it looks like:                                        
  8296.                                                                                 
  8297.   1  TOTAL  PERSONS                                                             
  8298.     .                                                                           
  8299.     .                                                                           
  8300.     .                                                                           
  8301. 108  12 AND 13 YEARS                                                            
  8302. 109  14 YEARS                                                                   
  8303. 110  15 YEARS                                                                   
  8304.     .                                                                           
  8305.     .                                                                           
  8306.     .                                                                           
  8307.                                                                                 
  8308. The new variable is the sum of the three age variables, divided by the total.   
  8309.                                                                                 
  8310.                                                                                 
  8311. Now select PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY from the top menu.                          
  8312.                                                                                 
  8313. The menu looks like:                                                            
  8314.                                                                                 
  8315. PROCESS ATTRIBUTE FILES                                                         
  8316. PROCESS GEOGRAPHIC FILES                                                        
  8317. PROCESS NAMES FILES                                                             
  8318. OUTPUT EXTERNAL DATA FILES                                                      
  8319.                                                                                 
  8320.  
  8321.                                                                      157
  8322.                                                                                 
  8323. Select PROCESS ATTRIBUTE FILES, which gives another menu:                       
  8324.                                                                                 
  8325. FORM ATTRIBUTES WITH ARITHMETIC EXPRESSIONS                                     
  8326. AMALGAMATE ATTRIBUTE DATA FOR AN COMBINE FILE                                   
  8327.                                                                                 
  8328.                                                                                 
  8329. Select FORM ATTRIBUTES WITH ARITHMETIC EXPRESSIONS                              
  8330.                                                                                 
  8331.                                                                                 
  8332. Now you have to specify an input attribute file, which is here TEXAS1, and a    
  8333. new output file, say TEXAS2                                                     
  8334.                                                                                 
  8335. You can then define a series of arithmetic operations (type H for help)         
  8336.                                                                                 
  8337. So you give the arithmetic expression as:                                       
  8338.                                                                                 
  8339. (#108+#109+#110) / #1 * 100.0                                                   
  8340.                                                                                 
  8341. You also have to give a description, say "12 TO 15 YEAR OLDS" and a             
  8342. units description, say "%POP".                                                  
  8343.                                                                                 
  8344. Type an expression "E" to exit.                                                 
  8345.                                                                                 
  8346.                                                                                 
  8347.                                                                                 
  8348. Step 3: Enter the TIGER data                                                    
  8349. ----------------------------                                                    
  8350.                                                                                 
  8351. You will have a CD-ROM for each County. Put the first in the drive.             
  8352.                                                                                 
  8353. Suppose the files for Brooks County have names tgr48047.d41, tgr48047.f42 etc   
  8354.                                                                                 
  8355. Select IMPORT DATA FILES from the top menu.                                     
  8356.                                                                                 
  8357. select IMPORT GEOGRAPHIC FILES and then IMPORT A TIGER FORMAT GEOGRAPHIC FILE.  
  8358.                                                                                 
  8359. The TIGER menu is:                                                              
  8360.                                                                                 
  8361. TRACTS / BNA                                                                    
  8362. BLOCK GROUPS                                                                    
  8363. BLOCKS                                                                          
  8364. ZIP CODES (IF PRESENT)                                                          
  8365. VOTING DISTRICTS                                                                
  8366. SELECT LANDMARKS BY FEATURE CODES                                               
  8367. SELECT LINES BY FEATURE CODES                                                   
  8368. SELECT POINTS BY FEATURE CODES                                                  
  8369.                                                                                 
  8370. Obviously, you need to select TRACTS / BNA as that is what you extracted        
  8371. Census data for.                                                                
  8372.                                                                                 
  8373. As before, give the input data as the name of one of the CD-ROM files, say      
  8374. D:/48/047/TGR48047.F42, and the new geographic file as say BROOKS1              
  8375.                                                                                 
  8376. If there are problems reading the files you may have to copy the ones required  
  8377. to hard disk and rename them, as described in previous sections.                
  8378.                                                                                 
  8379. The file BROOKS1 contains the lines that form the boundaries of the tract/BNAs. 
  8380.  
  8381.                                                                      158
  8382.                                                                                 
  8383. Suppose you also would like to display a lines overlay on your map of important 
  8384. roads.                                                                          
  8385.                                                                                 
  8386. Looking at the section on feature codes you find that a range of 110 to 128     
  8387. covers primary and secondary roads.                                             
  8388.                                                                                 
  8389. So, select SELECT LINES BY FEATURE CODES                                        
  8390.                                                                                 
  8391. Give the input data file as before, and the output geographic file as           
  8392. say BROOKRD                                                                     
  8393.                                                                                 
  8394. Give the feature code range as found: 110 to 128                                
  8395.                                                                                 
  8396.                                                                                 
  8397. Repeat the process for the TIGER files for each of the counties so you          
  8398. end up with a geographic file of boundaries for tract/BNAs for each county,     
  8399. and line overlay files for the roads.                                           
  8400.                                                                                 
  8401.                                                                                 
  8402.                                                                                 
  8403. Step4: Simplify lines                                                           
  8404. ---------------------                                                           
  8405.                                                                                 
  8406. Often you will want to thin the lines data i.e. throw away a lot of the points. 
  8407.                                                                                 
  8408. You do this for several reasons:                                                
  8409.                                                                                 
  8410. .  The less the number of vertices the faster map display is.                   
  8411.                                                                                 
  8412. .  You often dont care if the map is particularly accurate, its the attribute   
  8413. data you are interested in.                                                     
  8414.                                                                                 
  8415. .  Your screen is low resolution, there is no advantage in having many vertices 
  8416. for each pixel on the monitor.                                                  
  8417.                                                                                 
  8418. .  When you form polygons from the lines the number of vertices in some         
  8419. polygons may exceed system limits.                                              
  8420.                                                                                 
  8421. .  Geographic files take less disk space after thinning.                        
  8422.                                                                                 
  8423. Simplification is an option in the data preparation process which reads a       
  8424. geographic file and outputs a new one where the line segments have less points. 
  8425.                                                                                 
  8426. So, select PREPARE DATA FOR DISPLAY from the top menu.                          
  8427.                                                                                 
  8428. Select PROCESS GEOGRAPHIC FILES and then select SIMPLIFY (THIN) LINE SEGMENTS   
  8429.                                                                                 
  8430.                                                                                 
  8431. Give the input file as BROOKS1 and the new output file as BROOKS2.              
  8432.                                                                                 
  8433. The resolution for thinning is given as the number of pixels. For example,      
  8434. if you are displaying maps on a standard VGA at 640 X 480 you might give        
  8435. the resolution as 450 pixels. If you are more interested in speed of            
  8436. display than appearance give a value of 100.                                    
  8437.                                                                                 
  8438. Repeat for the other files.                                                     
  8439.                                                                                 
  8440.  
  8441.                                                                      159
  8442.                                                                                 
  8443. Step5: Form polygons from lines                                                 
  8444. -------------------------------                                                 
  8445.                                                                                 
  8446. The geographic files of tract/BNAs contain the line segments that form the      
  8447. boundaries of the Census regions.                                               
  8448.                                                                                 
  8449. You have to form the zone / polygon / line structure by joining the ends of     
  8450. the lines to form polygons, finding which polygons form the zones and           
  8451. working out which polygons are inside others.                                   
  8452.                                                                                 
  8453.                                                                                 
  8454.                                                                                 
  8455. Select BUILD ZONES FROM LINE SEGMENTS INTO NEW GEOGRAPHIC FILE                  
  8456.                                                                                 
  8457. Give the input geographic file as BROOKS2                                       
  8458.                                                                                 
  8459. Give the output geographic file as BROOKS                                       
  8460.                                                                                 
  8461. The program will now build the polygons etc.                                    
  8462.                                                                                 
  8463. Repeat for the other tract/BNA boundary files (not the roads!)                  
  8464.                                                                                 
  8465.                                                                                 
  8466. If you type "DIR BROO*.GEO" you will find that you have the three geographic    
  8467. files created during processing:                                                
  8468.                                                                                 
  8469. BROOKS.GEO                                                                      
  8470. BROOKS1.GEO                                                                     
  8471. BROOKS2.GEO                                                                     
  8472.                                                                                 
  8473. You only need the final one, so you can delete BROOKS1.GEO and BROOKS2.GEO      
  8474.                                                                                 
  8475.                                                                                 
  8476.                                                                                 
  8477.                                                                                 
  8478. Step6: Display simple maps                                                      
  8479. --------------------------                                                      
  8480.                                                                                 
  8481. You can start by displaying some simple maps with SIMPLE CENSUS-TYPE MAPPING.   
  8482.                                                                                 
  8483. The first menu appears:                                                         
  8484.                                                                                 
  8485. 1 TUTORIALS & SYSTEM INFORMATION                                                
  8486. 2 DISPLAY A NEW MAP                                                             
  8487.                                                                                 
  8488.                                                                                 
  8489. choose the option to "DISPLAY A NEW MAP".                                       
  8490.                                                                                 
  8491. give your attribute file name i.e. TEXAS1                                       
  8492.                                                                                 
  8493. and give your final geographic file name i.e. BROOKS                            
  8494.                                                                                 
  8495. The data are now processed, the map is displayed, and the next menu appears.    
  8496.                                                                                 
  8497. You now have a default map with legend and distribution diagram. The legend     
  8498. has the numbers of zones in each class on the left and the class value ranges   
  8499. to the right of the coloured boxes.                                             
  8500.  
  8501.                                                                      160
  8502.                                                                                 
  8503. If you use an option such as changing the displayed attribute you may have      
  8504. to click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                        
  8505.                                                                                 
  8506. Refer to the chapter at the front of the manual on using Census mapping if you  
  8507. have not already looked at the example there.                                   
  8508.                                                                                 
  8509.                                                                                 
  8510.                                                                                 
  8511.                                                                                 
  8512.                                                                                 
  8513. Step7: Display complex maps                                                     
  8514. ---------------------------                                                     
  8515.                                                                                 
  8516. Lets display a map with the three counties tract/BNA geographic files, called   
  8517. say BROOKS, DEAF and LOVING. The raw attribute file TEXAS1 will be used and     
  8518. the three road overlay files BROOKSRD, DEAFRD and LOVINGRD will be used.        
  8519.                                                                                 
  8520. Type OZGIS to execute the main mapping program.                                 
  8521.                                                                                 
  8522. the first menu enables you to select the type of map or diagram that is         
  8523. required:                                                                       
  8524.                                                                                 
  8525. DISPLAY ZONES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE                                             
  8526. DISPLAY LINES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE                                             
  8527. DISPLAY SITES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE                                             
  8528. DISPLAY BIVARIATE ZONES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                                 
  8529. DISPLAY ZONES & LINES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                                   
  8530. DISPLAY ZONES AND SITES FOR TWO ATTRIBUTE FILES                                 
  8531. DISPLAY GEOGRAPHIC FILES (NO ATTRIBUTES)                                        
  8532. DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE FILES (DIAGRAMS)                                              
  8533. DISPLAY A SAVED-DISPLAY FILE                                                    
  8534. DISPLAY A PRESENTATION FILE                                                     
  8535.                                                                                 
  8536. Select DISPLAY ZONES FOR AN ATTRIBUTE FILE for a straight forward               
  8537. choropleth map.                                                                 
  8538.                                                                                 
  8539. Give the attribute file as TEXAS1 and give one of the geographic boundary       
  8540. files, say BROOKS.                                                              
  8541.                                                                                 
  8542. A map will be displayed that will be the same as that with the Census mapping   
  8543. process. The  difference is that you now have many more options for mapping.    
  8544.                                                                                 
  8545. The main mapping menu will now appear on the toolbar:                           
  8546.                                                                                 
  8547. Attributes                                                                      
  8548. Class                                                                           
  8549. Features                                                                        
  8550. Overlays                                                                        
  8551. Regions                                                                         
  8552. Analyse                                                                         
  8553. Save                                                                            
  8554.                                                                                 
  8555. First we will add the other two tract/BNA files to the map. This requires       
  8556. an understanding of map regions which are defined by both a geographic          
  8557. window and the part of the screen it is to appear on.                           
  8558.                                                                                 
  8559. select MAP REGIONS.                                                             
  8560.  
  8561.                                                                      161
  8562.                                                                                 
  8563. A menu then appears of the following form:                                      
  8564.                                                                                 
  8565. CHANGE THE DISPLAYED ITEMS IN THE MAP                                           
  8566. CHANGE MAP REGION WINDOW (GEOGRAPHIC AREA)                                      
  8567. ZOOM MAP REGION WINDOW ABOUT X-HAIR POINT                                       
  8568. CHANGE MAP REGION VIEWPORT (SCREEN AREA)                                        
  8569. DEFINE NEW REGION FOR QUANTISED ZONES                                           
  8570. DISPLAY MORE QUANTISED ZONES ON A REGION                                        
  8571. DELETE QUANTISED ZONES FROM REGION                                              
  8572.                                                                                 
  8573. What you do next depends on whether the counties are adjacent or not.           
  8574.                                                                                 
  8575. If counties are adjacent, add the files to the existing map region as           
  8576. follows:                                                                        
  8577.                                                                                 
  8578. select ZOOM MAP REGION WINDOW ABOUT X-HAIR POINT, choose a location with        
  8579. the cursor and mouse or arrows (select with left button or Enter). Give         
  8580. a zoom factor, say 4.                                                           
  8581. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  8582.                                                                                 
  8583. You now have space for the other counties. Select DISPLAY MORE QUANTISED ZONES  
  8584. ON A REGION and give the next boundary geographic file DEAF. Repeat for LOVING. 
  8585.                                                                                 
  8586. If the counties are not adjacent you probably want to display the files in      
  8587. different parts of the screen in their own regions. Use the option              
  8588. DEFINE NEW REGION FOR QUANTISED ZONES to do this.                               
  8589.                                                                                 
  8590. You probably end up with a mess. Use CHANGE MAP REGION WINDOW (GEOGRAPHIC AREA) 
  8591. and CHANGE MAP REGION VIEWPORT (SCREEN AREA) to clean up the map layout.        
  8592.                                                                                 
  8593. You often find that Census maps have very small polygons in the centres of      
  8594. cities. You can add "blow-ups" of the CBDs by using DEFINE NEW REGION FOR       
  8595. QUANTISED ZONES to add a geographic file a second time to the map and then      
  8596. use CHANGE MAP REGION WINDOW (GEOGRAPHIC AREA) to display just the desired      
  8597. area. (you can also use data preparation options to subset for complete polygons
  8598.                                                                                 
  8599. Finally add the roads. Type ESC to go back to the main map menu and             
  8600. select DEFINE GEOGRAPHIC OVERLAYS                                               
  8601.                                                                                 
  8602. A menu appears that offers options for several types of overlays:               
  8603.                                                                                 
  8604. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  8605. OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                    
  8606. OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                      
  8607. UNDERLAY POLYGONS FROM GEOGRAPHIC FILE                                          
  8608. OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FOR FEATURE CODES                                         
  8609. OVERLAY MARKERS FOR SITES FOR FEATURE CODES                                     
  8610. OVERLAY NAMES FOR SITES FOR FEATURE CODES                                       
  8611. UNDERLAY POLYGONS FOR FEATURE CODES                                             
  8612.                                                                                 
  8613. Use OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FROM A GEOGRAPHIC FILE to overlay the road geographic 
  8614. files BROOKSRD, DEAFRD and LOVINGRD one at a time. If you have more than one    
  8615. region you will have to give the region number - the number is defined by the   
  8616. order the regions were defined. You could also use OVERLAY LINE SEGMENTS FOR    
  8617. FEATURE CODES and give a feature code range to subset the lines further.        
  8618.                                                                                 
  8619. Click the top icon on the toolbar to display the map.                           
  8620.  
  8621.                                                                      162
  8622.                                                                                 
  8623. You can add the names of the tract/BNAs to the map by using OVERLAY NAMES FOR   
  8624. SITES IN GEOGRAPHIC FILE and adding each of the boundary files.                 
  8625.                                                                                 
  8626. Having spent all this time you dont want to lose the map, so save it with the   
  8627. option SAVE DISPLAY FEATURES from the main map menu.                            
  8628.                                                                                 
  8629.                                                                                 
  8630. The other options are all described fully elsewhere in the manual.              
  8631.                                                                                 
  8632.                                                                                 
  8633.  
  8634.                                                                      163
  8635.  
  8636.   B. 7 OzGIS Census Zone Names                           
  8637.       -----------------------
  8638.  
  8639. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) codes are assigned              
  8640. for a variety of geographic entities, including American Indian and             
  8641. Alaska Native area, congressional district, county, county subdivision,         
  8642. metropolitan area, place, and State. The structure, format, and meaning         
  8643. of FIPS codes used in the census are shown in the 1990 census                   
  8644. Geographic Identification Code Scheme; in the data dictionary portion of        
  8645. the technical documentation for summary tape files, CD-ROM's, and               
  8646. microfiche.                                                                     
  8647.                                                                                 
  8648. The names assigned to Census polygons in OzGIS are generated from the           
  8649. standard codes.                                                                 
  8650.                                                                                 
  8651. Tract / BNA name = 3digit county + 5 digit tract FIPS code                      
  8652.                                                                                 
  8653. Block group name = 3digit county + 5 digit tract FIPS code + first block digit  
  8654.                                                                                 
  8655. If you want to input your own data try generating a template attribute data     
  8656. file with the data preparation options.                                         
  8657.                                                                                 
  8658. These names are unique only within a state.                                     
  8659.  
  8660.   B. 8 STF1A Census data                                 
  8661.       -----------------
  8662.  
  8663. Summary Tape File 1 (STF 1) contains 100-percent data.  Population items        
  8664. include age, race, sex, marital status, Hispanic origin, household type,        
  8665. and household relationship.  Population items are cross tabulated by age,       
  8666. race, Hispanic origin, or sex.  Housing items include occupancy/vacancy         
  8667. status, tenure, units in structure, contract rent, meals included in            
  8668. rent, value, and number of rooms in housing unit.  Housing data are cross       
  8669. tabulated by race or Hispanic origin of householder or by tenure.               
  8670.                                                                                 
  8671. Selected aggregates and medians also are provided.  Data are presented in       
  8672. 37 population tables (matrices) and 63 housing tables (matrices).               
  8673.  
  8674.   B. 9 STF1A Geographic areas                            
  8675.       ----------------------
  8676.  
  8677.  
  8678.   B. 9. 1 Blocks                                            
  8679.           ------
  8680.  
  8681. Census blocks are small areas bounded on all sides by visible features such     
  8682. as streets, roads, streams, and railroad tracks, and by invisible               
  8683. boundaries such as city, town, township, and county limits, property lines,     
  8684. and short, imaginary extensions of streets and roads.                           
  8685.                                                                                 
  8686.   Tabulation blocks, used in census data products, are in most cases the        
  8687. same as collection blocks, used in the census enumeration. In some              
  8688. cases, collection blocks have been "split" into two or more parts               
  8689. required for data tabulations. Tabulation blocks do not cross the               
  8690. boundaries of counties, county subdivisions, places, census tracts or           
  8691. block numbering areas, American Indian and Alaska Native areas,                 
  8692.  
  8693.                                                                      164
  8694. congressional districts, voting districts, urban or rural areas, or             
  8695. urbanized areas. The 1990 census is the first for which the entire              
  8696. United States and its possessions are block-numbered.                           
  8697.                                                                                 
  8698.   Blocks are numbered uniquely within each census tract or BNA. A block         
  8699. is identified by a three-digit number, sometimes with a single                  
  8700. alphabetical suffix. Block numbers with suffixes generally represent            
  8701. collection blocks that were "split" in order to identify separate               
  8702. geographic entities that divide the original block. For example, when a         
  8703. city limit runs through data collection block 101, the data for the             
  8704. portion inside the city is tabulated in block 101A and the portion              
  8705. outside, in block 101B. A block number with the suffix "Z"                      
  8706. represents a "crews-of-vessels" entity for which the Census                     
  8707. Bureau tabulates data, but that does not represent a true geographic            
  8708. area; such a block is shown on census maps associated with an anchor            
  8709. symbol and a census tract or block numbering area with a .99 suffix.            
  8710.  
  8711.   B. 9. 2 Block Groups                                      
  8712.           ------------
  8713.  
  8714. A geographic block group (BG) is a cluster of blocks having the same            
  8715. first digit of their three-digit identifying numbers within a census            
  8716. tract or block numbering area (BNA). For example, BG 3 within a census          
  8717. tract or BNA includes all blocks numbered between 301 and 397. In most          
  8718. cases, the numbering involves substantially fewer than 97 blocks.               
  8719. Geographic BG's never cross census tract or BNA boundaries, but may             
  8720. cross the boundaries of county subdivisions, places, American Indian            
  8721. and Alaska Native areas, urbanized areas, voting districts, and                 
  8722. congressional districts. BG's generally contain between 250 and 550             
  8723. housing units, with the ideal size being 400 housing units.                     
  8724.  
  8725.   B. 9. 3 Census tract and block numbering area             
  8726.           -------------------------------------
  8727.  
  8728. Block Numbering Area (BNA)                                                      
  8729.                                                                                 
  8730. Block numbering areas (BNA's) are small statistical subdivisions of             
  8731. a county for grouping and numbering blocks in nonmetropolitan counties          
  8732. where local census statistical areas committees have not established            
  8733. census tracts. State agencies and the Census Bureau delineated BNA's            
  8734. for the 1990 census, using guidelines similar to those for the                  
  8735. delineation of census tracts. BNA's do not cross county boundaries.             
  8736.                                                                                 
  8737.   BNA's are identified by a four-digit basic number and may have a              
  8738. two-digit suffix; for example, 9901.07. The decimal point separating            
  8739. the four-digit basic BNA number from the two-digit suffix is shown in           
  8740. printed reports, in microfiche, and on census maps; in machine-readable         
  8741. files, the decimal point is implied. Many BNA's do not have a suffix;           
  8742. in such cases, the suffix field is left blank in all data products. BNA         
  8743. numbers range from 9501 through 9989.99, and are unique within a county         
  8744. (numbers in the range of 0001 through 9499.99 denote a census tract).           
  8745. The suffix .99 identifies a BNA that was populated entirely by persons          
  8746. aboard one or more civilian or military ships. A "crews-of-vessels" BNA         
  8747. appears on census maps only as an anchor symbol with its BNA number (and        
  8748. block numbers on maps showing block numbers); the BNA relates to the ships      
  8749. associated with the onshore BNA's having the same four-digit basic number.      
  8750. Suffixes in the range .80 through .98 usually identify BNA's that either        
  8751. were revised or were created during the 1990 census data collection             
  8752.  
  8753.                                                                      165
  8754. activities. Some of these revisions produced BNA's that have extremely          
  8755. small land area and ay have little or no population or housing. For data        
  8756. analysis, such a BNA can be summarized with an adjacent BNA.                    
  8757.  
  8758.   B. 9. 4 Census Tract                                      
  8759.           ------------
  8760.  
  8761. Census tracts are small, relatively permanent statistical subdivisions of a     
  8762. county. Census tracts are delineated for all metropolitan areas (MA's) and      
  8763. other densely populated counties by local census statistical areas              
  8764. committees following Census Bureau guidelines (more than 3,000 census           
  8765. tracts have been established in 221 counties outside MA's). Six States          
  8766. (California, Connecticut, Delaware, Hawaii, New Jersey, and Rhode Island)       
  8767. and the District of Columbia are covered entirely by census tracts. Census      
  8768. tracts usually have between 2,500 and 8,000 persons and, when first             
  8769. delineated, are designed to be homogeneous with respect to population           
  8770. characteristics, economic status, and living conditions. Census tracts do       
  8771. not cross county boundaries. The spatial size of census tracts varies           
  8772. widely depending on the density of settlement. Census tract boundaries are      
  8773. delineated with the intention of being maintained over a long time so that      
  8774. statistical comparisons can be made from census to census. However,             
  8775. physical changes in street patterns caused by highway construction, new         
  8776. development, etc., may require occasional revisions; census tracts              
  8777. occasionally are split due to large population growth, or combined as a         
  8778. result of substantial population decline. Census tracts are referred to         
  8779. as "tracts" in all 1990 data products.                                          
  8780.                                                                                 
  8781.   Census tracts are identified by a four-digit basic number and may have        
  8782. a two-digit suffix; for example, 6059.02. The decimal point separating          
  8783. the four-digit basic tract number from the two-digit suffix is shown in         
  8784. printed reports, in microfiche, and on census maps; in machine-readable         
  8785. files, the decimal point is implied. Many census tracts do not have a           
  8786. suffix; in such cases, the suffix field is left blank in all data               
  8787. products. Leading zeros in a census tract number (for example, 002502)          
  8788. are shown only on machine-readable files.                                       
  8789.                                                                                 
  8790.   Census tract numbers range from 0001 through 9499.99 and are unique           
  8791. within a county (numbers in the range of 9501 through 9989.99 denote a          
  8792. block numbering area). The suffix .99 identifies a census tract that            
  8793. was populated entirely by persons aboard one or more civilian or                
  8794. military ships. A "crews-of-vessels" census tract appears on                    
  8795. census maps only as an anchor symbol with its census tract number (and          
  8796. block numbers on maps showing block numbers). These census tracts               
  8797. relate to the ships associated with the on-shore census tract having            
  8798. the same four-digit basic number. Suffixes in the range .80 through .98         
  8799. usually identify census tracts that either were revised or were created         
  8800. during the 1990 census data collection activities. Some of these                
  8801. revisions may have resulted in census tracts that have extremely small          
  8802. land area and may have little or no population or housing. For data             
  8803. analysis, such a census tract can be summarized with an adjacent census         
  8804. tract.                                                                          
  8805.  
  8806.   B. 9. 5 County                                            
  8807.           ------
  8808.  
  8809. The primary political divisions of most States are termed "counties." In        
  8810. Louisiana, these divisions are known as "parishes." In Alaska, which has no     
  8811. counties, the county equivalents are the organized "boroughs" and the           
  8812.  
  8813.                                                                      166
  8814. "census areas" that are delineated for statistical purposes by the State of     
  8815. Alaska and the Census Bureau. In four States (Maryland, Missouri, Nevada,       
  8816. and Virginia), there are one or more cities that are independent of any         
  8817. county organization and thus constitute primary divisions of their States.      
  8818. These cities are known as "independent cities" and are treated as               
  8819. equivalent to counties for statistical purposes. That part of Yellowstone       
  8820. National Park in Montana is treated as a county equivalent. The District of     
  8821. Columbia has no primary divisions, and the entire area is considered            
  8822. equivalent to a county for statistical purposes.                                
  8823.                                                                                 
  8824.   Each county and county equivalent is assigned a three-digit FIPS code         
  8825. that is unique within State. These codes are assigned in alphabetical           
  8826. order of county or county equivalent within State, except for the               
  8827. independent cities, which follow the listing of counties.                       
  8828.  
  8829.   B. 9. 6 Hierarchical Presentation                         
  8830.           -------------------------
  8831.  
  8832. A hierarchical geographic presentation shows the geographic entities            
  8833. in a superior/subordinate structure in census products. This structure          
  8834. is derived from the legal, administrative, or areal relationships of            
  8835. the entities. The hierarchical structure is depicted in report tables           
  8836. by means of indentation, and is explained for machine-readable media in         
  8837. the discussion of file structure in the geographic coverage portion of          
  8838. the abstract in the technical documentation. An example of hierarchical         
  8839. presentation is the "standard census geographic hierarchy":  block, within      
  8840. block group, within census tract or block numbering area, within place,         
  8841. within county subdivision, within county, within State, within division,        
  8842. within region, within the United States. Graphically, this is shown as:         
  8843.                                                                                 
  8844.  United States                                                                  
  8845.    Region                                                                       
  8846.      Division                                                                   
  8847.       State                                                                     
  8848.          County                                                                 
  8849.            County subdivision                                                   
  8850.             Place (or part)                                                     
  8851.                Census tract/block numbering area (or part)                      
  8852.                 Block group (or part)                                           
  8853.                    Block                                                        
  8854.  
  8855.   B. 9. 7 Zip codes                                         
  8856.           ---------
  8857.  
  8858. ZIP Codes are administrative units established by the United States             
  8859. Postal Service (USPS) for the distribution of mail. ZIP Codes serve             
  8860. addresses for the most efficient delivery of mail, and therefore                
  8861. generally do not respect political or census statistical area                   
  8862. boundaries. ZIP Codes usually do not have clearly identifiable                  
  8863. boundaries, often serve a continually changing area, are changed                
  8864. periodically to meet postal requirements, and do not cover all the land         
  8865. area of the United States. ZIP Codes are identified by five-digit codes         
  8866. assigned by the USPS. The first three digits identify a major city or           
  8867. sectional distribution center, and the last two digits generally                
  8868. signify a specific post office's delivery area or point. For the 1990           
  8869. census, ZIP Code data are tabulated for the five-digit codes in STF 3B.         
  8870.  
  8871.                                                                      167
  8872.  
  8873.   B.10 The STF1A file                                    
  8874.       --------------
  8875.  
  8876.  
  8877.   B.10. 1 File Segments                                     
  8878.           -------------
  8879.  
  8880. The file is segmented into 10 dBase III (.DBF) files, designated                
  8881. STF1A0ss.DBF through STF1A9ss.DBF where ss is the two-character State           
  8882. abbreviation.  The STF1A0 segment contains the full 67 field identification     
  8883. section.  The identification field names are shown in the Data Dictionary       
  8884. chapter of the technical documentation.  Segments STF1A1 through STF1A9         
  8885. each contain seven identification fields repeated from the STF1A0 segment.      
  8886. They are shown below.                                                           
  8887.                                                                                 
  8888. Identification Fields Common To All Segments                                    
  8889.                                                                                 
  8890.          SUMLEV                    Summary Level                                
  8891.          STATEFP                   State (FIPS)                                 
  8892.          CNTY                      County (FIPS)                                
  8893.          COUSUBFP                  County Subdivision (FIPS)                    
  8894.          PLACEFP                   Place (FIPS)                                 
  8895.          TRACTBNA                  Census Tract/Block Numbering Area            
  8896.          BLCKGR                    Block Group                                  
  8897.          LOGRECNU                  Logical Record Number                        
  8898.                                                                                 
  8899. The segments are divided as shown below.  Tables 12 and 13 go across            
  8900. segments.                                                                       
  8901.                                                                                 
  8902. Data Tables In Each Segment                                                     
  8903.                                                                                 
  8904.          STF1A0                    P1 - P10                                     
  8905.          STF1A1                    P11 - P12(pt.2)                              
  8906.          STF1A2                    P12(pt. 3) - P12(pt. 5)                      
  8907.          STF1A3                    P12(pt. 6) - P12(pt. 8)                      
  8908.          STF1A4                    P12(pt. 9) - P13(pt. 1)                      
  8909.          STF1A5                    P13(pt. 2) - P19                             
  8910.          STF1A6                    P20 - P35                                    
  8911.          STF1A7                    P36, H1 - H20                                
  8912.          STF1A8                    H21 - H40                                    
  8913.          STF1A9                    H41 - H55                                    
  8914.                                                                                 
  8915. Parts of Table P12                                                              
  8916.                                                                                 
  8917. (Each part contains 31 categories of age)                                       
  8918.                                                                                 
  8919.          Part 1                    White males                                  
  8920.          Part 2                    White females                                
  8921.          Part 3                    Black males                                  
  8922.          Part 4                    Black females                                
  8923.          Part 5                    American Indian, Eskimo or Aleut males       
  8924.          Part 6                    American Indian, Eskimo or Aleut females     
  8925.          Part 7                    Asian or Pacific Islander males              
  8926.          Part 8                    Asian or Pacific Islander females            
  8927.          Part 9                    Other race males                             
  8928.          Part 10                    Other race females                          
  8929.  
  8930.                                                                      168
  8931.                                                                                 
  8932. Parts of Table P13                                                              
  8933.                                                                                 
  8934. (Each part contains 31 categories of age)                                       
  8935.                                                                                 
  8936.          Part 1                    Hispanic origin males                        
  8937.          Part 2                    Hispanic origin females                      
  8938.                                                                                 
  8939. You can process all or some of the files.                                       
  8940.  
  8941.   B.10. 2 Field Names In Numeric Data Tables                
  8942.           ----------------------------------
  8943.  
  8944. Fields in numeric data tables are named according to a convention which         
  8945. identifies the tables and the sequence of the data item within the table.       
  8946. The 310 data items in P12, for example, are identified as P0120001 through      
  8947. P0120310.  The one data item in table H23A is identified as H023A001.           
  8948.                                                                                 
  8949. Components Of The Field Name                                                    
  8950.                                                                                 
  8951. Character 1                    P or H                                           
  8952. Character 2-4                  Table number; right justified with               
  8953.                                leading zeroes                                   
  8954. Character 5                    Sub-table letter; zero if not applicable         
  8955. Character 6-8                  Item number; right justified with                
  8956.                                leading zeroes                                   
  8957.  
  8958.   B.11  TIGER US Census Digital Map Data                 
  8959.       ---------------------------------
  8960.  
  8961. The 1990 Census TIGER/Line file provides digital data for all 1990 census       
  8962. map features and boundaries, the associated 1990 census final tabulation        
  8963. geographic area codes (such as 1990 census block numbers), and the codes        
  8964. for the January 1, 1990 legal and statistical areas on both sides of each       
  8965. line segment of every mapped feature.  This version also contains the final     
  8966. voting district codes and the 1990 census designated place codes.               
  8967.                                                                                 
  8968. The 1990 Census TIGER/Line files cover the entire United States, Puerto         
  8969. Rico, the Virgin Islands of the United States, American Samoa, Guam, the        
  8970. Northern Mariana Islands, Palau, the other Pacific entities that were part      
  8971. of the Trust Territory of the United States for the 1980 census (the            
  8972. Marshall Islands and the Federated States of Micronesia), and the Midway        
  8973. Islands (to provide complete mapping within the boundaries of the State of      
  8974. Hawaii).                                                                        
  8975.  
  8976.   B.12  TIGER files                                      
  8977.       ------------
  8978.  
  8979. The normal geographic coverage for a 1990 Census TIGER/Line file is a           
  8980. county.  The files can be combined to cover the whole Nation and its            
  8981. possessions.  Each 1990 Census TIGER/Line file consists of 12 record types      
  8982. that collectively contain geographic information (attributes) such as           
  8983. address ranges and ZIP codes for street segments (only in areas covered by      
  8984. the 1980 GBF/DIME-Files), names and codes of feature types, codes for legal     
  8985. and statistical entities, selected 1980 census geographic area codes,           
  8986. latitude/longitude coordinates of linear and point features, landmark           
  8987. features, area landmarks, and area and polygon boundaries.  The 12 record       
  8988. types are on the tape as 12 separate files.                                     
  8989.  
  8990.                                                                      169
  8991.                                                                                 
  8992.                                                                                 
  8993. The 1990 Census TIGER/Line file contains basic information for 1990 census      
  8994. geographic area codes, basic map features and their names, and address          
  8995. ranges in the form of 12 "Record Types."  The record types are as follows:      
  8996.                                                                                 
  8997.      1.     Basic Data Records (Individual Feature Segment Records)             
  8998.      2.     Shape Coordinate Points (Feature Shape Records)                     
  8999.      3.     Additional Decennial Census Geographic Area Codes                   
  9000.      4.     Index to Alternate Feature Names                                    
  9001.      5.     Feature Name List                                                   
  9002.      6.     Additional Address Range and ZIP Code(2) Information                
  9003.      7.     Landmark Features                                                   
  9004.      8.     Area Landmarks                                                      
  9005.      A.     Additional Polygon Geographic Area Codes                            
  9006.      I.     Area Boundaries                                                     
  9007.      P.     Polygon Location                                                    
  9008.      R.     Record Number Range                                                 
  9009.                                                                                 
  9010. Each segment record contains appropriate decennial census and, when             
  9011. appropriate, FIPS(1) geographic area codes, latitude/longitude coordinates      
  9012. for all line segments and point features, the name of the feature               
  9013. (including the relevant census feature class code identifying the segment       
  9014. by category), and, for areas formerly covered by the GBF/DIME-Files, the        
  9015. address ranges and the ZIP Code associated with those address ranges for        
  9016. each side of street segments.  For other areas, the TIGER/Line files do not     
  9017. contain address ranges or ZIP Codes.  The shape records provide coordinate      
  9018. values that describe the shape of those feature segments that are not           
  9019. straight.                                                                       
  9020.                                                                                 
  9021. Record types 1,2,3 and 7 are processed by OzGIS. The types used depend on       
  9022. the options chosen:                                                             
  9023.                                                                                 
  9024. Record Type 1:    Basic Data Record                                             
  9025.                                                                                 
  9026. Record Type 1 provides a single record for each unique line segment in the      
  9027. 1990 Census TIGER/Line file.  The end points of the line segments are           
  9028. expressed in latitude/longitude coordinate values in degrees and decimal        
  9029. fractions of a degree to six decimal places.  This record also contains         
  9030. address ranges and ZIP codes (in selected areas) and geographic area codes      
  9031. for each side of the line segment.  By convention, if one is standing at        
  9032. the "from" coordinate position facing the "to" coordinate position,             
  9033. data listed in the fields carrying a right qualifier would indeed be found      
  9034. to the right of the line segment.  Data users can collect the necessary         
  9035. segments to construct polygons and features that intersect from the             
  9036. information contained in this basic record.                                     
  9037.                                                                                 
  9038. Record Type 2:   Shape Coordinate Points                                        
  9039.                                                                                 
  9040. Record Type 2 provides an additional series of latitude and longitude           
  9041. coordinate values that describe the shape of each line segment that is not      
  9042. straight for the associated Record Type 1.  All coordinate values are           
  9043. expressed in degrees and decimal fractions of a degree of latitude and          
  9044. longitude.  The decimals are carried to six places to permit the                
  9045. representation of lines that are very close to one another.  If the segment     
  9046. in Record Type 1 is a straight line, there will not be a Record Type 2.         
  9047.                                                                                 
  9048. Record Type 3:   Additional Decennial Census Geographic Area Codes              
  9049.  
  9050.                                                                      170
  9051.                                                                                 
  9052. Record Type 3 includes the 1990 voting district codes provided to the           
  9053. Census Bureau for the 1990 Census Redistricting Data Program.  Record Type      
  9054. 3 also includes some 1980 census geographic area codes and 1990 census          
  9055. geographic area codes not included on Record Type 1.  The 1980 census block     
  9056. numbers are available only for areas covered by the 1980 GBF/DIME-Files.        
  9057. During the conversion of the 1980 GBF/DIME-Files to the TIGER data base         
  9058. format, some 1980 census block numbers may have been deleted or changed.        
  9059. Users are advised to check all 1980 census geographic area codes,               
  9060. especially any 1980 block numbers, before using them in a planned               
  9061. application.  The Census Bureau has not verified any of the 1980 census         
  9062. geographic area codes in these files.  There will be discrepancies between      
  9063. the geographic area boundaries and codes in these files and the 1980 census     
  9064. maps, which are the basis for the 1980 census tabulations.                      
  9065.                                                                                 
  9066. The TIGER/Line files may contain 1980 block numbers for portions of the         
  9067. country where the Census Bureau did not tabulate 1980 census data by block      
  9068. or block group.  These situations occur because these portions of the TIGER     
  9069. file originated from the 1980 GBF/DIME-Files that extended beyond the 1980      
  9070. block-numbered area.  Data users concerned about the validity of 1980 block     
  9071. numbers are advised to discard all 1980 block numbers that do not               
  9072. correspond to block numbers in the 1980 MARF or 1980 STF files.                 
  9073.                                                                                 
  9074. Record Type 6:   Additional Address Range and ZIP Code Data                     
  9075.                                                                                 
  9076. Record Type 6 provides additional address range information for a street        
  9077. segment when the information cannot be presented as a single address range      
  9078. (e.g., the house/building numbers are not uniformly arranged to form an         
  9079. address range).  Additional ZIP Codes, if any, also appear in Record Type 6     
  9080. for corresponding address ranges.  Record Type 6 appears only for those         
  9081. counties that have address ranges and ZIP Code information in the TIGER         
  9082. data base.  There is no assurance that the address ranges provided on           
  9083. Record Type 6 will be "shorter" than those appearing on Record Type 1.          
  9084. Data users must use Record Type 6 to obtain the complete picture of the         
  9085. potential address ranges along a segment.                                       
  9086.                                                                                 
  9087.                                                                                 
  9088. Record Type 7:   Landmark Features                                              
  9089.                                                                                 
  9090. Record Type 7 contains the area and point landmarks in the Census Bureau's      
  9091. TIGER data base.  During the extraction of this data, we assigned a             
  9092. temporary Landmark Identification Number that we use to link the landmark       
  9093. attributes to the polygons that comprise the landmark.  If there is no          
  9094. landmark in a county file, there will be no Record Type 7 or Record Type 8      
  9095. for that county file.                                                           
  9096.  
  9097.   B.13 TIGER Geographic Area Definitions                 
  9098.       ---------------------------------
  9099.  
  9100. United States - The 50 States and the District of Columbia.                     
  9101.                                                                                 
  9102. States and Statistically Equivalent Areas - The 50 States; in addition, we      
  9103. treat the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and each of the outlying           
  9104. areas-American Samoa, Guam, the Northern Mariana Islands, Palau, and the        
  9105. Virgin Islands of the United States-as statistical equivalents to States        
  9106. for presentation.  We also have TIGER/Line files for the Marshall Islands,      
  9107. the Federated States of Micronesia, and the Midway Islands.                     
  9108.                                                                                 
  9109.  
  9110.                                                                      171
  9111. Counties, Parishes, Statistically Equivalent Areas - The first-order            
  9112. divisions of each State, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the         
  9113. outlying areas:  counties for 48 States; parishes for Louisiana; boroughs       
  9114. and census areas for Alaska; independent cities in Maryland, Missouri,          
  9115. Nevada, and Virginia; Yellowstone National Park in Montana, "District of        
  9116. Columbia" for the District of Columbia, municipios in Puerto Rico; other        
  9117. entities in the outlying areas.                                                 
  9118.                                                                                 
  9119. Minor Civil Divisions (MCDs) - Legally defined subcounty areas such as          
  9120. towns and townships.  For the 1990 census, these are found in 28 States,        
  9121. Puerto Rico, and the outlying areas.                                            
  9122.                                                                                 
  9123. Sub-MCDs - Legally defined subdivisions of a minor civil division;              
  9124. specifically,  subbarrios in Puerto Rico, and municipal districts in the        
  9125. Federated States of Micronesia.                                                 
  9126.                                                                                 
  9127. Incorporated Places - Legal units incorporated as a city, town (excluding       
  9128. the New England States, New York, and Wisconsin), borough (excluding Alaska     
  9129. and New York), or village.                                                      
  9130.                                                                                 
  9131. American Indian Reservations - American Indian areas with boundaries            
  9132. established by treaty, statute, and/or executive or court order.                
  9133.                                                                                 
  9134. Alaska Native Regional Corporations (ANRCs) - Corporate entities                
  9135. established by the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act (P.L. 92-203) to         
  9136. carry out the business and non-profit operations established by and for         
  9137. Native Alaskans under the Act.  Twelve ANRCs have specific boundaries and       
  9138. cover the State of Alaska except for the Annette Islands Reserve.               
  9139.                                                                                 
  9140. Statistical Areas                                                               
  9141.                                                                                 
  9142. Alaska Native Village Statistical Areas (ANVSAs) - 1990 census statistical      
  9143. areas that delineate the settled area of each Alaska Native village (ANV).      
  9144. Officials of Alaska Native Regional Corporations (ANRCs) and other              
  9145. appropriate State officials delineated the ANVSAs for the Census Bureau for     
  9146. the sole purpose of presenting census data.                                     
  9147.                                                                                 
  9148. Tribal Designated Statistical Areas (TDSAs) - Geographic areas delineated       
  9149. for 1990 census data tabulation purposes by tribal officials of Federally       
  9150. and State-recognized tribes outside of Oklahoma that do not have a legally      
  9151. defined reservation.                                                            
  9152.                                                                                 
  9153. Tribal Jurisdiction Statistical Areas (TJSAs) - Geographic areas delineated     
  9154. for 1990 census data tabulation purposes by tribal officials in Oklahoma        
  9155. for Federally recognized tribes that do not have a legally defined              
  9156. reservation.                                                                    
  9157.                                                                                 
  9158. Census County Divisions (CCDs) - Areas delineated by the Census Bureau in       
  9159. cooperation with State and local officials in States where MCDs are not         
  9160. adequate for reporting subcounty statistics.                                    
  9161.                                                                                 
  9162. Unorganized Territories (UTs) - Areas delineated by the Census Bureau for       
  9163. those portions of a State with MCDs where MCDs do not exist or are not          
  9164. adequate for reporting subcounty statistics.                                    
  9165.                                                                                 
  9166. Census Designated Places (CDPs) - Densely settled population centers            
  9167. without legally defined corporate limits or corporate powers, defined in        
  9168. cooperation with State officials and local data users.                          
  9169.  
  9170.                                                                      172
  9171.                                                                                 
  9172. Census Tracts - Small, locally delineated statistical areas within selected     
  9173. counties, generally having stable boundaries and, when first established by     
  9174. local committees, designed to have relatively homogeneous demographic           
  9175. characteristics.                                                                
  9176.                                                                                 
  9177. Block Numbering Areas (BNAs) - Areas delineated by State governments or the     
  9178. Census Bureau for the purpose of grouping and numbering blocks in counties      
  9179. without census tracts.                                                          
  9180.                                                                                 
  9181. Census Blocks - Small, usually compact areas, usually bounded by streets        
  9182. and other prominent physical features as well as boundaries of legal areas      
  9183. for which the Census Bureau tabulates data.  Blocks do not cross county,        
  9184. census tract, or BNA boundaries.                                                
  9185.                                                                                 
  9186. Voting Districts (VTDs) - For the 1990 census, the term "voting district"       
  9187. replaces the 1980 census term "election precinct."  A voting district is        
  9188. any of a variety of areas (for example, election districts, precincts,          
  9189. legislative districts, wards) defined by State and local governments for        
  9190. purposes of elections.  The 1990 voting district codes that appear in the       
  9191. 1990 census version of the TIGER/Line files were supplied by the State          
  9192. under the 1990 Census Redistricting Data Program.  The boundaries of the        
  9193. voting districts recorded in the TIGER/Line files may represent pseudo-         
  9194. voting districts; the States were required to have voting districts follow      
  9195. 1990 census block boundaries, and therefore they may have had to relocate       
  9196. the boundaries of actual voting districts to a nearby feature used as a         
  9197. block boundary.  States had the option of participating in the program on a     
  9198. county-by-county basis.  Voting districts do not appear in all TIGER/Line       
  9199. files.                                                                          
  9200.  
  9201.   B.14 TIGER feature codes                               
  9202.       -------------------
  9203.  
  9204. Data can be extracted from the TIGER files and subset for display by            
  9205. feature codes.                                                                  
  9206.                                                                                 
  9207. Feature codes are derived from the Census Feature Class Codes (CFCC)            
  9208. by changing the leading alphabetic character by its position in the             
  9209. alphabet.                                                                       
  9210.                                                                                 
  9211. This is a series of codes that provides more detailed information on the        
  9212. classification of the line segment, such as class of road, class of stream,     
  9213. and so forth.                                                                   
  9214.                                                                                 
  9215. A list of these codes follows.                                                  
  9216.                                                                                 
  9217. CFCC    CLASSIFICATION A = ROAD FEATURES                                        
  9218.                                                                                 
  9219. 100     Road, Classification Unknown or Not Elsewhere Classified                
  9220. 101     Road, undivided                                                         
  9221. 102     Road, undivided, in tunnel                                              
  9222. 103     Road, undivided, underpassing                                           
  9223. 104     Road, undivided, rail line in center                                    
  9224. 105     Road, divided                                                           
  9225. 106     Road, divided, in tunnel                                                
  9226. 107     Road, divided, underpassing                                             
  9227. 108     Road, divided, rail line in center                                      
  9228.                                                                                 
  9229.  
  9230.                                                                      173
  9231. 110     Primary road, interstate highway and limited access road                
  9232. 111     Primary road, interstate highway and limited access road, undivided     
  9233. 112     Primary road, interstate highway and limited access road,               
  9234.          undivided, in tunnel                                                   
  9235. 113     Primary road, interstate highway and limited access road,               
  9236.          undivided, underpassing                                                
  9237. 114     Primary road, interstate highway and limited  access road,              
  9238.          undivided, rail line in center                                         
  9239. 115     Primary road, interstate highway and limited access road, divided       
  9240. 116     Primary road, interstate highway and limited access road, divided,      
  9241.          in tunnel                                                              
  9242. 117     Primary road, interstate highway and limited access road, divided,      
  9243.          underpassing                                                           
  9244. 118     Primary road, interstate highway and limited access road, divided,      
  9245.          rail line in center                                                    
  9246.                                                                                 
  9247. 120     Secondary road, U.S. highway not classified 110, and state roads        
  9248. 121     Secondary road, U.S. highway not classified 110, and state roads,       
  9249.          undivided                                                              
  9250. 122     Secondary road, U.S. highway not classified 110, and state roads,       
  9251.          undivided, in tunnel                                                   
  9252. 123     Secondary road, U.S. highway not classified 110, and state roads,       
  9253.          undivided, underpassing                                                
  9254. 124     Secondary road, U.S. highway not classified 110, and state roads,       
  9255.          undivided, rail line in center                                         
  9256. 125     Secondary road, U.S. highway not classified 110, and state roads,       
  9257.          divided                                                                
  9258. 126     Secondary road, U.S. highway not classified 110, and state roads,       
  9259.          divided, in tunnel                                                     
  9260. 127     Secondary road, U.S. highway not classified 110, and state roads,       
  9261.          divided, underpassing                                                  
  9262. 128     Secondary road, U.S. highway not classified 110, and state roads,       
  9263.          divided, rail line in center                                           
  9264.                                                                                 
  9265. 130     Connecting road, county roads, and roads not classified as 110 or       
  9266.          120                                                                    
  9267. 131     Connecting road, county roads, and roads not classified as 110 or       
  9268.          120, undivided                                                         
  9269. 132     Connecting road, county roads, and roads not classified as 110 or       
  9270.          120, undivided, in tunnel                                              
  9271. 133     Connecting road, county roads, and roads not classified as 110 or       
  9272.          120, undivided, underpassing                                           
  9273. 134     Connecting road, county roads, and roads not classified as 110 or       
  9274.          120, undivided, rail line in center                                    
  9275. 135     Connecting road, county roads, and roads not classified as 110 or       
  9276.          120, divided                                                           
  9277. 136     Connecting road, county roads, and roads not classified as 110 or       
  9278.          120, divided, in tunnel                                                
  9279. 137     Connecting road, county roads, and roads not classified as 110 or       
  9280.          120, divided, underpassing                                             
  9281. 138     Connecting road, county roads, and roads not classified as 110 or       
  9282.          120, divided, rail line in center                                      
  9283.                                                                                 
  9284. 140     Neighborhood roads, city streets and unimproved roads                   
  9285. 141     Neighborhood roads, city streets and unimproved roads, undivided        
  9286. 142     Neighborhood roads, city streets and unimproved roads, undivided,       
  9287.          in tunnel                                                              
  9288. 143     Neighborhood roads, city streets and unimproved roads, undivided,       
  9289.  
  9290.                                                                      174
  9291.          underpassing                                                           
  9292. 144     Neighborhood roads, city streets and unimproved roads, undivided,       
  9293.          rail line in center                                                    
  9294. 145     Neighborhood roads, city streets and unimproved roads, divided          
  9295. 146     Neighborhood roads, city streets and unimproved roads, divided, in      
  9296.          tunnel                                                                 
  9297. 147     Neighborhood roads, city streets and unimproved roads, divided,         
  9298.          underpassing                                                           
  9299. 148     Neighborhood roads, city streets and unimproved roads, divided,         
  9300.          rail line in center                                                    
  9301.                                                                                 
  9302. 150     Jeep trail, passable only by four-wheel drive (4WD) vehicle             
  9303. 151     Jeep trail, passable only by four-wheel drive (4WD) vehicle,            
  9304.          undivided                                                              
  9305. 152     Jeep trail, passable only by four-wheel drive (4WD) vehicle,            
  9306.          undivided, in tunnel                                                   
  9307. 153     Jeep trail, passable only by four-wheel drive (4WD) vehicle,            
  9308.          undivided, underpassing                                                
  9309.                                                                                 
  9310. 160     Special Road Feature                                                    
  9311. 161     Cul-de-sac                                                              
  9312. 162     Traffic circle                                                          
  9313. 163     Cloverleaf or interchange                                               
  9314. 164     Service drive                                                           
  9315. 165     Ferry crossing                                                          
  9316.                                                                                 
  9317. 170     Other Thoroughfare                                                      
  9318. 171     Walkway                                                                 
  9319. 172     Stairway                                                                
  9320. 173     Alley                                                                   
  9321.                                                                                 
  9322. NOTE:  In the portion of the TIGER/Line file prepared from the GBF/DIME-        
  9323. Files, the roads are classified as Class 4 roads with a few exceptions.         
  9324. The interstate highways that were identified by name as such in the             
  9325. GBF/DIME-File, are classified as Class 1 roads.  Also, in the GBF/DIME-File     
  9326. coverage areas, users may not find many roads with alternate names; if an       
  9327. alternate name is provided, it usually represents another local name and        
  9328. not a Route Number.                                                             
  9329.                                                                                 
  9330. CFCC    CLASSIFICATION B = RAIL FEATURES                                        
  9331.                                                                                 
  9332. 200     Railroad, Classification Unknown or Not Elsewhere Classified            
  9333. 201     Railroad track                                                          
  9334. 202     Railroad track, in tunnel                                               
  9335. 203     Railroad track, underpassing                                            
  9336.                                                                                 
  9337. 210     Railroad Main Track                                                     
  9338. 211     Railroad main track                                                     
  9339. 212     Railroad main track, in tunnel                                          
  9340. 213     Railroad main track, underpassing                                       
  9341.                                                                                 
  9342. 220     Railroad Spur Track                                                     
  9343. 221     Railroad spur track                                                     
  9344. 222     Railroad spur track, in tunnel                                          
  9345. 223     Railroad spur track, underpassing                                       
  9346.                                                                                 
  9347. 230     Railroad Yard                                                           
  9348. 231     Railroad yard                                                           
  9349.  
  9350.                                                                      175
  9351. 232     Railroad yard, in tunnel                                                
  9352. 233     Railroad yard, underpassing                                             
  9353.                                                                                 
  9354. 240     Railroad Ferry Crossing                                                 
  9355.                                                                                 
  9356. 250     Other Rail Feature                                                      
  9357. 251     Carline                                                                 
  9358. 252     Cog railroad, incline railway, or logging tram                          
  9359.                                                                                 
  9360. CFCC    CLASSIFICATION C = PIPELINES, POWER TRANSMISSION LINES, AND             
  9361.               MISCELLANEOUS TRANSPORTATION FEATURES                             
  9362.                                                                                 
  9363. 300     Special Transportation Feature, Classification Unknown or Not           
  9364.          Elsewhere Classified                                                   
  9365.                                                                                 
  9366. 310     Pipeline                                                                
  9367.                                                                                 
  9368. 320     Power Transmission Line                                                 
  9369.                                                                                 
  9370. 330     Other Special Transportation Feature                                    
  9371. 331     Aerial tramway, monorail, or ski lift                                   
  9372.                                                                                 
  9373. CFCC    CLASSIFICATION D = LANDMARK FEATURES                                    
  9374.                                                                                 
  9375. 400     Landmark Feature, Classification Unknown or Not Elsewhere               
  9376.          Classified                                                             
  9377.                                                                                 
  9378. 410     Military installation                                                   
  9379.                                                                                 
  9380. 420     Multihousehold and transient quarters                                   
  9381. 421     Apartment building or complex                                           
  9382. 422     Rooming or boarding house                                               
  9383. 423     Trailer court or mobile home park                                       
  9384. 424     Marina                                                                  
  9385. 425     Crew of vessel                                                          
  9386. 426     Housing facility for workers                                            
  9387. 427     Hotel, motel, resort, spa, YMCA, or YWCA                                
  9388. 428     Campground                                                              
  9389. 429     Shelter or mission                                                      
  9390.                                                                                 
  9391. 430     Custodial facility                                                      
  9392. 431     Hospital                                                                
  9393. 432     Halfway house                                                           
  9394. 433     Nursing home, retirement home, or home for the aged                     
  9395. 434     County home or poor farm                                                
  9396. 435     Orphanage                                                               
  9397. 436     Jail or detention center                                                
  9398. 437     Federal penitentiary, state prison, or prison farm                      
  9399.                                                                                 
  9400. 440     Educational or religious institution                                    
  9401. 441     Sorority or fraternity                                                  
  9402. 442     Convent or monastery                                                    
  9403. 443     Educational institution                                                 
  9404. 444     Religious institution                                                   
  9405.                                                                                 
  9406. 450     Transportation terminal                                                 
  9407. 451     Airport or airfield                                                     
  9408. 452     Train station                                                           
  9409.  
  9410.                                                                      176
  9411. 453     Bus terminal                                                            
  9412. 454     Marine terminal                                                         
  9413. 455     Seaplane anchorage                                                      
  9414.                                                                                 
  9415. 460     Employment center                                                       
  9416. 461     Shopping center or major retail center                                  
  9417. 462     Industrial building or industrial park                                  
  9418. 463     Office building or office park                                          
  9419. 464     Amusement center                                                        
  9420. 465     Government center                                                       
  9421. 466     Other employment center                                                 
  9422.                                                                                 
  9423. 470     Tower                                                                   
  9424. 471     Lookout tower                                                           
  9425.                                                                                 
  9426. 480     Open space                                                              
  9427. 481     Golf course                                                             
  9428. 482     Cemetery                                                                
  9429. 483     National park or forest                                                 
  9430. 484     Other federal land                                                      
  9431. 485     State or local park or forest                                           
  9432.                                                                                 
  9433. 490     Special purpose landmark                                                
  9434. 491     Post office box ZIP code                                                
  9435.                                                                                 
  9436. CFCC    CLASSIFICATION E = OTHER PHYSICAL FEATURES                              
  9437.                                                                                 
  9438. 500     Physical Feature, Classification Unknown or Not Elsewhere               
  9439.          Classified                                                             
  9440.                                                                                 
  9441. 510     Fence line                                                              
  9442. 520     Topographic feature                                                     
  9443. 521     Ridge line                                                              
  9444. 522     Mountain peak                                                           
  9445.                                                                                 
  9446. CFCC    CLASSIFICATION F = NONVISIBLE BOUNDARIES                                
  9447.                                                                                 
  9448. 600     Nonvisible Boundary, Classification unknown or not Elsewhere            
  9449.          Classified                                                             
  9450.                                                                                 
  9451. 610     Nonvisible Political Boundary                                           
  9452. 611     Offset corporate boundary                                               
  9453. 612     Corporate Corridor                                                      
  9454. 613     Nonvisible interpolated boundary, polygon definition line for           
  9455.          hydrological areas                                                     
  9456.                                                                                 
  9457. 620     Feature Extension, Not Otherwise Classified                             
  9458. 621     Automated extension                                                     
  9459. 622     Irregular block extension                                               
  9460. 623     Closure extension                                                       
  9461. 624     Nonvisible separation line                                              
  9462. 625     Nonvisible corporate corridor centerline                                
  9463.                                                                                 
  9464. 630     Point-to-Point Line                                                     
  9465.                                                                                 
  9466. 640     Property Line                                                           
  9467.                                                                                 
  9468. 650     ZIP Code Boundary                                                       
  9469.  
  9470.                                                                      177
  9471.                                                                                 
  9472. 660     Map Edge                                                                
  9473.                                                                                 
  9474. 670     Statistical Boundary                                                    
  9475. 671     1980 Statistical Boundary                                               
  9476. 672     1990 Block Boundary                                                     
  9477. 673     1990 Statistical Boundary                                               
  9478. 674     1990 Statistical Boundary, Tabulation Areas Only                        
  9479.                                                                                 
  9480. CFCC    CLASSIFICATION H = HYDROGRAPHIC FEATURES                                
  9481.                                                                                 
  9482. 800     Water Feature, Classification Unknown or Not Elsewhere Classified       
  9483.                                                                                 
  9484. 801     Shoreline of perennial water feature                                    
  9485. 802     Shoreline of intermittent water feature                                 
  9486.                                                                                 
  9487. 810     Stream                                                                  
  9488. 811     Perennial stream                                                        
  9489. 812     Intermittent stream or wash                                             
  9490. 813     Braided stream                                                          
  9491.                                                                                 
  9492. 820     Canal, Ditch, or Aqueduct                                               
  9493. 821     Perennial canal, ditch, or aqueduct                                     
  9494. 822     Intermittent canal, ditch, or aqueduct                                  
  9495.                                                                                 
  9496. 830     Lake or pond                                                            
  9497. 831     Perennial lake or pond                                                  
  9498. 832     Intermittent lake or pond                                               
  9499.                                                                                 
  9500. 840     Reservoir                                                               
  9501. 841     Perennial reservoir                                                     
  9502. 842     Intermittent reservoir                                                  
  9503.                                                                                 
  9504. 850     Bay, Estuary, Gulf, Sound, Sea, or Ocean                                
  9505. 851     Bay, estuary, gulf, or sound                                            
  9506. 853     Sea or ocean                                                            
  9507.                                                                                 
  9508. 860     Gravel Pit or Quarry Filled With Water                                  
  9509.                                                                                 
  9510. 870     Nonvisible Water Area Definition Boundary                               
  9511. 871     USGS closure line                                                       
  9512. 872     Census computed center line                                             
  9513. 873     Census international water boundary, 10-mile limit, area                
  9514.          measurement line                                                       
  9515. 874     Census water boundary, inland or coastal or Great Lakes                 
  9516. 875     3-mile limit water boundary                                             
  9517.                                                                                 
  9518. 880     Special Water Feature                                                   
  9519. 881     Glacier                                                                 
  9520.                                                                                 
  9521.  
  9522.                                                                      178
  9523.                      C. CONFIGURING OZGIS                                 
  9524.                        =================
  9525.  
  9526.                                                                                 
  9527.                                                                                 
  9528. This appendix provides additional information about configuring OzGIS.          
  9529.                                                                                 
  9530. You should read the the information in the early chapter first as that provides 
  9531. most of the information you need.                                               
  9532.                                                                                 
  9533.                                                                                 
  9534.  
  9535.   C. 1 Hardcopy configuration for  OzMap                 
  9536.       ---------------------------------
  9537.  
  9538. This section is applicable if you want to output maps to printers or            
  9539. plotters with the OzMap and Vector programs.                                    
  9540.                                                                                 
  9541. The configuration file \ozgis\sciplot.ini has to be set up if OzMap is going to 
  9542. be used to produce hardcopy maps. The file looks like:                          
  9543.                                                                                 
  9544. VGA                                  VGA or EGA                                 
  9545. 40.0      0                          HP Plotter metafile                        
  9546. 18.0      1                          Dot-matrix printer metafile                
  9547. 18.0      1                          Postscript Ascii metafile                  
  9548. 18.0      1                          Encapsulated Postscript file               
  9549. 18.0      0                          HPGL file                                  
  9550. 18.0      1                          CGM file                                   
  9551. 18.0      0                          WordPerfect graphics file                  
  9552. 18.0      1 COM1                     On-line Apple Laser Writer                 
  9553. 40.0      0 LPT1                     On-line HP plotter                         
  9554. 00C3                                 device mode & serial modes HEXIDECIMAL     
  9555.                                                                                 
  9556. The first column is the width of the drawing surface in cm. Values will need to 
  9557. be set for your plotter or printer.                                             
  9558.                                                                                 
  9559. The second column is the drawing line width for Postscript, Encapsulated        
  9560. Postscript, Apple LaserWriter, Computer Graphics Metafile, dot matrix, and HP   
  9561. LaserJet printers.                                                              
  9562. 0  = Ignore parameter                                                           
  9563. 1  = 1 device space units (1-10 Valid)                                          
  9564.                                                                                 
  9565. The third column is the port used for printers and plotters:                    
  9566. 'COM' - Primary Serial Port                                                     
  9567. 'COM2'- Secondary Serial Port                                                   
  9568. 'LPT1'- Primary Parallel Port                                                   
  9569. 'LPT2'- Secondary Parallel Port                                                 
  9570.                                                                                 
  9571. The value at the bottom is a hexidecimal set of flags for setting the port for  
  9572. on-line printers or plotters.                                                   
  9573.                                                                                 
  9574. The packed coded device mode word with the device mode byte in the most         
  9575. significant part of the integer, and the serial modest byte in the least        
  9576. significant part of the integer.                                                
  9577.                                                                                 
  9578. Format of the integer = [device mode | serial modeset].                         
  9579.                                                                                 
  9580.  
  9581.                                                                      179
  9582. Device mode byte description:  [bits]                                           
  9583. 76543210                                                                        
  9584. _______0  = XON/XOFF flow control                                               
  9585. _______1  = Hardware flow control on DSR line                                   
  9586. ______0_  = Bell with FRAME or PLTEND                                           
  9587. ______1_  = No bell with FRAME or PLTEND                                        
  9588. _____0__  = Cr with FRAME or PLTEND                                             
  9589. _____1__  = No cr with FRAME or PLTEND                                          
  9590. ____0___  = Check for break in PLOT                                             
  9591. ____1___  = No check for break in PLOT                                          
  9592. ___0____  = HP pen plotter handshake init                                       
  9593. ___1____  = No HP pen plotter handshake init                                    
  9594.                                                                                 
  9595. Serial modeset byte description:  [bits]                                        
  9596. 7      6   5  4    3        2        1    0                                     
  9597. --Baud Rate-- -Parity-  -Stop Bits- -Char Length-                               
  9598. 000 -   110  00 - None  0  - 1   10  - 7 Bits                                   
  9599. 001 -   300  01 - Odd   1  - 2   11  - 8 Bits                                   
  9600. 010 -   600  11 - Even                                                          
  9601. 011 -  1200                                                                     
  9602. 100 -  2400                                                                     
  9603. 101 -  4800                                                                     
  9604. 110 -  9600                                                                     
  9605. 111 - 19200                                                                     
  9606.                                                                                 
  9607. For example, 9600 baud, no parity, 1 stop bit, 8 bits is                        
  9608.                                                                                 
  9609. 110 00 0 11 = C3 hex = 195 decimal                                              
  9610.                                                                                 
  9611.  
  9612.   C. 2 Plotter setup                                     
  9613.       -------------
  9614.  
  9615.                                                                                 
  9616. Plotter pens should agree with those defined in device files. The standard      
  9617. order is:                                                                       
  9618. BLACK        PEN 1                                                              
  9619. BLUE         PEN 2                                                              
  9620. GREEN        PEN 3                                                              
  9621. RED          PEN 4                                                              
  9622. YELLOW       PEN 5  The last four dont matter that much!                        
  9623. MAGENTA      PEN 6                                                              
  9624. CYAN         PEN 7                                                              
  9625. GREY         PEN 8                                                              
  9626.                                                                                 
  9627. If this order conflicts with other packages in use the device files can be      
  9628. modified. The order of the first four pens is particularly important for colour 
  9629. simulation, although as long as all pens have different colours the final maps  
  9630. will probably be acceptable.                                                    
  9631.                                                                                 
  9632.                                                                                 
  9633. Plotters will usually use software handshaking.                                 
  9634.                                                                                 
  9635. HP pen plotters require a serial interface between the  Personal Computer and   
  9636. the HP pen plotter. On the PC side, a cable with a D9 or D25 connector should be
  9637. connected to a  serial port or asynchronous adapter port. On the HP pen plotter,
  9638. a cable with a D25 connector should be connected to the computer/modem port. A  
  9639. detailed specification of the way the  cable should be wired follows:           
  9640.  
  9641.                                                                      180
  9642.                                                                                 
  9643. Serial cable wiring for HP pen plotters: 7440A, 7470A, 7475A, 7550A             
  9644.                                                                                 
  9645.  ----------------------------             -----------------------               
  9646. | Personal Computer          |           | HP Pen Plotter        |              
  9647. | [Serial I/O Port or        |           | [Computer/modem port] |              
  9648. | Asynchronous Adapter Port] |           |                       |              
  9649.  ----------------------------              ----------------------               
  9650.                                                                                 
  9651.       Transmit Data     *-------------------*   Receive Data                    
  9652.        [D9/Pin-3, or                             [D25/Pin-3]                    
  9653.         D25/Pin-2]                                                              
  9654.                                                                                 
  9655.       Receive Data      *-------------------*   Transmit Data                   
  9656.        [D9/Pin-2, or                             [D25/Pin-2]                    
  9657.         D25/Pin-3]                                                              
  9658.                                                                                 
  9659.       Signal Ground     *-------------------*   Signal Ground                   
  9660.        [D9/Pin-5, or                             [D25/Pin-7]                    
  9661.         D25/Pin-7]                                                              
  9662.                                                                                 
  9663.       Data Set Ready    *-----*-------------*   Data Terminal Ready             
  9664.        [D9/Pin-6, or          |                  [D25/Pin-20]                   
  9665.         D25/Pin-6]            |                                                 
  9666.                               |                                                 
  9667.       Clear-To-Send     *-----*                                                 
  9668.        [D9/Pin-8, or                                                            
  9669.         D25/Pin-5]                                                              
  9670.                                                                                 
  9671.       Data Terminal Rdy *--------------*-----*  Data Set Ready                  
  9672.        [D9/Pin-4, or                   |         [D25/Pin-6]                    
  9673.         D25/Pin-20]                    |                                        
  9674.                                        |                                        
  9675.                                        *-----*  Clear-To-Send                   
  9676.                                                  [D25/Pin-5]                    
  9677.                                                                                 
  9678. Please note that the previous wiring diagram is necessary if full hardware      
  9679. handshake is desired. If the user intends to  use only software handshake       
  9680. (XON/XOFF), then only three wires  are required. For software handshake the only
  9681. connections  required are: signal ground, receive data, and transmit data.      
  9682.                                                                                 
  9683.      There are certain restrictions when an HP pen plotter is used as the plot  
  9684. device. Not all HP pen plotters possess equal capability! SciPlot only supports 
  9685. the 7470A, the 7475A, and the 7550A HP Pen Plotter. There are enough control    
  9686. mechanisms in SciPlot to allow the use of others though.  Please note the       
  9687. following:                                                                      
  9688.                                                                                 
  9689.  The "INIT=ON" command in the VECTOR.CFG file will send initialization commands 
  9690. in the I/O stream to the  plotter when VECTOR is executed. Older HP plotters    
  9691. will  produce errors on receipt of these handshake mode commands.  If this      
  9692. happens, set "INIT=OFF" in the VECTOR.CFG file, and the offending commands will 
  9693. be deleted from the stream.                                                     
  9694.                                                                                 
  9695.                                                                                 
  9696.  
  9697.                                                                      181
  9698.                      D. GLOSSARY OF TERMS                                 
  9699.                        =================
  9700.  
  9701. The purpose of this Appendix is to provide definitions for a number of          
  9702. terms used within this Guide.  Most of these terms are commonly used words      
  9703. or phrases which have taken on a more precise technical meaning in one of       
  9704. the areas spanned by the OzGIS system.  Technical terms have been               
  9705. borrowed from the jargon of statistics, data processing, computer software      
  9706. and hardware, cartography, and graphic arts.  Because of the diversity of       
  9707. these disciplines, it is unlikely that a potential OzGIS user will have         
  9708. developed a level of expertise in each.  This glossary should provide most      
  9709. of the information necessary for communicating the basic concepts of            
  9710. OzGIS.                                                                          
  9711.                                                                                 
  9712. The glossary is available on-line, and is accessed by typing 'G' to a menu      
  9713. selection request.                                                              
  9714.                                                                                 
  9715. Area - 1) A measurement of the size of a geographical region whose shape is     
  9716.    displayed on the OzGIS monitor.  2) An arbitrary portion of the face         
  9717.    of the monitor.                                                              
  9718.                                                                                 
  9719. Attribute - A general term for the variable associated with a set of            
  9720.    geographic zones, lines or sites to be processed by OzGIS.                   
  9721.    Attributes may be variates, statistics or simply data collected for each     
  9722.    item.  Note that the modes of display for an attribute are usually           
  9723.    referred to as "single variate" or "bi-variate".  See also Variate and       
  9724.    Statistic.                                                                   
  9725.                                                                                 
  9726. Background - The informationless area displayed on the monitor around a map     
  9727.    and its associated components.  Usually given a user selected, neutral       
  9728.    colour such as black or white.                                               
  9729.                                                                                 
  9730. Bit - A unit of information representing the value (either 1 or 0) of a         
  9731.    single binary digit.                                                         
  9732.                                                                                 
  9733. Bivariate - A display of the relative distribution of two different sets        
  9734.    of statistics on the same map.  It must be noted that no relationship        
  9735.    between the two statistics is implied by the display.  For example, if       
  9736.    the distribution of little old ladies is displayed simultaneously with       
  9737.    the distribution of cricket players, the result is not a display of the      
  9738.    distribution of little old ladies who play cricket.  See also Variate.       
  9739.                                                                                 
  9740. Boundary - A set of lines displayed on the monitor to represent the edges       
  9741.    of polygons defined to the system.  Often the same as zone edges.            
  9742.                                                                                 
  9743. Byte - A group of eight bits.  See also Bit.                                    
  9744.                                                                                 
  9745. Catchment - The region of influence around a site e.g. suburbs around a         
  9746.    shopping centre where most of the customers live.                            
  9747.                                                                                 
  9748.                                                                                 
  9749. Character - A single symbolic pattern which may be displayed on either the      
  9750.    monitor or terminal.  It may be alphabetic, numeric, or punctuational,       
  9751.    as the normal symbols encountered on a typical typewriter keyboard, or a     
  9752.    special symbol generated for display as an entity, such as a square root     
  9753.    symbol.                                                                      
  9754.                                                                                 
  9755.  
  9756.                                                                      182
  9757. Choropleth Map - A map portraying the values of an attribute averaged over      
  9758.    data collection units (or zones) and represented by a symbol covering        
  9759.    the entire unit.  A map displayed by OzGIS represents the zones by a         
  9760.    uniform colour.                                                              
  9761.                                                                                 
  9762. Class - A convenient subdivision of the total range of values of a              
  9763.    particular statistical variate.  Classes are usually chosen to make          
  9764.    computations or analyses less labourious, or to make the results of such     
  9765.    analyses more obvious or meaningful.  For example, the range of a set of     
  9766.    values might be divided into ten equal classes in order to highlight         
  9767.    items in the top ten percent.  See also Variate, Class Boundary, Class       
  9768.    Interval and Class Number.                                                   
  9769.                                                                                 
  9770. Class Boundary - The special values of variates which determine the upper       
  9771.    and lower limits of the range of a class.  See also Class.                   
  9772.                                                                                 
  9773. Class Interval - The range of variate values between the upper and lower        
  9774.    limits of the class.  See also Class.                                        
  9775.                                                                                 
  9776. Class Number - A cardinal number assigned to each class into which a            
  9777.    particular statistical range has been divided.  Conventionally, the          
  9778.    class whose members have the lowest magnitude is assigned number 1, with     
  9779.    class numbers increasing uniformly as the magnitude of class values          
  9780.    increases.  See also Class.                                                  
  9781.                                                                                 
  9782. Colour - One of the combinations of blue, green, and red which may be           
  9783.    specified for display on the monitor.  The total number of colours           
  9784.    available depends on the display system.                                     
  9785.                                                                                 
  9786. Colour Space - The range of colours which may be specified for display on       
  9787.    the colour monitor.  Since the colours are specified as values of blue,      
  9788.    green, and red, it is convenient to think of the colour space as a cube      
  9789.    located on a standard three dimensional coordinate system.  Black is         
  9790.    placed at the origin, with each of the x, y and z axes representing          
  9791.    blue, green, and red, respectively.  The range of possible values is 0.0     
  9792.    to 1.0 on each axis of the cube.                                             
  9793.                                                                                 
  9794. Continuous Colour - A method of representating statistical values               
  9795.    associated with map zones by graduating zone colours to correspond with      
  9796.    changes in statistical value.  From a user defined, or default, sequence     
  9797.    of colours, OzGIS generates the intermediate colours to provide a            
  9798.    12 colour graduated path through the colour space.  The statistic to be      
  9799.    represented is quantized into 12 equal value classes, and the classes        
  9800.    are assigned colours from the generated colour sequence.  This allows        
  9801.    small changes in statistical value to be represented by subtle changes       
  9802.    in colour, while large changes in value may be visually observed as          
  9803.    significant colour differences.                                              
  9804.                                                                                 
  9805.                                                                                 
  9806. Controller - A general term applied to a piece of intermediate equipment in     
  9807.    the data path between the electrical signals of a processor and their        
  9808.    physical realization in a peripheral device.  Within OzGIS, the term         
  9809.    will most often be used for the Color Display Controller.                    
  9810.    It will be used to a lesser extent to describe interface controllers for     
  9811.    the various disc and tape drives.                                            
  9812.                                                                                 
  9813. Coordinate - One of a pair of numbers which designates the location of a        
  9814.    geographic point with respect to another known point.  Geographic files      
  9815.  
  9816.                                                                      183
  9817.    for entry into the system under OzGIS must have their points                 
  9818.    specified in appropriately scaled and formatted coordinates.  The            
  9819.    coordinates specified by the user are converted by OzGIS for display         
  9820.    on the monitor.  On the monitor screen, the origin is in the lower left      
  9821.    hand corner of the viewing area.  The coordinates of a point on the          
  9822.    monitor screen are specified by their distance right and up from the         
  9823.    origin                                                                       
  9824.                                                                                 
  9825. Crosshair Cursor - A pair of lines at right angles to each other which is       
  9826.    displayed on the monitor to designate the location of a certain point of     
  9827.    interest.  Under most circumstances, the location of the crosshair           
  9828.    cursor may be controlled by movements of the mouse.  See also Box            
  9829.    Cursor, and Joystick.                                                        
  9830.                                                                                 
  9831. Data - Numerical values associated with certain physical phenomena, such as     
  9832.    128 cm long, 14 years old, or 43 kangaroos.  As a generality,                
  9833.    OzGIS was not designed to handle data, but rather the statistics             
  9834.    derived from data, such as average length, medium age, or number of          
  9835.    kangaroos per hectare.  See also Statistics.                                 
  9836.                                                                                 
  9837. Decile - One of the nine data values which divide the range of a variate        
  9838.    into ten equal sized classes.  See also Quantile and Percentile.             
  9839.                                                                                 
  9840. Default - A set of parameters automatically selected by OzGIS in the            
  9841.    absence of any stated preference by the user.  The actual default            
  9842.    parameters may be defined by the user in the users default file.  For        
  9843.    example, OzGIS may initially display a map by arbitrarily selecting          
  9844.    zone colours from a palette of possible shades which the user selected       
  9845.    previously.  After this default colouring, the user may wish to change       
  9846.    some particular zone colour to improve the appearance of the display.        
  9847.                                                                                 
  9848. Disc - An electronic device for storing digital data on a rotating plate        
  9849.    coated with magnetic material.  See also Controller.                         
  9850.                                                                                 
  9851. Display - As a verb, the act of presenting information on the monitor or        
  9852.    terminal for the purpose of visually communicating that information to       
  9853.    the user.  This includes all the procedures necessary to correctly           
  9854.    present the information in a format suitable for both the equipment and      
  9855.    the viewer.  Example:  "A map is displayed on the monitor, while a menu      
  9856.    is displayed on the terminal".                                               
  9857.                                                                                 
  9858.                                                                                 
  9859.    As a noun, the presentation which is visually perceived when a user          
  9860.    looks at the screen of the monitor or terminal;  the total information       
  9861.    content on the screen.  Examples:  "The terminal display indicates the       
  9862.    options possible now";  "This map display is too red".  See also Monitor     
  9863.    and Terminal.                                                                
  9864.                                                                                 
  9865. Display Elements - The components or items of a display on the OzGIS            
  9866.    monitor;  for example, legend, title, image map, boundaries, image           
  9867.    symbols, histograms.                                                         
  9868.                                                                                 
  9869. Distribution - The manner in which a number of samples of data are spread       
  9870.    across the range of possible values.  May be a subjective statement,         
  9871.    such as:  "These data appear to have an even distribution".  More often,     
  9872.    some quantifiable measure will be given such as:  "These data have a         
  9873.    normal distribution with a mean of 40 and standard deviation of 3".          
  9874.    Sometimes, distribution information will be presented in graphical form,     
  9875.  
  9876.                                                                      184
  9877.    such as a histogram or scatter diagram.                                      
  9878.                                                                                 
  9879. Equal Value Quantization - A method of dividing the range of values of a        
  9880.    statistical variate into a number of classes where the magnitude of the      
  9881.    range of each class is the same.  See also Class.                            
  9882.                                                                                 
  9883. Excluded Zone - A zone displayed on the map and coloured with a special         
  9884.    shade indicating that it has not been used for quantization or has been      
  9885.    omitted from the area of interest.                                           
  9886.                                                                                 
  9887. File - A number of data items grouped together and considered as a unit for     
  9888.    convenience of storage and retrieval by a computer.  Within OzGIS,           
  9889.    such files are stored as distinct entities on disk.  Files are               
  9890.    identified by media designation, name, and type.  The OzGIS user             
  9891.    normally supplies only the file name, but the storage media may also be      
  9892.    specified.  The file type is supplied by the system.  The same name may      
  9893.    be used for files of different types, but within a particular type, no       
  9894.    two files may have the same name.                                            
  9895.                                                                                 
  9896. Frequency - A statistical term referring to the number of members of a          
  9897.    population falling into a specified class.  See also Class.                  
  9898.                                                                                 
  9899. Geographic Data - Digitized map data which are referenced to a geographic       
  9900.    (or spatial) coordinate system, usually a map projection.                    
  9901.                                                                                 
  9902. Graphics - Data which can be displayed on the monitor in terms of lines         
  9903.    points and text, as opposed to colouring and filling regions of the          
  9904.    screen.  Used to refer to geographic and symbol data.                        
  9905.                                                                                 
  9906. Histogram - A type of bar graph in which vertical rectangles are erected on     
  9907.    the horizontal axis with the height of each bar representing the             
  9908.    frequency, and the width representing the corresponding class interval,      
  9909.    for each of the classes of a particular variate.  OzGIS can display          
  9910.    such statistical information on the monitor.  See also Scatter Diagram,      
  9911.    and Class.                                                                   
  9912.                                                                                 
  9913.                                                                                 
  9914. Information - The subjective knowledge which may be associated with an          
  9915.    objective set of data.  The ages and locations of children are data;         
  9916.    the distribution of school age children is statistic;  where the schools     
  9917.    should be built is information.  See also Data and Statistics.               
  9918.                                                                                 
  9919. Interval - The numerical distance between the upper and lower limits of a       
  9920.    class.                                                                       
  9921.                                                                                 
  9922. Joystick - An electro-mechanical device which converts the positions of a       
  9923.    small lever into electrical voltages.  The voltages are further              
  9924.    converted into digital signals which are used by the PDP11 to                
  9925.    position various cursor patterns on the monitor screen.  See also Box        
  9926.    Cursor, and Crosshair Cursor.                                                
  9927.                                                                                 
  9928. Legend - A display on the monitor which indicates the correspondence            
  9929.    between the statistical values and their associated colours or symbols       
  9930.    as defined for a particular map.  The legend usually occupies                
  9931.    approximately the rightmost one fifth of the viewing area of the monitor     
  9932.    and has two general forms, single variate and bivariate.  One type of        
  9933.    single variate legend consists of a column of coloured rectangles beside     
  9934.    which are numbers indicating the corresponding class boundaries for          
  9935.  
  9936.                                                                      185
  9937.    those colours.  The other is a rectangular column with colours gradually     
  9938.    changing from top to bottom, and an upper and lower number indicating        
  9939.    the range across which the "Continous Colour" varies.  The bivariate         
  9940.    legend consists of a 45 degree parallelogram divided left to right and       
  9941.    up and down into coloured smaller parallelograms.  A set of numbers          
  9942.    along the left side indicates the class boundaries of the primary            
  9943.    variate, while similar numbers across the upper side indicate the            
  9944.    secondary variate class boundaries.                                          
  9945.                                                                                 
  9946. Line - This term has three special meanings within OzGIS in addition to         
  9947.    its normal English usage.  (1) Any set of contiguous segments comprising     
  9948.    the section of a zone boundary which has one zone on its right and a         
  9949.    second zone on its left as part of a map.  (2) Any contiguous set of         
  9950.    segments as part of a graphics display.  (3) A set of alpha-numeric          
  9951.    characters meant to be displayed as one row on either the monitor or the     
  9952.    terminal.                                                                    
  9953.                                                                                 
  9954. Location - The position of a datum point, or pixel, on the monitor screen.      
  9955.    This is given by its x and y coordinates, with the origin in the lower       
  9956.    left hand corner.  The range of values depends on the display system.        
  9957.                                                                                 
  9958. Lookup Table (LUT) - A table in the display system which can modify the         
  9959.    value in memory for display purposes.                                        
  9960.                                                                                 
  9961. Map - Geographic data which can be displayed on the monitor by colouring        
  9962.    and filling regions of the screen or as lines or symbols.                    
  9963.                                                                                 
  9964. Map Projection - Refers to the coordinate system used for processing the        
  9965.    display of a map.                                                            
  9966.                                                                                 
  9967.                                                                                 
  9968. Markers - Special characters or symbols which may be displayed on the           
  9969.    monitor to identify locations of points.  For example, aircraft              
  9970.    symbols to indicate the location of airports.  Different sized markers       
  9971.    are used to show the classification of site attribute data.                  
  9972.                                                                                 
  9973. Mean - The arithmetic average of a set of data values.                          
  9974.                                                                                 
  9975. Memory - A portion of the OzGIS hardware used for the storage of data           
  9976.    by the altering of the electrical state of the appropriate circuitry.        
  9977.                                                                                 
  9978. Menu - An itemized list of alternative actions which might be selected          
  9979.    within OzGIS.  Menus are displayed on the terminal.  The terminal            
  9980.    keyboard is used to enter selections from the options listed on the          
  9981.    menu.  The sequence of menu items which is selected controls the "flow"      
  9982.    of the OzGIS program through its various tasks.                              
  9983.                                                                                 
  9984. Monitor - The electronic equipment, resembling a colour television              
  9985.    receiver, on which maps and graphics are displayed.                          
  9986.                                                                                 
  9987. Nested Means - A quantization method in which classes are generated by          
  9988.    dividing each variate range into two classes about the mean for that         
  9989.    range.  For example, the central class limit is set at the overall mean,     
  9990.    then the upper and lower classes are each divided at the means of the        
  9991.    two parts, giving four classes.  This process may be repeated, giving        
  9992.    eight classes.                                                               
  9993.                                                                                 
  9994. Operating System - Computer software provided to facilitate usage of the        
  9995.  
  9996.                                                                      186
  9997.    various computer resources available within the OzGIS system.                
  9998.                                                                                 
  9999. Overlay - As a noun, overlay refers to graphic data written on top of the       
  10000.    existing display.  This is displayed on the monitor as though placed         
  10001.    between the previous display and the viewer.  Overlays generally are         
  10002.    entered in the refresh memory in single bit planes.                          
  10003.    As a verb, overlay refers to the act of adding graphics data to a            
  10004.    display by putting it "on top of" the previous display.                      
  10005.                                                                                 
  10006. Palette - An array of coloured rectangles which is displayed on the monitor     
  10007.    at certain stages of OzGIS.  The palette shows a range of colours            
  10008.    which are available for selection by the user.  Palettes are held as         
  10009.    files within OzGIS.  Several palette files are provided as part of           
  10010.    the software package.                                                        
  10011.                                                                                 
  10012. Parameter - A general term referring to a physical characteristic which may     
  10013.    be measured or quantified in some way, even though the precise value of      
  10014.    that measurement may be unknown in specific instances.  For example, age     
  10015.    is a parameter of human beings.                                              
  10016.                                                                                 
  10017. Percentile - One of the set of 99 values which divide the range of a            
  10018.    statistic into 100 equal sized classes.                                      
  10019.                                                                                 
  10020. Peripherals - Items of auxillary equipment added to a computer to enhance       
  10021.    its performance.  These include such items as disc drives, tape drives,      
  10022.    and printers.                                                                
  10023.                                                                                 
  10024.                                                                                 
  10025. Pixel - The smallest, individually controllable, element (or cell)              
  10026.    displayed as dots of colour on the monitor's screen.  The monitor area       
  10027.    is made up of lines of pixels.  For each pixel, there is a corresponding     
  10028.    location in the refresh memory for storing the data value associated         
  10029.    with that pixel.  This location is the smallest datum area which can be      
  10030.    individually controlled by the software.  See also Image and Location.       
  10031.                                                                                 
  10032. Point - A geographic feature which, for display purposes, may be described      
  10033.    by only indicating its location as an x and y coordinate.                    
  10034.                                                                                 
  10035. Polygon - A geographic area described by the line segments forming its          
  10036.    boundary and the zone name which forms its surface.  One or more             
  10037.    polygons may be combined to form a zone.                                     
  10038.                                                                                 
  10039. Presentation Maps - A set of maps prepared for rapid display on the             
  10040.    monitor.                                                                     
  10041.                                                                                 
  10042. Primary Variate - The set of statistical values characterized by a common       
  10043.    name which is displayed on any given single variate map.  Two such sets      
  10044.    of values are displayed on a bivariate map.  The primary variate is          
  10045.    named at the top of the title, and its colour values are indicated in        
  10046.    the rows of the legend.  See also Variate.                                   
  10047.                                                                                 
  10048. Processor - The hardware which executes the procedural and computational        
  10049.    tasks specified by OzGIS.  The standard OzGIS processor is a                 
  10050.    Digital Equipment Corporation minicomputer, the VAX.                         
  10051.                                                                                 
  10052.  Projection - The representation of a physical shape on the screen of the       
  10053.    monitor according to a fixed mathematical coordinate system.  Normally,      
  10054.    a projection in OzGIS terms will refer to a method for presenting            
  10055.  
  10056.                                                                      187
  10057.    maps of geographic areas.  See also Map Projection.                          
  10058.                                                                                 
  10059. Quantile - Any of the specific values which divide the range of a statistic     
  10060.    into equal sized classes.  Some values have other special terms, i.e.,       
  10061.    if the range is divided into four classes, the boundary values are           
  10062.    called quartiles.  See also Percentile.                                      
  10063.                                                                                 
  10064. Quantify - To assign a number or quantity to an otherwise unnumbered            
  10065.    entity.  In particular, to assign a class number to a statistical value      
  10066.    or zone name.                                                                
  10067.                                                                                 
  10068. Quantization - The process of assigning class numbers to zones according to     
  10069.    the value of the statistic for that zone.  Viewed the other way,             
  10070.    quantization is the process of putting zones into classes.                   
  10071.                                                                                 
  10072. Quartile - One of the three data values which divide the range of a variate     
  10073.    into four equal sized classes.  See also Quantile and Percentile.            
  10074.                                                                                 
  10075. Raster - a term applied to image data.  In particular data handled on a         
  10076.    line basis.                                                                  
  10077.                                                                                 
  10078.                                                                                 
  10079. Refresh Memory - The portion of the hardware (within the display                
  10080.    controller) which holds the digital data necessary to continuously           
  10081.    regenerate the colour monitor display.  The cathode ray tube (CRT) of        
  10082.    the monitor produces its display by electrically stimulating various         
  10083.    phosphorus based compounds deposited on its face.  The colours thus          
  10084.    produced fade rapidly with time and must be continually "refreshed".         
  10085.    The data necessary to perform this refresh correctly is stored in the        
  10086.    refresh memory.                                                              
  10087.                                                                                 
  10088. Region - A designated portion of a map displayed on the monitor.  A region      
  10089.    consists of one or more zones or parts of zones defined in some way          
  10090.    (e.g. a circular region centered at a point on the map).  The concept of     
  10091.    a region is important when the displayed map consists of several             
  10092.    geographic areas.  In this context, a region consists of a window            
  10093.    (geographic area) and its displayed viewport on the screen (screen           
  10094.    area).  See also Area.                                                       
  10095.                                                                                 
  10096. Save - To store on disc (or magnetic tape) all the pertinent data regarding     
  10097.    a map displayed on the monitor.  The maps which are "saved" can later be     
  10098.    fully regenerated with all details preserved.                                
  10099.                                                                                 
  10100. Scatter Diagram - A two dimensional plot of points whose x and y                
  10101.    coordinates are the values of the individual variates associated with        
  10102.    those points.  Scatter diagrams are displayed on the monitor in              
  10103.    conjunction with bivariate maps.  In this instance, each map zone is         
  10104.    assigned a point on the diagram.  The y-coordinate of the point              
  10105.    corresponds to the value of the primary variate for that zone as             
  10106.    displayed on the map.  The x-coordinate of the point has a similar           
  10107.    relationship to the secondary variate.  In addition, the point will be       
  10108.    coloured the same as its associated map zone.  Scatter diagrams provide      
  10109.    a visual method of assessing the correlation between the two variates        
  10110.    displayed on the map.                                                        
  10111.                                                                                 
  10112. Secondary Variate - The second set of statistical values which are              
  10113.    displayed (along with a primary variate) on the map.  The                    
  10114.    secondary variate is named at the bottom of the title.  See also Primary     
  10115.  
  10116.                                                                      188
  10117.    Variate.                                                                     
  10118.                                                                                 
  10119. Segment - A set of connected straight lines defined to OzGIS by                 
  10120.    specifying the coordinates of their starting, intermediate, and end          
  10121.    points, along with the names of the two zones on either side of the          
  10122.    lines.  Consequently, segments must represent a portion, or all, of the      
  10123.    boundary between two zones.  See also Line and Boundary.                     
  10124.                                                                                 
  10125. Site - A geographic location that has associated attribute data.  A site is     
  10126.    defined by a name and fixed location e.g. a site could be a city or a        
  10127.    retail store.                                                                
  10128.                                                                                 
  10129. Standard Deviation - A statistical measure of the dispersion amongst a set      
  10130.    of measured values.  The standard deviation is mathematically equivalent     
  10131.    to the positive square root of the variance of the sample on which the       
  10132.    statistic is based.                                                          
  10133.                                                                                 
  10134.                                                                                 
  10135. Statistics - A general term referring to:  1) The branch of mathematics         
  10136.    involved with performing certain analytical calculations regarding           
  10137.    various relationships among sets of numerical data, and 2) The numerical     
  10138.    results of such calculations.  The height of an individual is data;  the     
  10139.    average height of a group is a statistic.                                    
  10140.                                                                                 
  10141. Status - The present condition of the software and hardware system,             
  10142.    especially as to its progress toward the completion of the tasks at          
  10143.    hand.  The status messages are displayed as a response to                    
  10144.    typing interpretation of various abbreviated messages displayed on the       
  10145.    terminal.  The status messages are displayed as a response to typing an      
  10146.    "S" command.                                                                 
  10147.                                                                                 
  10148. Terminal - An item of hardware comprising a keyboard for entering commands      
  10149.    to the processor, and some means for the processor to return                 
  10150.    alpha-numeric messages to the user.  The standard OzGIS terminal is          
  10151.    the Digital Equipment Corporation VT100.  This contains the necessary        
  10152.    keyboard, and a cathode ray tube for displaying processor generated          
  10153.    messages.  Some OzGIS installations may also have a printer terminal         
  10154.    for providing a permanent copy of the messages on paper.                     
  10155.                                                                                 
  10156. Territory - a zone which has been formed by amalgamating bas zones e.g. sales   
  10157.    territories formed from postcodes.                                           
  10158.                                                                                 
  10159. Text - Combinations of characters which may be specified by typing at the       
  10160.    terminal.  Lines of text may be displayed on either the terminal or the      
  10161.    monitor in various fonts.  See also Character, and Line.                     
  10162.                                                                                 
  10163. Time Lapse Maps - A formatted set of maps concerning a geographic area and      
  10164.    certain statistics associated with it as they have been collected over       
  10165.    time.  Time lapse files are used to display the time related changes in      
  10166.    the statistical data by rapid and periodic changes in map colours            
  10167.    corresponding to the statistics.  For example, variations in population      
  10168.    density, as recorded by the 1971, 1976, and 1981 census data, could be       
  10169.    shown by changing the colours of the displayed map at one second             
  10170.    intervals corresponding to the 3 sets of data.                               
  10171.                                                                                 
  10172. User - The person who is interactively controlling the OzGIS system at          
  10173.    the terminal.                                                                
  10174.                                                                                 
  10175.  
  10176.                                                                      189
  10177. Value - The number associated with a particular statistical item, as            
  10178.    opposed to the colour associated with that item.  For example, the zone      
  10179.    might be coloured red to indicate four to ten beer drinkers per pub in       
  10180.    that zone.  The actual value of the statistic might be 9.4 beer drinkers     
  10181.    per pub.                                                                     
  10182.                                                                                 
  10183. Variate - A measurable quantity which may take on any of the values within      
  10184.    a given range, and which has associated with it a specified probability      
  10185.    function describing the manner in which the permissible values are           
  10186.    likely to occur.  See also Bivariate, Primary Variate, and Secondary         
  10187.    Variate.                                                                     
  10188.                                                                                 
  10189. Viewport - The rectangular area of the colour monitor face selected for         
  10190.    displaying a specified item.                                                 
  10191.                                                                                 
  10192. Window - The rectangular portion of a geographic map which is selected for      
  10193.    display on the colour monitor.                                               
  10194.                                                                                 
  10195.                                                                                 
  10196. Zone - A geographic area which is to be considered as a spatial unit.  A        
  10197.    zone is defined in terms of one or more polygons which form it.              
  10198.    Statistically, a zone is defined in terms of a single value for each         
  10199.    variate in question.  This relationship of one variate value per defined     
  10200.    geographic zone allows zones to be completely and uniformly coloured in      
  10201.    a map display.  See also Polygon and Variate.                                
  10202.                                                                                 
  10203. Zone Name - An alphanumeric designation attached to the various                 
  10204.    computerized data associated with a zone.  The zone name facilitates for     
  10205.    the processor the task of relating various data items to the proper          
  10206.    zones.                                                                       
  10207.  
  10208.                                                                      190
  10209.                      E. SYSTEM LIMITS                                     
  10210.                        =============
  10211.  
  10212. The OzGIS system has a standard set of limits to various maximum counts. These  
  10213. correspond to array sizes.                                                      
  10214.                                                                                 
  10215. The limited memory on the PC makes these limits quite small under DOS, but      
  10216. are quite large for the WINDOWS version (and could be even larger).             
  10217.                                                                                 
  10218.                                                                                 
  10219. The standard limits are:-                                                       
  10220.                                                                                 
  10221. DOS WINDOWS                                                                     
  10222.                                                                                 
  10223. 450 15000  max no displayed zones+sites+lines                                   
  10224. 450 15000  max no values in attribute file (zones,sites,lines)                  
  10225. 10         max no map regions                                                   
  10226. 10         max no quantised zone geog files                                     
  10227. 10         max no quantised site geog files                                     
  10228. 10         max no quantised line geog files                                     
  10229. 10         max no line overlays                                                 
  10230. 10         max no polygon underlays                                             
  10231. 10         max no marker overlays                                               
  10232. 10         max no name overlays                                                 
  10233. 20         max no test strings displayed                                        
  10234. 50  500    max no polygons in a zone                                            
  10235. 499 5000   max no segments in a polygon                                         
  10236. 100 100    max no segments in a line                                            
  10237. 256 5000   max no vertices in a segment                                         
  10238. 500 20000  max no points in a fast display polygon                              
  10239. 100 1000   max no zones per item in a combine file                              
  10240. 256        max length of display system LUT (number colours)                    
  10241. 2000 50000 max no vertices in foreign segments data file                        
  10242. 5000       max no zones that can be built from line segments                    
  10243. 1000 10000 max no vertices in object for spatial operations                     
  10244. 125  5000  max no items in a text attribute file                                
  10245. 450 15000  max no zones in a catchment                                          
  10246. 200        max no points in a catchment polygon                                 
  10247. 5          max no contours in a site catchment                                  
  10248.  
  10249.                                                                      191
  10250.                      F. TROUBLE-SHOOTING                                  
  10251.                        ================
  10252.  
  10253. Startup problems are usually caused by not defining the WINDOWS group items     
  10254. properly. You cannot simply execute the WOZGIS.EXE file directly from the file  
  10255. manager as the directory has to be defined.                                     
  10256.                                                                                 
  10257. "Not Enogh Memory" problems are usually just that. You need $ Meg of RAM, and   
  10258. if you have network software etc loaded you may not have enough space. Note     
  10259. that the system will not run on a 286.                                          
  10260.                                                                                 
  10261. The development machine has 4Meg of RAM and runs WINDOWS 3.1 with a default     
  10262. installation. The DOS "MEM" command gives:                                      
  10263.                                                                                 
  10264.     655360 bytes total conventional memory                                      
  10265.     655360 bytes available to MS-DOS                                            
  10266.     545328 largest executable program size                                      
  10267.                                                                                 
  10268.    1048576 bytes total EMS memory                                               
  10269.    1048576 bytes free EMS memory                                                
  10270.                                                                                 
  10271.    3407872 bytes total contiguous extended memory                               
  10272.          0 bytes available contiguous extended memory                           
  10273.    1048576 bytes available XMS memory                                           
  10274.            MS-DOS resident in High Memory Area                                  
  10275.                                                                                 
  10276. If no text appears on maps the fonts used are probably not installed. See the   
  10277. installation chapter on \ozgis\ozgis.ini                                        
  10278.                                                                                 
  10279. IO errors can be caused initially by lack of disk space. Some processing        
  10280. uses a lot of disk space as scratch files.                                      
  10281. If you have trouble with menus reload the \ozgis\ozgis.men file. This file      
  10282. defines all the menus and actions and is constantly rewritten. A hardware error 
  10283. could corrupt the file.                                                         
  10284.                                                                                 
  10285. Check the osgis.out file after problems to see if there are any error messages. 
  10286. Also look in windows.out                                                        
  10287.                                                                                 
  10288. The system generates scratch files with names ZZ... You have have to delete     
  10289. them sometimes.                                                                 
  10290. GIS data (digitised data) are often incorrect. This can cause problems with     
  10291. polygon display e.g. if zone boundaries cross themselves, and during zone       
  10292. building. Your data supplier probably wont be of much help. Try windowing into  
  10293. the part of the map with problems to isolate it and use the debug option to     
  10294. print values. You will have to patch the data files with a word processor.      
  10295.                                                                                 
  10296. Rebooting the system while the OzGIS programs are running can cause "loss" of   
  10297. disk space. This can be recovered using CHKDSK.                                 
  10298.  
  10299.                                                                      192
  10300.                      G. REFERENCES                                        
  10301.                        ==========
  10302.  
  10303.                                                                                 
  10304. O'CALLAGHAN, J.F., SIMONS, L. and PALMER, J.A.B. (1980).  A prototype           
  10305. system for interactive colour mapping.  Proc. URPIS-8 (k. Davies (ed.)),        
  10306. Surfers Paradise, pp. 9.1-9.5.                                                  
  10307.                                                                                 
  10308. SIMONS, L., O'CALLAGHAN, J.F. and PAINE, T. (1982).  COLOURMAP - an             
  10309. interactive colour mapping workstation.  Proc. DECUS (Digital Equipment         
  10310. Computer Users Society), Melbourne, Vol. 10, pp.1501-1504.                      
  10311.                                                                                 
  10312. O'CALLAGHAN J.F., and SIMONS, L.W.J. (1983) COLOURMAP: An Interactive           
  10313. Colour Mapping System. Proc. First Australasian Conference on Computer          
  10314. Graphics, Sydney.                                                               
  10315.                                                                                 
  10316. O'CALLAGHAN J.F., and SIMONS, L.W.J. (1984).   Map Display Techniques for       
  10317. Interactive Colour Mapping.                                                     
  10318.                                                                                 
  10319. Henzell, O'Callaghan. A Sequential Line Simplification Algorithm based on       
  10320. Equivalent Height. CSIRONET Technical Report, May 1980                          
  10321.                                                                                 
  10322. Robertson, O'Callaghan. The Generation of Colour Sequences for Univariate and   
  10323. Bivariate Mapping. IEEE Computer Graphics and Applications, February 1986.      
  10324.                                                                                 
  10325. Gerald Evenden. Cartographic Projection Procedures for the UNIX Environment - A 
  10326. User's Manual. USGS open-file report 90-284.                                    
  10327.                                                                                 
  10328. TIGER/Line Census Files, 1990 Technical Documentation / prepared                
  10329. by the Bureau of the Census. Washington:  The Bureau, 1991.                     
  10330.                                                                                 
  10331. Atef A Elassal. General Cartographic Transformation Package (GCTP), Version ii  
  10332. NOAA Technical Report NOS 124 CGS 9                                             
  10333.                                                                                 
  10334. J Sibert, 'Continuous-colour Choropleth Maps', Geo-Processing, (1980)           
  10335. 207-216.                                                                        
  10336.                                                                                 
  10337. 'The Harvard Library of Computer Graphics Mapping Collection', Harvard          
  10338. University.                                                                     
  10339.                                                                                 
  10340. E Giamottic and P Puliafits, 'An Interactive Spatial Information System: A      
  10341. Tool for Regional Planning'; Proc IFIP 79.                                      
  10342.                                                                                 
  10343. J Dalton et al, 'Interactive Colour Map Displays of Domestic Information',      
  10344. Proc SIGGRAPH 79, Computer Graphics, Vol 13 No 2 ACM/SiGGRAPH.                  
  10345.                                                                                 
  10346. A Robinson et al, 'Elements of Cartography', Wiley 1978.                        
  10347.                                                                                 
  10348.                                                                                 
  10349. D Des Jardins, 'Multi-Level Statistical Maps in Graphic Communication',         
  10350. Proc NCGA, Anaheim 1982.                                                        
  10351.                                                                                 
  10352. "ACORD: AUTOMATIC COUNTOURING OF RAW DATA, Computers & Geosciences,             
  10353. vol. 8, no. 1, p. 97-101, 1982", by D.F. Watson.                                
  10354.                                                                                 
  10355.  
  10356.                     CONTENTS
  10357.  
  10358.   1. OzGIS INTRODUCTION                                              4          
  10359.   1. 1 Programs                                                      4          
  10360.   1. 2 Concepts                                                      4          
  10361.   1. 3 Environment                                                   5          
  10362.   2. INSTALLATION                                                    7          
  10363.   2. 1 Installation                                                  7          
  10364.   2. 2 Documentation                                                 7          
  10365.   2. 3 Directories                                                   7          
  10366.   2. 4 Environment                                                   8          
  10367.   2. 5 Display Drivers                                               8          
  10368.   2. 6 Installion in WINDOWS                                         8          
  10369.   2. 7 OzGIS initialisation file                                     9          
  10370.   2. 8 Demonstration                                                10          
  10371.   2. 9 First Example Map                                            10          
  10372.   2.10 Second Example Map                                           11          
  10373.   2.11 Hardcopy configuration                                       11          
  10374.   2.12 Digitiser (not implemented)                                  11          
  10375.   3. DATA ENTRY                                                     12          
  10376.   3. 1 Introduction                                                 12          
  10377.   3. 2 Example of data entry                                        13          
  10378.   3. 3 Demonstration Files                                          15          
  10379.   3. 4 Example geographic and attribute data                        15          
  10380.   3. 5 Example device files                                         16          
  10381.   3. 6 Marker data files                                            16          
  10382.   3. 7 Colour names data (no longer used)                           16          
  10383.   4. BASIC CHOROPLETH MAPPING EXAMPLE                               17          
  10384.   4. 1 Simple Census-type Mapping                                   17          
  10385.   4. 2 Example Choropleth Map                                       17          
  10386.   4. 3 Summary                                                      20          
  10387.   5. INTERACTIVE USER INTERFACE TO OzGIS                            21          
  10388.   5. 1 OzGIS Menus                                                  21          
  10389.   5. 2 Question Dialog Boxes                                        22          
  10390.   5. 3 Command Dialog Boxes                                         22          
  10391.   5. 4 Graphic interaction                                          23          
  10392.   5. 5  Print file                                                  23          
  10393.   6. OzGIS FILES                                                    24          
  10394.   6. 1 File Origins                                                 24          
  10395.   6. 2 File types                                                   25          
  10396.   6. 3 File Names                                                   27          
  10397.   6. 4 Directories                                                  28          
  10398.   7. DEVICE FILES                                                   29          
  10399.   8. OzGIS MAP TYPES                                                32          
  10400.   8. 1 Map Types                                                    32          
  10401.   8. 2 Attribute maps                                               32          
  10402.   8. 2. 1 Bivariate zones map Example                               33          
  10403.   8. 2. 2 Zones & sites Example                                     33          
  10404.   8. 2. 3 Geographic (GIS) maps Example                             34          
  10405.   8. 2. 4 Diagrams Example                                          36          
  10406.   8. 3 Presentations                                                37          
  10407.   8. 4 Saved-display files                                          37          
  10408.   8. 5 Time Lapse Display (not available)                           37          
  10409.   9. ATTRIBUTE SELECTION                                            38          
  10410.   9. 1 Introduction                                                 38          
  10411.   9. 2 From a list                                                  38          
  10412.   9. 3 Sequentially                                                 38          
  10413.   9. 4 By number (position in file)                                 38          
  10414.  
  10415.   9. 5 By attribute description                                     38          
  10416.   9. 6 By arithmetic operation                                      39          
  10417.   9. 7 Zone/Site/Line names                                         39          
  10418.  10. QUANTISATION                                                   40          
  10419.  10. 1 Introduction                                                 40          
  10420.  10. 2 Quantisation Methods                                         41          
  10421.  10. 3 Quantisation Ranges                                          43          
  10422.  10. 4 Quantisation Lists                                           43          
  10423.  11. GEOGRAPHIC OVERLAYS                                            45          
  10424.  11. 1 Introduction                                                 45          
  10425.  11. 2 USA Census / TIGER Overlays Example                          46          
  10426.  12.  DISPLAY CONTROL & MAP DESIGN                                  48          
  10427.  12. 1 Introduction                                                 48          
  10428.  12. 2  Map Quantisation Legends                                    48          
  10429.  12. 3 Overlays (GIS) legends                                       50          
  10430.  12. 4 Other Legends                                                50          
  10431.  12. 5 Text                                                         50          
  10432.  12. 6 Attribute Diagrams                                           50          
  10433.  12. 7 Displayed Colours (removed)                                  51          
  10434.  13. MAP REGIONS                                                    53          
  10435.  13. 1 Introduction                                                 53          
  10436.  13. 2 Regions                                                      54          
  10437.  13. 3 Map List                                                     55          
  10438.  13. 4 Quantised Zones                                              55          
  10439.  13. 5 Quantised lines                                              56          
  10440.  13. 6 Quantised sites                                              56          
  10441.  13. 7 Line Overlays                                                56          
  10442.  13. 8 Polygon underlays                                            57          
  10443.  13. 9 Marker Overlays                                              57          
  10444.  13.10 Name Overlays                                                57          
  10445.  13.11 Map Modification                                             57          
  10446.  14.  MAP ANALYSIS                                                  58          
  10447.  14. 1 Introduction                                                 58          
  10448.  14. 2 Map Reports                                                  58          
  10449.  14. 3 Attribute Data Statistics                                    58          
  10450.  14. 4 Map Interrogation                                            59          
  10451.  15. DATA PREPARATION                                               61          
  10452.  15. 1 Introduction                                                 61          
  10453.  15. 2 Attribute Files                                              61          
  10454.  15. 3 Geographic Files                                             62          
  10455.  15. 4  Names Files                                                 63          
  10456.  15. 5  Output to Data Files                                        63          
  10457.  15. 6 Palette Files (Removed from system)                          64          
  10458.  15. 7 Colour Names Files  (Removed from system)                    64          
  10459.  16. BUILDING ZONES FROM SEGMENTS                                   65          
  10460.  16. 1 Use                                                          65          
  10461.  16. 2 Faulty Digitised Data                                        66          
  10462.  16. 3 Example                                                      66          
  10463.  17. WK1 INTERFACE TO OTHER SOFTWARE                                68          
  10464.  17. 1 Introduction                                                 68          
  10465.  17. 2 Attribute data                                               68          
  10466.  17. 3 Names Files (lists of names)                                 69          
  10467.  17. 4 Points                                                       69          
  10468.  17. 5 Territories and Catchments                                   69          
  10469.  17. 6 Addresses                                                    69          
  10470.  18. MAP PROJECTIONS                                                70          
  10471.  18. 1 Introduction                                                 70          
  10472.  18. 2 Precision                                                    70          
  10473.  
  10474.  18. 3 Latitude / longitude                                         70          
  10475.  18. 4 Projections                                                  71          
  10476.  18. 5 Ellipsoids                                                   71          
  10477.  18. 6 Use                                                          72          
  10478.  18. 7 Example                                                      72          
  10479.  19. HARDCOPY MAP PRODUCTION                                        73          
  10480.  19. 1 Overview                                                     73          
  10481.  19. 2 Procedure                                                    74          
  10482.  19. 3 Photographs                                                  74          
  10483.  19. 4 OzMap Device files                                           75          
  10484.  19. 5 VECTOR Program                                               75          
  10485.  19. 6 OzMap Example                                                79          
  10486.  19. 7 Fitting Maps on the Page                                     79          
  10487.  20. TERRITORY DEFINITION                                           82          
  10488.  21. ADDRESS MATCHING / GEOCODING                                   84          
  10489.  21. 1 Introduction                                                 84          
  10490.  21. 2 Addresses                                                    84          
  10491.  21. 3 Data entry                                                   85          
  10492.  21. 4 Address Matching                                             85          
  10493.  21. 5 Matching Addresses                                           86          
  10494.  21. 6 Procedure                                                    86          
  10495.  21. 7 Data                                                         87          
  10496.  21. 8 Abbreviations parameter file                                 88          
  10497.  21. 9 Handling Errors                                              88          
  10498.  22. SPATIAL OPERATIONS                                             90          
  10499.  22. 1 Operations                                                   90          
  10500.  22. 2 Feature codes                                                91          
  10501.  22. 3 Procedure                                                    91          
  10502.  23. OzDigit DIGITISING (being ported from VAX)                     93          
  10503.  23. 1 Introduction                                                 93          
  10504.  23. 2 Configuration                                                93          
  10505.  23. 3 Files                                                        93          
  10506.  23. 4 Preparation for Digitising                                   94          
  10507.  23. 5 Setting up the Menu                                          94          
  10508.  23. 6 Control points                                               96          
  10509.  23. 7 Digitising the Map                                           96          
  10510.  23. 8 Examining digitised data                                     98          
  10511.  23. 9 Giving Names and Feature codes                               98          
  10512.  23.10 Forming Polygons / checking                                  98          
  10513.  23.11 Editing Digitised Data                                       99          
  10514.  23.12 Variations                                                   99          
  10515.  24. SITE CATCHMENTS                                               100          
  10516.  24. 1 Introduction                                                100          
  10517.  24. 2 Example                                                     102          
  10518.  24. 3 Geographic files                                            104          
  10519.  24. 4 Catchment files                                             105          
  10520.  24. 5 Catchment modification                                      105          
  10521.   A. MAP DATA FORMATS                                              107          
  10522.   A. 1 Introduction                                                107          
  10523.   A. 2 OzGIS data Formats                                          107          
  10524.   A. 3 Description of File Formats                                 108          
  10525.   A. 4 Format of attribute files                                   109          
  10526.   A. 4. 1 Preprocessing                                            109          
  10527.   A. 4. 2 OzGIS Standard Format                                    109          
  10528.   A. 4. 3 Sample attribute file DEMOATTR.DAT                       110          
  10529.   A. 4. 4 Simple Attribute format (tabular database format)        110          
  10530.   A. 4. 5 Sample simple attribute file DEMOSASA.DAT                110          
  10531.   A. 4. 6 Spreadsheet WK1 format (Lotus, Excel etc)                111          
  10532.  
  10533.   A. 4. 7 ATLAS Data files                                         112          
  10534.   A. 4. 8 LAMM format                                              112          
  10535.   A. 4. 9 Comma delimited format                                   113          
  10536.   A. 4.10 Australian 1991 Census format                            114          
  10537.   A. 4.11 Other attribute data formats                             114          
  10538.   A. 5 Text Attribute files                                        115          
  10539.   A. 6 Standard OzGIS formats for geographic files                 116          
  10540.   A. 6. 1 General Information                                      116          
  10541.   A. 6. 2 Structure of data                                        116          
  10542.   A. 6. 3 Internal Data                                            117          
  10543.   A. 6. 4 Comment Record                                           117          
  10544.   A. 6. 5 Map Partition                                            117          
  10545.   A. 6. 6 Zones Partition                                          118          
  10546.   A. 6. 7 Line Partition                                           118          
  10547.   A. 6. 8 Polygons Partition                                       119          
  10548.   A. 6. 9 Segments Partition                                       119          
  10549.   A. 6.10 Points Partitions                                        121          
  10550.   A. 6.11 Sample boundaries geographic file DEMOZSEG.DAT           121          
  10551.   A. 6.12 Sample segments file with adddresses DEMOADDR.DAT        122          
  10552.   A. 6.13 Sample lines geographic file DEMOLINES.DAT               124          
  10553.   A. 6.14 Sample points geographic file DEMOPOINT.DAT              125          
  10554.   A. 7 Format of polygon geographic files                          126          
  10555.   A. 7. 1 Standard (not implemented)                               126          
  10556.   A. 7. 2 SAS Format Zone Files                                    126          
  10557.   A. 7. 3 Simple Format (old SAS) Zone Files                       127          
  10558.   A. 7. 4 Sample simple zones data file DEMOSASG.DAT               128          
  10559.   A. 8 GIS / common geographic file formats                        129          
  10560.   A. 8. 1 DIME format                                              129          
  10561.   A. 8. 2 DLG optional 3 format                                    129          
  10562.   A. 8. 3 Gina format                                              131          
  10563.   A. 8. 4 ANSII standard                                           133          
  10564.   A. 8. 5 SIF format (not available)                               133          
  10565.   A. 8. 6 DXF format                                               134          
  10566.   A. 8. 7 IDRISI Vector Format                                     135          
  10567.   A. 8. 8 ATLAS Export Format                                      135          
  10568.   A. 8. 9 MapInfo Data Interchange Format                          138          
  10569.   A. 9 Format of names files                                       141          
  10570.   A. 9. 1 Sample names file DEMOATTR.DAT                           141          
  10571.   A.10 Format of colour names files (Removed from system)          141          
  10572.   A.11 Format of combine files                                     142          
  10573.   A.11. 1 Sample combine file DEMOCOMB.DAT                         142          
  10574.   A.12 Format of presentation files                                142          
  10575.   A.12. 1 Sample presentation file                                 143          
  10576.   A.13 Format of marker files                                      143          
  10577.   A.13. 1 Sample marker file SQUARE.DAT                            144          
  10578.   A.14 Format of device files                                      144          
  10579.   B. USA Census data                                               150          
  10580.   B. 1 Overview                                                    150          
  10581.   B. 2 Documentation                                               151          
  10582.   B. 3 OzGIS Processing of TIGER data                              151          
  10583.   B. 4 Processing STF1A data                                       152          
  10584.   B. 5 The STF1A parameter file                                    153          
  10585.   B. 6 Example                                                     154          
  10586.   B. 7 OzGIS Census Zone Names                                     163          
  10587.   B. 8 STF1A Census data                                           163          
  10588.   B. 9 STF1A Geographic areas                                      163          
  10589.   B. 9. 1 Blocks                                                   163          
  10590.   B. 9. 2 Block Groups                                             164          
  10591.  
  10592.   B. 9. 3 Census tract and block numbering area                    164          
  10593.   B. 9. 4 Census Tract                                             165          
  10594.   B. 9. 5 County                                                   165          
  10595.   B. 9. 6 Hierarchical Presentation                                166          
  10596.   B. 9. 7 Zip codes                                                166          
  10597.   B.10 The STF1A file                                              167          
  10598.   B.10. 1 File Segments                                            167          
  10599.   B.10. 2 Field Names In Numeric Data Tables                       168          
  10600.   B.11  TIGER US Census Digital Map Data                           168          
  10601.   B.12  TIGER files                                                168          
  10602.   B.13 TIGER Geographic Area Definitions                           170          
  10603.   B.14 TIGER feature codes                                         172          
  10604.   C. CONFIGURING OZGIS                                             178          
  10605.   C. 1 Hardcopy configuration for  OzMap                           178          
  10606.   C. 2 Plotter setup                                               179          
  10607.   D. GLOSSARY OF TERMS                                             181          
  10608.   E. SYSTEM LIMITS                                                 190          
  10609.   F. TROUBLE-SHOOTING                                              191          
  10610.   G. REFERENCES                                                    192          
  10611.